AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR WIRELESS TOWER SITES
December 8, 2014
American Tower Corporation
3500 Regency Parkway, Suite 100
Cary, NC 27518
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
REVISION HISTORY
Rev*
Description of Change
Author
Effective Date
14.1
Initial development
William Garrett
11/14/2014
14.2
First Release
William Garrett
12/8/14
*Revision numbering: Year, and revision version during that year. Example 14.1 = 2014, first revision
Full description of change is to be included in each future revision
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS FOR TOWER SITES
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 011000
General Requirements for Tower Sites
Section 014320
Quality Control, Testing and Special Inspection Services
DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS
Section 024100
Demolition for Tower Sites
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
Section 033000
Cast-In-Place Concrete
Section 034100
Precast Structural Concrete
DIVISION 04 - MASONRY
Section 042000
Unit Masonry
DIVISION 05 - METALS
Section 055000
Metal Fabrications for Tower Sites
DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES
Section 061000
Rough Carpentry
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
Section 070150
Roofing
Section 072100
Thermal Insulation
Section 076200
Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
Section 079200
Joint Sealants
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS
Section 081110
Steel Doors and Frames
Section 089000
Louvers and Vents
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
Section 092110
Gypsum Board Assemblies
Section 096510
Resilient Flooring and Accessories
Section 099000
Painting and Coating
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
Section 102215
Chain Link and Wire Mesh Partitions
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
Section 111000
Antenna Assembly and Installation (future)
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
Section 133419
Metal Building Systems
Section 133430
Pre-fabricated Concrete Shelters
DIVISION 23 - HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
Section 230000
Heating, Ventilating and Air-Conditioning for Tower Sites
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
Section 260000
Electrical Work for Tower Sites
DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK
Section 311000
Site Clearing
Section 312000
Access Roads and Earth Work
Section 312500
Erosion and Sedimentation Controls
Section 315000
Excavation Support and Protection
Section 316329
Drilled Concrete Piers and Shafts
TABLE OF CONTENTS FOR TOWER SITES
000110 - 1
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS FOR TOWER SITES
DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
Section 321216
Asphalt Paving
Section 321313
Concrete Paving
Section 323113
Chain Link Fences and Gates
Section 323223
Segmental Retaining Walls
Section 329300
Plants
DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES
Section 338110
Steel Communication Structures
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS FOR TOWER SITES
000110 - 2
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
SECTION 011000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR TOWER SITES
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
Related Documents
Geotechnical Data
Project Requirements
Specification Information
Definitions
Industry Standards
Codes and Regulations
Progress Schedule
Payment Requests
Procedures and Controls
1.11
1.12
1.13
1.14
1.15
1.16
1.17
1.19
1.20
1.21
Submittals
Cutting and Patching
Temporary Facilities and Utilities
Construction Waste Management
Products and Substitutions
Delivery, Storage and Handling
Owner-Furnished (OFCI) Products
Record Documents
Project Close Out
References
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
All of the Contract Documents apply to this Section. This Section applies to all Work performed
under the Contract executed and Purchase Order issued to Contractor.
GEOTECHNICAL DATA
A.
This Document with its referenced geotechnical investigation report is part of the Procurement
and Contracting Requirements for Project. The document(s) provide information for Bidders'
convenience and are intended to supplement rather than serve in lieu of Bidders' own
investigations. They are made available for Bidders' convenience and information, but are not a
warranty of existing conditions. This Document and its attachments are part of the site design
deliverables and due diligence provided to the Contractor on a site specific basis and are not
part of the contract documents.
B.
A geotechnical investigation report for the project is provided to all Bidders by ATC under
separate cover. If Bidder does not receive this geotechnical investigation report, Bidder is
required to request that ATC provide it.
C.
During the bid process for a specific tower site the bidder shall review the geotechnical report in
detail and clearly note any issues or concerns that may increase the scope of work or impact
schedule. Items must be noted on the bidder’s response to ATC and brought to the attention of
the ATC Construction Manager in writing and at the time of bid submittal
1.3
PROJECT REQUIREMENTS
A.
Project Identification: See Cover Page of drawings
B.
Particular Project Requirements: See Construction Drawings, Foundation Design, Tower
Drawings and Geotechnical Report for Special Project Requirements.
C.
Any deviations from the work outlined in the project documents without prior written
authorization from the ATC Construction Manager shall be at contractor’s sole risk and
expense.
D.
Project Requirements for Temporary Utilities and Facilities:
1.
E.
Utility Costs: The Contractor shall be responsible for providing utility services required for
construction, this may include electricity, water, gas and temporary heat.
Toilet Facilities: Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary toilets for the duration of the
project.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR TOWER SITES
011000 - 1
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
F.
Permits and Fees: Contractor may be required to apply for and pull building permits and
electrical permits using there state licenses when required by the municipality. ATC will pay for
the cost of the building permit. The Contractor shall pay for the permit fee for the electrical
permit. Any “make ready” or “aid to construction” fees required by the local power provider in
support of bringing in the primary electrical service to the site will be paid for by ATC.
G.
Reports: Submit copies of inspection reports, notices and similar communications to ATC
Construction Manager. Documents shall be submitted within a timely manner and no more than
48 hours from date of receipt.
H.
Dimensions: Verify dimensions indicated on drawings with field dimensions before fabrication
or ordering of materials. Do not scale drawings.
I.
Existing Conditions: Notify ATC Construction Manager in writing of existing conditions differing
from those indicated on the drawings.
J.
Contractor’s Conduct on Premises: The Contractor, their employees and all other personnel
working under their direction shall at all times behave in a respectful, courteous and safe
manner. Abusive, harassing, and lewd behavior is prohibited. Music playing is prohibited.
Alcohol, tobacco and drug use is prohibited. Pets and firearms are also prohibited on ATC sites.
1.4
SPECIFICATION INFORMATION
A.
1.5
Except where specifically indicated otherwise, the subject of all imperative statements is the
Contractor.
DEFINITIONS
A.
“ATC”: Synonymous with American Tower Corporation, its subsidiaries, Company and Owner.
B.
“Contractor”: Individual or entity who after execution of a contract is bound to accomplish the
work.
C.
“Third Party Vendor or Agency”: A vendor or agency engaged separately by the Company to
provide materials or to accomplish specific tasks related to but not included in the work.
D.
“Engineer”: Synonymous with Architect-Engineer “A&E”. The design professional having
professional responsibility for design of the project.
E.
“Work”: The sum of tasks and responsibilities identified in the ATC contract documents, design
deliverables and scope of work.
F.
"Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities as indicated in the project
documents.
G.
"Approved": When used to convey ATC Construction Manager's action on Contractor's
submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to ATC Construction Manager's
duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.
H.
"Directed": A command or instruction by ATC Construction Manager. Other terms including
"requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted" have the same
meaning as "directed."
I.
"Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on
Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown,"
"noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."
J.
"Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having
jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control
performance of the Work.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR TOWER SITES
011000 - 2
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
K.
"Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,
installation, and similar operations.
L.
"Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking,
assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing,
protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.
M.
"Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
N.
“Owner Furnished”: Owner supplied and delivered to Project site or Contractors place of
business ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.
1.6
INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A.
Referenced standards are part of the Contract Documents and have the same force and effect
as if bound with these specifications.
B.
Except where specifically indicated otherwise, comply with the current standard in effect as of
the date of the Owner/Contractor Agreement. Obtain copies of industry standards directly from
publisher.
C.
The titles of industry standard organizations are commonly abbreviated; full titles may be found
in Encyclopedia of Associations or consult ATC Construction Manager.
1.7
CODES AND REGULATIONS
A.
Comply with all applicable codes, ordinances, regulations and requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction. The requirements of the State Building Code and local regulations establish
the minimum acceptable quality of workmanship and materials, and all work shall conform
thereto unless more stringent requirements are indicated or specified herein.
B.
All work shall comply with the latest editions of the codes, unless specifically noted otherwise
herein.
C.
Submit copies of all permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, notices,
judgments, and communications from authorities having jurisdiction to the ATC Construction
Manager as they become available.
D.
All regulations (e.g., federal and state laws, municipal and local codes, by-laws and ordinances,
and industry standards adopted by the authority having jurisdiction) bearing on the conduct of
the Work or referenced by these Contract Documents are hereby incorporated and made a part
of these specifications.
E.
Perform work strictly as required by rules, regulations, standards, codes, ordinances, and laws
of local, state, and Federal governments, and other authorities that have legal jurisdiction over
the site. Materials and equipment shall be manufactured, installed and tested as specified in
latest editions of applicable publications, standards, rulings and determinations of:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Local and state building, plumbing, mechanical, electrical, fire and health department
codes.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA).
Underwriters’ Laboratories (UL).
F.
Where provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the
latter shall govern. Where the contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or
regulations, the contract provisions shall govern.
G.
Should any change in the drawings and/or specification be required to conform to the codes,
ordinances, regulations or laws herein mentioned, the ATC Construction Manager shall be
notified prior to the time of submitting bids.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR TOWER SITES
011000 - 3
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
1.8
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A.
1.9
Prepare Schedule of Values per ATC Supply Chain standards for each project being bid and
deliver to ATC within timeframes mandated during the bid process. All bid responses shall be
sent to RFP.RLS@americantower.com and never to the ATC Construction Manager direct
PAYMENT REQUESTS
A.
B.
Contractor shall submit initial payment request based on work completed to date and never
more than the percentage of retainage that is to be withheld for final payment and specified in
the Master Contract between ATC and Contractor. To Submit Payment Requests
1.
The following information must be provided on all invoices
a.
Suppliers name, remit to address, phone number, contact information, suppliers
unique invoice number and date of invoice
b.
ATC Purchase Order (PO) number and ATC site number
1)
Price, quantity and total price must match PO
2)
Line description and line item number must match PO
c.
Sales tax subtotal for the invoice (if applicable)
d.
Freight subtotal for the invoice (if applicable)
e.
Release of Lien using ATC approved format
2.
If the Contractor is taking advantage of the ATC ‘Early Pay’ program invoices may be
sent via email to EarlyPayProgram@americantower.com with a CC to the ATC
Construction Manager.
3.
All other invoices shall be sent to:
a.
American Tower, Attention: Accounts Payable Dept. PO Box 2009, Woburn, MA
01801 with a CC to the ATC Construction Manager.
Before final payment application, provide and complete the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.10
A.
Complete closeout requirements.
Complete all punch list items.
Settle all claims.
Transmit close out documentation to ATC Construction Manager.
Remove temporary facilities and surplus materials from site
Clean the work, entire site area and any other areas impacted by the Contractor.
PROCEDURES AND CONTROLS
Project Meetings: As required Contractor shall arrange for and attend meetings with the ATC
Construction Manager and such other persons as the ATC Construction Manager requests to
have present. The Contractor shall be represented by a principal, project manager, general
superintendent or other authorized main office representative, as well as by the Contractor's
field superintendent. An authorized representative of any subcontractor or sub-subcontractor
shall attend such meetings if the representative's presence is requested by the ATC
Construction Manager.
Such representatives shall be empowered to make binding
commitments on all matters to be discussed at such meetings, including costs, payments,
change orders, time schedules and manpower. Any notices required under the Contract may
be served on such representatives. Written reports of meeting minutes shall be prepared by the
Contractor and distributed by the Contractor to attendees, the ATC Construction Manager within
three business days.
1.
2.
Pre-Construction Meetings: Attendance by ATC Construction Manager, Contractor,
major subcontractors. Agenda shall include: Quality of workmanship, coordination,
interpretations, job schedule, submittals, approvals, requisition procedures, testing,
protection of construction, and construction waste management.
Progress Meetings: Hold regularly before preparation of payment requests and additional
meetings as requested by the ATC Construction Manager. Attendance by ATC
Construction Manager, Contractor, and others as determined byATC Construction
Manager. Agenda shall include work in progress and payment requests.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR TOWER SITES
011000 - 4
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
3.
B.
Progress Reports: Provide written progress reports as directed by the ATC Construction
Manager. The frequency of the reports and the content will vary by the complexity and
scope of work for a particular project and be at the sole discretion of the ATC
Construction Manager
Safety: The Contractor shall comply with all Laws concerning safety and health standards.
1.
The Contractor shall not require workers to perform Work under conditions that are
hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary.
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
Workers climbing towers or working at heights shall follow all ATC rules regarding
working at elevated locations.
Workers exposed to traffic shall wear upper body garments or safety vests that are
highly visible.
Workers exposed to falling or flying objects or electrical shock shall wear hard
hats.
Upon their presentation of proper credentials, the Contractor shall allow inspectors of the
U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) or the state or local
occupational safety and health agency to inspect the work site without delay and without
an inspection warrant.
The Contractor shall ensure that all persons working on the site are informed, instructed
and trained by a competent person regarding any hazards, risks and related safe work
procedures before any work commences and thereafter at regular intervals as the risks
change and as new risks develop.
The Contractor shall ensure that all persons who could be negatively affected by its
operations are informed and trained according to the hazards and risks and are
conversant with the safe work procedures, control measures and other related rules.
C.
Emergency Addresses: Furnish the ATC Construction Manager, in writing, the names
addresses and telephone numbers of individuals to be contacted in the event of an after working
hours emergency at the site. Contractor shall notify ATC Construction Manager immediately
and in writing if there is a reportable safety incident or accident on site.
D.
Posting of Signage and Documents: In a secure and conspicuous location erect and display
area all construction permits and notices. This may include, but is not limited to the; building
permit, electrical permit, FCC tower registration number, emergency protocols, contacts and all
OSHA required safety signage. All design documents shall be on site, in hard copy format and
available for review at any time during working hours. This shall include the construction
drawings, foundations design, tower design, geotechnical report, shop drawings
E.
Safe Path of Travel: Maintain safe access and egress onto the public right-of-way for the
duration of the project. Include police details or flag personnel, if required.
F.
Layout: Prior to the start of construction ATC will retain a registered professional engineer or
registered land surveyor, to initially establish exterior lines and required elevations of all
buildings, foundations and structures to be erected on the site. The registered professional
engineer or registered land surveyor will certify the actual location of the constructed facilities in
relation to property lines, lease area, tower and guy anchor locations, building lines, easements,
set-backs, elevations, and other restrictive boundaries.
G.
Field Measurements:
Verify measurements at the site prior to ordering materials or
commencing work. No extra charge or compensation will be allowed because of differences
between actual dimensions and measurements indicated on the Drawings. Differences which
may be found shall be submitted to the ATC Construction Manager for decision before
proceeding with the work.
H.
Field Measurements for Fixed Equipment: Dimensions for fixed equipment to be supplied under
this Contract or separate contracts shall be determined by field measurements taken jointly by
the Contractor and the equipment supplier involved. A record of the field measurements shall
be kept until time of substantial completion of the project, or until the equipment has been fully
installed and accepted by ATC, whichever is later. Responsibility for fixed equipment fabricated
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR TOWER SITES
011000 - 5
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
accurately to field measurements for proper fit and operation shall be that of the Contractor.
Contractor shall pay all costs involved in correcting any misfitting fixed equipment as fabricated.
I.
Documentation of Existing Conditions: Prior to any work commencing on site, take photographs
or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of adjoining construction and site
improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by the absence of, the installation
of, or the performance of any work to be performed on site. Provide to ATC, if requested by
ATC Construction Manager.
J.
Matching: Where matching is indicated, the ATC Construction Manager shall be the sole and
final judge of what is an acceptable match. Mockups and sample submissions are required.
K.
Observation: Notify the ATC Construction Manager, inspection agencies and authorities having
jurisdiction at least thirty-six hours in advance of concealing any work that requires inspection
L.
Utilities: Prior to interrupting any existing utilities, services or facilities, notify the utility owner
and ATC and obtain their written approval a minimum 48 hours in advance. Approval from utility
owner shall be furnished to ATC upon request. Engage utility locator service for area where
Project is located before excavating.
Provide temporary utility services according to
requirements indicated.
M.
Clean-Up: Frequently clean-up all waste, remove from site regularly, and legally dispose of offsite.
N.
Change Orders: Any change to the project scope of work that will result in increased cost to the
Owner must be immediately submitted to the ATC Construction Manager in writing. No work
shall commence until written approval has been provided by the ATC Construction Manager.
Email is an acceptable means of delivering written communications and approvals. Any
discrepancies in the scope of work and change order shall warrant an on-site meeting.
O.
Installer's Acceptance of Conditions: All installers shall inspect substrates and conditions under
which work is to be executed and shall report in writing to the Contractor all conditions
detrimental to the proper execution and completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until
unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning work means installer accepts previous work
and conditions.
P.
Coordination: The Contractor shall be fully responsible for coordinating all trades, coordinating
construction sequences and schedules, and coordinating the actual installed location and
interface of all work.
Q.
Except where modified by a specific notation to the contrary, it shall be understood that the
indication and/or description of any item in the drawings or specifications for work carries with it
the instruction to furnish, install and connect the item as part of the work, regardless of whether
or not this instruction is explicitly stated.
R.
The drawings are generally diagrammatic and indicative of the Work to be installed. Exact
locations of equipment and points of termination shall be reviewed with the designated
representative. Should it be found that any system or equipment cannot be installed as shown
on the drawings, consult with the ATC Construction Manager or designated representative
before installing or making changes to the layout.
S.
The drawings and specifications are intended to function as a common set of documents.
Anything shown on the drawings but not in the specifications, or mentioned in the specifications
and not shown on the drawings, shall be equally binding as if both noted on the drawings and
called for in the specifications. Reference to any individual element of work shown on the
drawings take precedence over the specifications where they conflict with same.
T.
No measurement of a drawing by scale shall be used as a working dimension. The Contractor
shall carefully examine all Project Contract Drawings and Specifications. If any discrepancies
occur between the drawings or between the drawings and specifications, report the
discrepancies to the ATC Construction Manager in writing and obtain written instructions as to
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR TOWER SITES
011000 - 6
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
the manner in which to proceed. No departures from the Contract Drawings shall be made
without prior written instructions from the ATC Construction Manager.
1.11
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submittals: If required, submit shop drawings, product data, initial selection samples,
verification samples, calculations, coordination drawings, schedules, and all other submittals as
specified in individual specification sections.
B.
Contractor's Preparation of Submittals: Identify each submittal with name of project, date,
Contractor's name, subcontractor's name, manufacturer's name and submittal name.
1.
Electronic Submittals: Provide a copy of all submittals in electronic format to the ATC
Construction Manager. ATC Construction Manager will return a file of reviewed submittal
in electronic format to the Contractor for distribution to subcontractors, suppliers,
fabricators, governing authorities and others as necessary for proper performance of the
Work. Unless otherwise amenable to the ATC Construction Manager, additional hard
copies of submittals will not be reviewed by the ATC Construction Manager (or
Consultant) and will not be returned to the Contractor.
C.
Product Data: Manufacturer's preprinted literature including, without limitation, manufacturer's
standard printed description of product, materials and construction, recommendations for
application and use, certification of compliance with standards, instructions for installation, and
special coordination requirements.
D.
Shop Drawings: Accurately prepared, large scale and detailed shop drawings prepared
specifically for this project. Show adjacent conditions and related work. Show accurate field
dimensions and clearly note field conditions. Identify materials and products in the work shown.
Note special coordination required.
E.
Samples: Units identical with final materials and products to be installed in the work. Where
indicated, prepare samples to match ATC Construction Manager's sample. Label each sample
with description, source, generic name or manufacturer's name and model number. ATC
Construction Manager will review samples for confirmation of visual design intent, color, pattern,
texture and type only; ATC Construction Manager will not test samples for compliance with
other Contract requirements which shall remain the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor.
F.
Timing of Submittals: Submit submittals in a timely fashion to allow at least 10 business days
for review and handling. ATC Construction Manager's Action on Submittals: ATC Construction
Manager will review submittals mark action, and return to Contractor. ATC Construction
Manager will review submittals only for conformance with the design concept of the project. The
Contractor is responsible for confirming compliance with other Contract requirements, including
without limitation, performance requirements, field dimensions, fabrication methods, means,
methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction, coordination with other work.
In no case shall approval or acceptance by the ATC Construction Manager be interpreted as a
release of Contractor of their responsibilities to fulfill all of the requirements of the Contract
Documents.
G.
1.
Required Resubmittal: Unless submittal is noted "reviewed" or "reviewed except as
noted, resubmission not required," make corrections or changes to original and resubmit
to ATC Construction Manager.
2.
Distribution: When submittal is noted "reviewed" or "reviewed as noted, resubmittal not
required," make prints or copies and distribute to ATC, Subcontractors involved, and to all
other parties requiring information from the submittal for performance or coordination of
related work.
Delegated-Design Services:
1.
Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by
a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents,
provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR TOWER SITES
011000 - 7
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
indicated. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification
required, submit a written request for additional information to ATC Construction
Manager.
2.
1.12
Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and
other required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF electronic file, signed and sealed
by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned
to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. Indicate that products
and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents.
Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.
CUTTING AND PATCHING
A.
Limitations: Do not cut and patch any work in a manner that would result in a failure of the work
to perform as intended, decreased energy performance, increased maintenance, decreased
operational life, or decreased safety.
B.
Structural Work: Do not cut, remove, change or alter any structural work or bearing walls
without written approval from Engineer of record. Where cutting and patching of structural work
is necessary and approved by Engineer of record and ATC Construction Manager, perform work
in a manner which will not diminish structural capacity nor increase deflection of member.
Provide temporary shoring and bracing as necessary. Ensure the safety of people and property
at all times.
C.
Cutting and Patching Materials: Use materials identical to materials to be cut and patched. If
identical materials are not available or cannot be used, use materials that match existing
materials to the greatest extent possible. Provide finished work that will result in equal to or
better than existing performance characteristics.
D.
Inspection: Before cutting and patching, examine surfaces and conditions under which work is
to be performed and correct unsafe and unsatisfactory conditions prior to proceeding.
E.
Protection: Protect adjacent work from damage. Protect the work from adverse conditions.
F.
Cutting: Cut work using methods least likely to damage adjoining work. Use tools designed for
sawing or grinding, not hammering or chopping. Use saws or drills to ensure neat, accurately
formed holes to sizes required with minimum disturbance to adjacent work. Temporarily cover
openings; maintain weathertightness and safety at all times.
1.
Utilities: Locate utilities before cutting. Provide temporary utilities as needed. Cap,
valve, or plug and seal ends of abandoned utilities to prevent entrance of moisture or
other foreign matter.
G.
Patching: Patch with seams and joints which are durable and not visible. Comply with specified
tolerances for similar new work; create true even planes with uniform continuous appearance.
Restore finishes of patched areas and, if necessary, extend finish restoration onto adjoining
unpatched area to eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. Repaint entire assemblies,
not just patched area. Remove and replace work which has been cut and patched in a visually
unsatisfactory manner as determined by the ATC Construction Manager.
H.
Qualifications: Retain experienced and specialized firms, original installers if possible, to
perform cutting and patching. Workmen shall be skilled in type of cutting and patching required.
1.13
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND UTILITIES
A.
Scope of Temporary Work: This article is not intended to limit the scope of temporary work
required under the Contract. Provide all temporary facilities and utilities needed.
B.
Permits and Fees: Obtain and pay for all permits, fees and charges related to temporary work.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR TOWER SITES
011000 - 8
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
C.
Codes and Authorities Having Jurisdiction for Temporary Facilities and Utilities: Comply with all
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, codes, utility companies, OSHA, and industry
standards including, but not limited to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
NFPA Code 241, Building Construction and Demolition Operations.
ANSI-A10 Series, Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition.
NECA National Joint Guideline NJG-6, Temporary Job Utilities and Services.
Electrical Service: NEMA, NECA, and UL.
D.
Temporary Heat: Provide temporary heat as needed to protect the work and create a suitable
work environment. Provide temporary heat to protect the exterior construction against injury or
damage resulting from cold temperature and dampness, to heat materials, and to maintain the
minimum temperatures specified herein and in individual specification sections. Protect building
from soot, smoke and fire damage. Do not use heaters which would interfere with curing of
mortar and grout or damage any materials.
E.
Pumping and Drainage: Protect excavations, trenches, buildings and materials from rain water,
ground water, backup or leakage of sewers, drains and other piping, and from water of any
other origin. Promptly remove any accumulation of water. Provide and operate all pumps,
piping and other equipment necessary for pumping, drainage and protection from water.
F.
Equipment and Tools: Provide all equipment including, but not limited to, hoists, lifts,
scaffolding, machines, tools and the like, as needed for execution of the work. Provide safe
access to all parts of the work.
G.
Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures to maintain proper temperatures and to
prevent weather damage. Always maintain legal means of egress.
H.
Snow and Ice: Remove all snow and ice which interferes with work or safety.
I.
Streets, Walks and Grounds: Maintain public and private roads and walks clear of debris
caused by construction operations. Repair all damage caused to streets, drives, curbs,
sidewalks, fences, poles and similar items where disturbed or damaged by building construction
and leave them in as good condition after completion of the work as before operations started.
J.
Protection: Protect nearby property and the public from construction activities. Provide and
maintain barricades, warning signs and lights, railings, walkways and similar items.
Immediately repair damaged property to its condition before being damaged.
K.
Public Services: Provide temporary public services such as, street lighting, night lighting,
sidewalks, covered passages, signs, signals and the like, as requested by authorities having
jurisdiction.
L.
Construction Fencing: Provide construction fencing, locks and barriers as applicable to the
project and as required by code and Owner to protect personnel, the public, and to control
access and climbing. Ensue that only authorized personnel have access to the project area.
Provide temporary fencing around the tower base to prevent unauthorized climbing. All locks
provided by the contractor for construction fencing shall have numeric combinations with access
coded provided to the ATC Construction Manager.
M.
Security: Secure site against unauthorized entry at all times. Provide secure, locked temporary
enclosures. Protect the work at all times. Provide watchman service, if necessary, to protect
the work.
N.
Fire Prevention: Take every precaution to prevent fire. Provide and maintain in good operating
condition suitable and adequate fire protection equipment and services, and comply with
recommendations regarding fire protection made by the representative of the fire insurance
company carrying insurance on the Work or by the local fire chief or fire marshal. The area
within the site limits shall be kept orderly and clean, and all combustible rubbish shall be
promptly removed from the site.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR TOWER SITES
011000 - 9
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
O.
1.14
Egress: Maintain safe and legal means of egress at all times. At all times, provide at least two
separate means of egress.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
A.
Description of work: Includes requirements for the Contractor's implementation of waste
management controls and systems for the duration of the Work. The contractor is responsible to
remove and legally dispose of all trash, construction debris and material generated from
clearing and grubbing the site including but not limited to trees, brush, stumps, organic matter.
A.
Intent: ATC has established that this Project shall generate the least amount of waste practical
and that processes that ensure the generation of as little waste as possible due to error, poor
planning, breakage, mishandling, contamination, or other factors shall be employed.
B.
1)
Direct each Subcontractor as to how to segregate his own waste.
2)
Ensure that all debris is disposed of at appropriately designated licensed solid waste
disposal facilities. This may include facilities designated for the disposal of contaminated
waste or soil.
3)
In support of ATC’s “Green initiative”, recycling of waste materials by the Contractor is
strongly encouraged.
Implementation: Designate an on-site person responsible for instructing workers and overseeing
the Waste Management for the Project.
1)
Provide on-site instruction of appropriate separation, handling, and recycling, salvage,
reuse, and return methods to be used by all parties at the appropriate stages of the
Project.
2)
Any unforeseen hazardous wastes shall be separated, stored, and disposed of by the
Contractor according to local regulations.
a)
1.15
Notify ATC Construction Manager of any hazardous materials.
PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
Specified Products: In all cases in which a manufacturer's name, trade name or other
proprietary designation is used in connection with materials or articles to be furnished under this
Contract, whether or not the phrase "or equal" is used after such name, the Contractor shall
provide the product of the named manufacturers without substitution, unless a written request
for a substitution has been submitted by the Contractor and approved in writing by the ATC
Construction Manager as follows.
B.
Deviations from Detailed Requirements: If the Contractor proposes to use material which, while
suitable for the intended use, deviates in any way from the detailed requirements of the Contract
Documents, the Contractor shall inform the ATC Construction Manager in writing of the nature
of such deviations at the time the materials is submitted for approval, and shall request written
approval of the deviation from the requirements of the Contract Documents.
C.
Approval of Substitutions: In requesting approval of deviations or substitutions, the Contractor
shall provide evidence, including, but not limited to manufacturer's data, leading to a reasonable
certainty that the proposed substitution or deviation will provide a quality of result at least equal
to that attainable if the detailed requirements of the Contract Documents were strictly followed.
If, in the opinion of the ATC Construction Manager, the evidence presented by the Contractor
does not provide a sufficient basis for such reasonable certainty, the ATC Construction Manager
may reject such substitution or deviation without further investigation.
D.
Intent of Contract Documents: The Contract Documents are intended to produce a site of
consistent character and quality. The ATC Construction Manager shall judge the design and
appearance of proposed substitutes on the basis of the suitability in relation to the overall
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR TOWER SITES
011000 - 10
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
design of the Project, as well as for their intrinsic merits. The ATC Construction Manager will
not approve as equal to materials specified proposed substitutes which in the ATC Construction
Manager's opinion would be out of character, obtrusive, or otherwise inconsistent with the
character or quality of design of the Project. In order to permit coordinated design of color and
finishes the Contractor shall furnish the substituted material in any color, finish texture, or
pattern which would have been available from the manufacturer originally specified, at no
additional cost to ATC.
E.
Additional Costs or Impact: Any additional cost, or any loss or damage arising from the
substitution of any material or any method for those originally specified shall be borne by the
contractor, notwithstanding approval or acceptance of such substitution by ATC or the ATC
Construction Manager, unless such substitution was made at the written request or direction of
the ATC Construction Manager. Any decrease in the cost of the substitution shall be returned to
ATC.
F.
Manufacturers: To the greatest degree possible, provide primary materials and products from
one manufacturer for each type or kind. Provide secondary materials as recommended by
manufacturers of primary materials.
G.
Substitution Conditions: Substitution requests will be returned without action unless one of the
following conditions is satisfied. The Contractor shall state which of the following conditions
applies to the requested substitution:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Request is due to an "or equal" clause.
Specified material or product cannot be coordinated with other work.
Specified material or product is not acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Substantial advantage is offered ATC in terms of cost, time, or other valuable
consideration.
Specified material or product is not available.
H.
Invalid Substitutions: Contractor's submittal and ATC Construction Manager's acceptance of
shop drawings, samples, product data or other submittal is not a valid request for, nor an
approval of a substitution unless the Contractor presents the information when first submitted as
a Request for Substitution.
I.
Compatibility of Materials Used in the Work:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.16
A.
Ensure complete compatibility between materials.
Compatibility shall include adhesion, erosion, solubility, differential thermal response, and
galvanic action.
Provide evidence of compatibility.
Provide custom testing where evidence is not available.
Where materials are not compatible, provide necessary isolation or transition materials
and provide details of same.
Correct defects resulting from incompatibility including de-construction and reconstruction of assemblies – whether materials are part of a submittal and substitution
process or not.
Proposed substitutions may be rejected where compatibility information is not provided;
or where compatibility is not adequately addressed, according to the ATC Construction
Manager’s judgment; or where incompatible materials would negatively impact the
project’s success.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Manufacturer's Instructions:
Strictly comply with manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations and prevent damage, deterioration and loss, including theft. Minimize longterm storage at the site. Maintain environmental conditions, temperature, ventilation, and
humidity within range permitted by manufacturers of materials and products used.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR TOWER SITES
011000 - 11
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
1.17
A.
OWNER-FURNISHED CONTRACTOR-INSTALLED (OFCI) PRODUCTS
ATC will furnish products as indicated. The Contractor’s Work includes providing support
systems to receive ATC's equipment and making plumbing, mechanical, and electrical
connections.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
B.
1.18
ATC will arrange for and deliver Shop Drawings andProduct Data to Contractor.
ATC will arrange and pay for delivery of Owner-furnished items according to Contractor's
Construction Schedule.
After delivery, Contractor will inspect delivered items for damage and notify ATC within
48 hours of receipt of any discrepancies, damage or shortages. If ATC-furnished items
are delivered damaged, defective, or missing and ATC was notified within 48 hours of
receipt ATC will arrange for replacement.
ATC will arrange for manufacturer's field services and for delivery of manufacturer's
warranties to Contractor.
ATC will furnish Contractor the earliest possible delivery date for ATC-furnished products.
Using ATC-furnished earliest possible delivery dates, Contractor shall designate delivery
dates of ATC-furnished items in Contractor's Construction Schedule.
Contractor shall review Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples and return them to
ATC Construction Manager noting discrepancies or anticipated problems in use of
product.
Contractor is responsible for receiving, unloading, and handling ATC-furnished items at
Project site or the designated off loading location
Contractor is responsible for protecting ATC-furnished items from damage during storage
and handling, including damage from exposure to the elements.
If ATC-furnished items are damaged as a result of Contractor's operations, Contractor
shall repair or replace them.
Contractor shall install and otherwise incorporate ATC-furnished items into the Work.
Owner-Furnished Products: As directed by the ATC Construction Manager.
RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
General: Keep record documents neatly and accurately. Record information as the work
progresses and deliver to ATC Construction Manager at time of final acceptance. Include in
record documents all field changes made, all relevant dimensions, and all relevant details of the
work. Keep record documents up to date with all field orders and change orders clearly
indicated.
B.
Drawings: Keep one sets of blackline prints at the site. Neatly and accurately note all
deviations from the Contract Documents and the exact actual location of the work as installed.
Marked-up and colored prints will be used as a guide to determine the progress of the work
installed. Requisitions for payment will not be approved until the record documents are accurate
and up-to-date.
1.
2.
C.
Work: Record data to an accuracy of plus or minus 1 inch and determine and record the
invert elevation of all drain lines and ground elevations.
At completion of the work, submit one complete set of marked-up prints for review. After
acceptance, these marked-up prints shall be used in the preparation of the record As
Built drawings.
Operating and Maintenance Manuals: If applicable, manuals shall be submitted which contain
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Description of the system provided.
Handling, storage, and installation instructions.
Detailed description of the function of each principal component of the systems or
equipment.
Operating procedures, including pre-startup, startup, normal operation, emergency
shutdown, normal shutdown and troubleshooting.
Maintenance procedures including lubrication requirements, intervals between lubrication,
preventative and repair procedures, and complete spare parts list with cross reference to
original equipment manufacturer's part numbers.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR TOWER SITES
011000 - 12
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
6.
7.
D.
1.19
A.
Copies of Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Three copies of the manuals shall be provided
within sufficient time to allow for training of ATC's personnel.
PROJECT CLOSE OUT
Complete and Submit the following documentation to the ATC Construction Manager prior to
submitting final invoice:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
B.
A.
Completed punch list with all items corrected and signed and dated by Contractor.
MEG test results on grounding system – ATC from. AEMC is the approved equipment to
use, provide current calibration certificate with close-out
Concrete testing break results including slump and air
Compaction test results
Confirmation from ATC Network Operations Center (NOC) that tower lighting has been
integrated by the Contractor into NOC for system monitoring – email confirmation is
acceptable
As-Built Plan: One (1) PDF marked up using adobe editing tool. Title page to include
company name, date, title and signature
Site Photos Labeled as required
Plumb & Tension test results PE stamped
Submit all warranties, maintenance contracts, final certificates and similar documents.
Obtain Certificate of Occupancy (COO) and similar releases which permit ATC's full and
unrestricted use of the site.
a.
If a COO is not provided by the municipality due to the fact that the facility is
unmanned, Contractor shall 1) obtain final inspections and sign off from the
municipal inspector on all open permits and 2) provide an affidavit on the
Contractors letterhead stating no COO will be issued. Affidavit shall note the
specific individuals name and title within the building department that specified that
no COO was required and shall be signed by the Contractor.
Deliver maintenance spares or surplus material where specified (if applicable)
Complete startup of all systems and instruct ATC's personnel in proper operation and
routine maintenance of systems and equipment (if applicable)
Remove all temporary facilities and utilities that are no longer needed.
ATC Construction Manager will either approve close out deliverables and final payment or notify
Contractor of work or documents which must be corrected prior to the issuance of final payment.
1.
1.20
Control and alarm features including schematic of control systems, control loop electric
ladder diagrams, controller operating set points, settings for alarms and shutdown
systems, pump curves and fan curves.
Safety and environmental considerations.
All ATC close-out deliverables shall be submitted in electronic format. Hard copies are
not acceptable and will be rejected.
REFERENCES
Industry standards
1.
Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent
requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect
as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such
standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.
2.
Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents
unless otherwise indicated.
3.
Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar
with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable
standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. Where copies of standards are
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR TOWER SITES
011000 - 13
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication
source.
B.
Abbreviations and Acronyms
4.
Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or
other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated
in Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations: National Organizations of the U.S." or in
Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the United States."
5.
Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or
other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the
following list. This information is subject to change.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
u.
v.
w.
x.
y.
z.
aa.
bb.
cc.
dd.
ee.
ff.
gg.
hh.
C.
AASHTO - American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials;
www.transportation.org.
ACI - American Concrete Institute; (Formerly: ACI International); www.abma.com.
ACPA - American Concrete Pipe Association; www.concrete-pipe.org.
AGA - American Gas Association; www.aga.org.
AIA - American Institute of Architects (The); www.aia.org.
AISC - American Institute of Steel Construction; www.aisc.org.
AISI - American Iron and Steel Institute; www.steel.org.
ANSI - American National Standards Institute; www.ansi.org.
ASCE - American Society of Civil Engineers; www.asce.org.
ASME - ASME International; (American Society of Mechanical Engineers);
www.asme.org.
ASTM - ASTM International; www.astm.org.
ATIS - Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions; www.atis.org.
AWS - American Welding Society; www.aws.org.
CISPI - Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; www.cispi.org.
CLFMI - Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute; www.chainlinkinfo.org.
CRSI - Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; www.crsi.org.
CSI - Construction Specifications Institute (The); www.csinet.org.
DHI - Door and Hardware Institute; www.dhi.org.
GA - Gypsum Association; www.gypsum.org.
HMMA - Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association; (See NAAMM).
ICBO - International Conference of Building Officials; (See ICC).
ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org.
ICRI - International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc.; www.icri.org.
IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The); www.ieee.org.
IEST - Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology; www.iest.org.
LPI - Lightning Protection Institute; www.lightning.org.
MBMA - Metal Building Manufacturers Association; www.mbma.com.
NCMA - National Concrete Masonry Association; www.ncma.org.
NFPA - National Fire Protection Association; www.nfpa.org.
NRMCA - National Ready Mixed Concrete Association; www.nrmca.org.
PCI - Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; www.pci.org.
RFCI - Resilient Floor Covering Institute; www.rfci.com.
TIA - Telecommunications Industry Association (The); www.tiaonline.org.
UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; www.ul.com.
Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications
or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the
following list.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
COE - Army Corps of Engineers; www.usace.army.mil.
DOE - Department of Energy; www.energy.gov.
EPA - Environmental Protection Agency; www.epa.gov.
FAA - Federal Aviation Administration; www.faa.gov.
FCC – Federal Communications Commission; www.fcc.gov
OSHA - Occupational Safety & Health Administration; www.osha.gov.
USDA - Department of Agriculture; Rural Utilities Service; www.usda.gov.
USPS - United States Postal Service; www.usps.com.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR TOWER SITES
011000 - 14
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR TOWER SITES
011000 - 15
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
SECTION 014320
QUALITY CONTROL, TESTING AND SPECIAL INSPECTION SERVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
Attention is directed to all Sections within DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which
are hereby made a part of this Section of the Specifications.
B.
Examine the Contract Documents and become thoroughly acquainted with the detailed material
and workmanship requirements especially those of the following sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
1.2
Section 033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
Section 034100 - Precast Structural Concrete.
Section 042000 - Unit Masonry.
Section 312000 – Access Roads and Earth Work
Section 316329 – Drilled Concrete Piers and Shafts
Section 323223 – Segmental Retaining Walls
Section 338110 – Steel Communication Structures.
Refer to individual specifications and local building code for quality, workmanship and
requirements for all materials.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality-control and testing
services.
B.
Quality-control services include inspections, tests, and related actions, including reports
performed by Contractor, by independent agencies, and by governing authorities. They do not
include contract enforcement activities performed by ATC Construction Manager.
C.
Inspection and testing services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with
Contract Document requirements.
D.
Special Inspection personnel shall be in addition to the quality control inspections and
inspectors required elsewhere in this section.
1.3
RESPONSIBILITIES
A.
Contractor Responsibilities: Unless otherwise indicated as the responsibility of another
identified entity, Contractor shall provide inspections, tests, and other quality-control services as
specified in the Contract Documents and as required by authorities having jurisdiction. Costs
for these services are paid for by the Contractor and included in the Contract Sum.
1.
Contractor's quality control responsibilities are specified in, but not limited to, the following
Sections:
a.
b.
2.
Division 33, Concrete
Division 31, Earthwork
Where certain inspections, tests, and other quality-control services are the Contractor's
responsibility, the Contractor shall employ and pay a qualified independent testing
agency to perform quality-control services. Costs for these services are included in the
Contract Sum.
QUALITY CONTROL, TESTING AND SPECIAL INSPECTION SERVICES
014320 - 1
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
3.
4.
Where certain inspections, tests, and other quality-control services are ATC's
responsibility, ATC will employ and pay a qualified independent testing agency to perform
those services.
The costs of the following tests and inspections shall be the sole responsibility of the
Contractor, accounted for separately and reported to ATC.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
B.
Retesting: The Contractor is responsible for retesting where results of inspections, tests, or
other quality-control services prove unsatisfactory and indicate noncompliance with Contract
Document requirements, regardless of whether the original test was Contractor's responsibility.
1.
C.
The cost of retesting construction, revised or replaced by the Contractor, is the
Contractor's responsibility where required tests performed on original construction
indicated noncompliance with Contract Document requirements.
Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required inspections, tests, and
similar services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify the agency
sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Auxiliary services
required include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
D.
Tests and inspection of materials and workmanship not conforming to contract
requirements.
Tests and inspection necessitated by any other noncompliance with contract
requirements.
Acceptance tests for materials because of changes in properties or changed
sources.
Costs of inspector's time and expenses wasted because of cancellations or delays
of the work.
Tests and services of inspectors required by a public authority.
Provide safe access to the Work.
Furnish incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate inspections and tests.
Take adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing or
assist the agency in taking samples.
Provide facilities for proper storage and curing of test samples in all weather conditions
Deliver samples to testing laboratories.
Provide the agency with a preliminary design mix proposed for use for materials mixes
that require control by the testing agency.
Provide security and protection of samples and test equipment at the Project Site.
Duties of the Testing Agency: The independent agency engaged to perform inspections,
sampling, and testing of materials and construction specified in individual Sections shall
cooperate with the ATC Construction Manager and the Contractor in performance of the
agency's duties.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
The Testing Laboratory shall make all necessary arrangements with the General
Contractor to insure the presence of the required inspectors at all contract operations
specified to be included under the Testing and Inspection Agreement. The General
Contractor shall notify the Testing Laboratory a reasonable time in advance (not less than
48 hours) of the time when operations requiring inspection or testing are scheduled to
start.
Provide necessary personnel, equipment and facilities for tests and inspection.
Personnel shall be experienced and competent in their particular specialties.
The Testing Laboratory shall conduct its work so as not to cause delay in the progress of
construction. Any non-compliance with the Contract Documents shall be immediately
reported to the General Contractor and the ATC Construction Manager.
The agency shall notify the ATC Construction Manager and the Contractor promptly of
irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.
The Testing Laboratory and the ATC Construction Manager have the right to shut the
project down at no cost to the Owner if deficiencies in the work product or materials being
used are not within the defined specifications.
Nothing herein specified permits the Testing Laboratory to allow the General Contractor
to deviate from the requirements of the Contract Documents.
QUALITY CONTROL, TESTING AND SPECIAL INSPECTION SERVICES
014320 - 2
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
7.
8.
E.
Coordination: Coordinate the sequence of activities to accommodate required services with a
minimum of delay. Coordinate activities to avoid the necessity of removing and replacing
construction to accommodate inspections and tests.
1.
2.
F.
1.4
The testing agency is not authorized to release, revoke, alter, or enlarge requirements of
the Contract Documents or approve or accept any portion of the Work.
The agency shall not perform any duties of the Contractor.
The Contractor is responsible for scheduling times for inspections, tests, taking samples,
and similar activities.
A complete set of Drawings and Specifications for the project work will be made available
by the Contractor at the project site. The Testing Laboratory personnel shall become
thoroughly familiar with all provisions of these documents which apply for the testing and
inspection services.
Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency or special inspector
to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the
responsibility of Owner, as indicated in Statement of Special Inspections shown in the Contract
Documents.
SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A.
Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified testing agency or special inspector as
required by authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections and in
Statement of Special Inspections shown in the Contract Documents and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures
and reviews the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.
Notifying ATC Construction Manager and Contractor promptly of irregularities and
deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.
The Testing Laboratory and the ATC Construction Manager have the right to shut the
project down at no cost to the Owner if deficiencies in the work product or materials being
used are not within the defined specifications.
Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control
service to ATC Construction Manager with copy to Contractor and to authorities having
jurisdiction.
Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which
includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.
Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected
work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
Retesting and re-inspecting corrected work.
B.
Continuous Special Inspection: The full time observation of the work by the Special Inspector
present in the work area whenever work is being performed. Perform continuous special
inspection where specified for items as shown on the drawings.
C.
Periodic Special Inspection: The intermittent observation of the work by a Special Inspector
present in the work area while work is being performed. The intermittent observation periods
shall be: at times of significant work; recurrent over the complete work period; and total at least
25 percent of the total work time. Perform periodic special inspection where specified for items
as shown on the drawings.
D.
Special Inspection requirements for an individual project will be indicated on the Construction
Drawings or in a separate Statement of Special Inspections provided by ATC. The following
additional information applies to Special Inspections.
1.
Pre-Cast Concrete Special Inspections:
QUALITY CONTROL, TESTING AND SPECIAL INSPECTION SERVICES
014320 - 3
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
a.
b.
2.
All materials and workmanship under this Section shall be subject to inspection in
the plant, shop, or field by ATC Construction Manager, or by qualified inspectors
selected and paid directly by ATC.
Such inspection, wherever conducted, shall not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility to furnish materials and workmanship in accordance with Contract
requirements, nor shall inspector’s acceptance of materials of workmanship
prevent later rejection by ATC Construction Manager
Structural Steel Special Inspections
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Inspection of structural tower steel will be directed at verifying that inspection
required to be carried out by the ATC’s testing and quality control personnel, as
specified in the Contract Documents, has been completed.
Inspection of Fabricators: Where fabrication of structural load-bearing tower
members and assemblies is being performed on the premises of a fabricator’s
shop, structural inspection of the fabricated items shall be required. The fabricated
items shall be inspected as required by local code.
Fabrication procedures: The special inspector shall verify that the fabricator
maintains detailed fabrication and quality control procedures which provide a basis
for inspection control of the workmanship and the fabricator’s ability to conform to
approved drawings, project specifications and referenced standards. The special
inspector shall review the procedures for completeness and adequacy relative to
the code requirements for the fabricator’s scope of work.
Procedures implementation: The structural inspector shall verify that the fabricator
is properly implementing the fabrication and quality control procedures outlined in
local code.
Field Inspection of Structural Steel: This inspection may be on a full-time basis
while structural steel is being erected, as requested by the Structural Engineer of
Record, and will include the following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
Proper erection of all pieces.
Proper fit of bolts, including nicking of threads and locking devices.
Plumbness.
Proper installation of high-strength bolts, including checking of impact
wrenches.
Weld visual inspection.
Comparison with approved Shop Drawings.
Examination of erector's quality control and testing records for compliance
with Contract Document.
Inspection and Testing of High-strength Bolts:
a)
b)
f.
The visual examination of all joints to ascertain that bolts and washers
are properly installed and have been tensioned.
Tightness of bolts shall be checked by using a manual torque wrench
in accordance with the requirements of Contract Documents. As a
minimum check ten percent (10%) of the bolts involved. If these tests
indicate that proper tension in the bolts is not being achieved, then
the frequency of the tests shall be increased in consultation with the
structural engineer.
Inspection and Testing of Welding:
1)
2)
Verify the certification papers of each welder and his qualifications for the
particular welding positions in which he will work on the structure. Establish
and record each welder's symbol. The Testing Laboratory may reject a
welder's work and call for a retest at any time there is doubt of the quality of
work.
Welds shall be examined visually this may include tower climbing to reach
work area. Surfaces to be welded and all filler metal shall be carefully
inspected. Surface preparations, fit-up, and cleanliness of surfaces shall be
noted. Electrodes shall be checked for size, type and condition. Preheating
of steel and heating of electrodes shall be noted when required.
QUALITY CONTROL, TESTING AND SPECIAL INSPECTION SERVICES
014320 - 4
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
3)
4)
5)
Check that all welds have been marked with the welder's symbol; mark all
welds requiring repairs or rewelding; make a reinspection of corrected work;
maintain a written record of all welds. Welds shall be tested where required
by Contract Documents.
Welds required to be tested by the Contractor shall be inspected by the
Testing Laboratory and verify that all welds have been performed and tested
in accordance with the Contract Documents.
Testing of welds in the field shall consist of
a)
b)
c)
3.
Drilled-Pier Special Inspections: For each drilled pier, before concrete placement, provide
the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Soil Testing: Actual elevations and drilled-pier lengths are to be determined by
testing and inspecting agency. Final evaluations and approval of data are
determined by ATC Construction Manager.
Steel reinforcement size and placement verification
Steel reinforcement splicing
Anchor bolt embedment and placement
Prepare test and inspection reports for each drilled pier with following information:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
16)
17)
18)
19)
20)
21)
22)
23)
24)
25)
26)
1.5
Visual inspection of all welds
10% testing of all fillet welds
100% testing of all penetration welds
Actual top and bottom elevations.
Actual drilled-pier diameter at top, bottom, and bell (as required).
Top of rock elevation.
Description of soil materials.
Description, location, and dimensions of obstructions.
Final top centerline location and deviations from requirements.
Variation of shaft from plumb.
Shaft excavating method.
Depth of rock socket (as required)
Levelness of bottom and adequacy of cleanout.
Properties of slurry and slurry test results at time of slurry placement and at
time of concrete placement.
Ground-water conditions and water-infiltration rate, depth, and pumping.
Description, purpose, length, wall thickness, diameter, tip, and top and
bottom elevations of temporary or permanent casings. Include anchorage
and sealing methods used and condition and weather tightness of splices, if
any.
Description of soil or water movement, sidewall stability, loss of ground, and
means of control.
Bell dimensions and variations from original design.
Date and time of starting and completing excavation.
Condition of reinforcing steel
Position of reinforcing steel.
Concrete placing method, including elevation of consolidation and delays.
Elevation of concrete during removal of casings.
Tower foundation pours shall be monolithic unless noted otherwise, note
locations of construction joints.
Concrete volume.
Concrete testing results, provided by Contractor’s testing agency.
Remarks, unusual conditions encountered, and deviations from
requirements.
Concrete temperature at time of pour
Placement of anchor bolts including arrangement and embedment
PAINTING INSPECTION
A.
ATC reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as ATC
deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied:
QUALITY CONTROL, TESTING AND SPECIAL INSPECTION SERVICES
014320 - 5
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
1.
2.
1.6
ATC may engage a qualified independent testing agency to sample paint material being
used. Samples of material delivered to Project will be taken, identified, sealed, and
certified in the presence of Contractor.
The ATC Construction Manager may direct Contractor to stop painting if test results show
material being used does not comply with specified requirements. Contractor shall
remove noncomplying paint from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces
previously coated with the noncomplying paint. If necessary, Contractor may be required
to remove noncomplying paint from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with
specified paint, the two coatings are incompatible or if adhesion to the base material is
unachievable.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Reports: Unless the Contractor is responsible for this service, the independent testing agency
shall submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each inspection, test, or similar service to
the ATC Construction Manager. If the Contractor is responsible for the service, submit a
certified written report, in duplicate, of each inspection, test, or similar service through the
Contractor. The Contractor shall provide the all reports to the ATC Construction Manager within
24 hours of receipt.
1.
2.
Submit additional copies of each written report directly to the governing authority, when
the authority so directs.
Report Data: Written reports of each inspection, test, or similar service include, but are
not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
1.7
Date of issue.
Project title and number.
Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
Names of individuals making the inspection or test.
Designation of the Work and test method.
Identification of product and Specification Section.
Complete inspection or test data.
Test results and an interpretation of test results.
Ambient conditions at the time of sample taking and testing.
Comments or professional opinion on whether inspected or tested Work complies
with Contract Document requirements.
Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
Recommendations on retesting.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Qualifications for Service Agencies: Engage inspection and testing service agencies, including
independent testing laboratories, that are prequalified as complying with the American Council
of Independent Laboratories' "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory
Qualification" and that specialize in the types of inspections and tests to be performed.
1.
1.8
Each independent inspection and testing agency engaged on the Project shall be
authorized by authorities having jurisdiction to operate in the state where the Project is
located.
REFERENCE
A.
American Society for Testing and Materials: ASTM E. 329-77: Inspection and Testing
Agencies for Concrete Steel and Bituminous Materials as used in Construction.
B.
Wherever the source or characteristics of materials change or the quality of materials provided
indicates lack of compliance with contract requirements, full or partial acceptance tests shall be
performed as directed by the Structural Engineer of Record through the ATC Construction
Manager.
QUALITY CONTROL, TESTING AND SPECIAL INSPECTION SERVICES
014320 - 6
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
TESTING AND INSPECTION
A.
The Testing Laboratory shall maintain and distribute continuous record of the quality of
materials and workmanship under its control, and certify that such materials and workmanship
meet the contract requirements.
B.
The duties of the Testing Laboratory shall include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Tests and certification of materials or components designated to be tested at place of
fabrication or at the job site.
Supervision and certification of fabrication and erection of materials designated to be
inspected.
Acceptance testing of concrete design mixes.
Submission of reports:
a.
b.
c.
3.2
Copies of each report of plant and field inspection shall be made and distributed
within 3 days. Copies of each report of tests shall be distributed within 2 days of
the performance of tests. Results of tests showing non-conformance to contract
requirements shall be advised to the ATC Construction Manager and General
Contractor by phone on the same day.
Distribution of one copy of each report shall be as follows: ATC Construction
Manager, General Contractor.
All reports shall include accurate and unambiguous descriptions of the source of
the materials and their location in the structure.
QUALITY CONTROL FOR CONCRETE
A.
Contractor shall provide an independent third party certified inspection and testing agency at the
project whenever structural concrete is placed. Provide testing in accordance with the approved
referenced standard methods. The Contractor cannot self perform air or slump testing or pour
test cylinders on site. This must be performed by a certified third party testing agency retained
by the Contractor.
B.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as
documented according to ASTM E 548.
1.
2.
Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing
Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-01 or an equivalent certification program.
Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing
Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade I. Testing Agency
laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician Grade II.
C.
Field Tests: Obtain samples of concrete at the project and make quality control tests during
placing operations, including slump tests, air content tests, density tests, air temperature and
concrete temperature for all concrete, and sets of cylinders for compressive tests. Cylinders
required by the Contractor for stripping purposes are excluded from these quality control
requirements.
D.
Slump tests shall be made during each test cylinder creation; if concrete is pumped, slump tests
shall be taken at point of discharge. When air entrainment is required by the approved design
mix, air content tests shall be made from each load of concrete. If the measured density of any
concrete, or the measured slump of any concrete, or the air content of air entrained concrete,
falls outside the limits of the approved design mix, a check test shall be made immediately on
another portion of the same load. In the event of a second failure, the concrete shall be
QUALITY CONTROL, TESTING AND SPECIAL INSPECTION SERVICES
014320 - 7
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
considered to have failed to meet the requirements of the approved design mix, and shall not be
used on the project.
E.
Test Cylinder Sets: Make one set of cylinders, directly from the mixer, or point of discharge if
pumped, for each 25 cubic yards or fraction thereof. The tests are intended to ensure that the
concrete meets the specified requirements, with particular regard to 28 day strength. Identify
cylinder sets by date, concrete class, concrete delivery ticket and location of placement in the
project.
F.
Field Curing: Provide all facilities for making, storing and transporting the test cylinders. In cold
weather the contractor shall provide a curing box for storage of cylinders in the field. The box
shall be heated as required to maintain curing conditions consistent with the curing of the
project concrete. During hot weather, test cylinders shall be covered immediately with damp
burlap and cooled or stored otherwise as required to maintain curing conditions consistent with
the curing of the project concrete. Cylinders shall remain in the field until ready for
transportation to the laboratory but not less than 24 hours.
G.
Cylinder Tests: Transport the cylinders to the laboratory in a vertical position. Make
compressive strength tests of one cylinder of each set at 7 days and of the other three cylinders
of each set at 28 days. If the first two cylinders tested at 28 days show strengths less than 85
percent of the specified value, the third cylinder shall not be tested as directed by the ATC
Construction Manager but shall be kept available should additional testing be required. The
testing of each set of three test cylinders at 28 days shall be considered as one strength test.
The strength of such test shall be the average of the breaking strengths of the three cylinders
comprising the test except that, if one of the specimens shall show manifest evidence of
improper sampling, molding, handling, or testing, it shall be discarded and the remaining two
averaged. If the first two cylinders tested at 28 days show strengths less than 85 percent of the
specified value, the third cylinder shall not be tested at 28 days but shall be kept available for
later testing as directed by the ATC Construction Manager.
H.
Reinforcement and Formwork: Inspect reinforcement for surface cleanliness, accessories,
clearances, sizes, anchor bolt embedment and height above finish grade and spacing, etc This
may include but is not limited to rebar cages in caissons, tower anchor bolts, rebar mats on pad
& pier foundations, vertical chairs, rock anchors and guy anchor foundations Inspect formwork
for tightness, adequacy, surface quality and cleanliness.
I.
Concrete Placement: Inspect methods of discharge, transport timing, placement, consolidation
and finishing.
J.
Grout and Grouting: Examine and ascertain that the materials used for grouting conform to the
Specifications. Check grouting operations for conformance with the Specifications and with the
manufacturer's recommendations for use. Check that the grout fills all voids and spaces which
are required to be grouted.
K.
Grout Compressive Tests: Grout shall be tested for compressive strength. Provide a top plate
fastened to the top of the mold to confine the mortar and simulate in-place conditions. Nine 2" x
2" cubes shall be taken in the field for each set. Three cubes shall be taken on each day that
each strength class of grout is being placed.
3.3
QUALITY CONTROL FOR EARTH WORK
A.
Contractor shall provide an independent third party certified inspection and testing agency at the
project. Provide testing for compaction test of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556,
ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable, and as outlined below.
B.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as
documented according to ASTM E 548.
C.
Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies:
QUALITY CONTROL, TESTING AND SPECIAL INSPECTION SERVICES
014320 - 8
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
1.
Materials:
a.
b.
2.
Footing Subgrade:
a.
3.
b.
c.
d.
Conduct at least two (2) compaction tests directly over backfill placed on top of pad
& pier style tower foundations. The tests shall be conducted 180° from each other
and at least ten (10) feet apart.
For caisson foundations perform one (1) test within 24” of tower foundation.
Building Slab: Prior to pouring slab, provide at least one test directly under
proposed building.
Guy Tower: Conduct one (1) compaction test at each guy anchor location
Access Road:
a.
5.
At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to
verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other
footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested
subgrade when approved by ATC Construction Manager.
Tower & Building Foundations:
a.
4.
Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on-site and borrow soil material
proposed for fill and backfill.
Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 1557 for each onsite and
borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill.
At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least 1 test for each 150 feet of
road length, but no fewer than 2 tests. Access roads with less than 12” of
combined initial fill and final backfill Do Not require any compaction tests.
Segmental Retaining Wall:
a.
Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform the
following preconstruction testing:
1)
2)
b.
D.
3.4
Test soil reinforcement and backfill materials for pullout resistance according
to ASTM D 6706.
Test soil reinforcement and backfill materials for coefficient of friction
according to ASTM D 5321.
On walls greater than six feet in height in each compacted backfill layer, perform
at least 1 field in-place compaction test for each 24 inches of fill depth and each 50
feet or less of segmental retaining wall length. Walls less than 6’ in height do not
require compaction testing.
When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of
compaction specified, Contractor shall scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil
to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.
QUALITY CONTROL FOR DRILLED PIERS
A.
3.5
Provide an independent third party certified inspection and testing agency at the project
whenever structural concrete is placed. Provide concrete testing in accordance with Section 3.2
QUALITY CONTROL FOR CONCRETE.
REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A.
General: Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample taking and similar services, repair
damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. Comply with Contract Document
requirements for "Cutting and Patching."
QUALITY CONTROL, TESTING AND SPECIAL INSPECTION SERVICES
014320 - 9
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
B.
Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities, and protect repaired
construction.
C.
Repair and protection is Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of
responsibility for inspection, testing, or similar services.
END OF SECTION
QUALITY CONTROL, TESTING AND SPECIAL INSPECTION SERVICES
014320 - 10
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
SECTION 024100
DEMOLITION FOR TOWER SITES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
1.2
Attention is directed to all Sections within DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which
are hereby made a part of this Section of the Specifications.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Work Included:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1.
1.3
Demolition and removal of selected portions of buildings, conduits, fencing, foundations
and tower structures and as required for new work or full removal of facility. Refer to the
Drawings for additional requirements.
Attend a pre-construction meeting with ATC Construction Manger, ATC Field Operations
and if required tenants/wireless carriers currently on the tower. ATC’s ground landlord
may also be in attendance to review work schedule, logistics and scope. The Preconstruction meeting shall be coordinated by the ATC Construction Manager.
Demolition and removal of selected site elements and as required for new work. Refer to
the Drawings for additional requirements.
Salvage of existing items to be reused or turned over to the Owners facility.
Removal and legal disposal of demolished materials off site. Except those items
specifically designated to be relocated, reused, or turned over to the Owners facility, all
existing removed materials, items, trash and debris shall become property of the
Contractor and shall be completely removed from the site and legally disposed of at
her/his expense. Salvage value belongs to the Contractor. On-site sale of materials is
not permitted.
Maintenance, watering and care of trees designated to remain during the construction
period.
Demolition and removal work shall properly prepare for alteration work and new
construction to be provided under the Contract. If the proposed tower site is not being rebuilt the Contractor shall be responsible to comply with all decommissioning and
termination language within ATC’s ground lease. This information will be within the Scope
of Work and will be provided to the Contractor by the ATC Construction Manager.
Scheduling and sequencing operations without interruption to utilities serving occupied
areas.
If the tower facility is being fully decommissioned, ensure that the primary AC power
feeding the site has been properly disconnected by the power company that provides the
service, tagged accordingly and that all requirements under NEC Code have been met.
Coordinate with ATC Construction Manager to obtain authorization to cancel primary
power.
Section 011000 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS for Temporary Facilities And Controls:
Maintenance of access, cleaning during construction, dust and noise control and waste
management.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Remove and Dispose: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them offsite, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. This may include
but is not limited to towers, antennas, mounts, transmission lines, foundations, fencing,
DEMOLITION FOR TOWER SITES
024100 - 1
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
overhead or underground utility conduits and conductors, H-Frame, meter bank, grounding
systems and building foundations or pads.
B.
Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing facility and deliver them to the Owner ready
for reuse, at a location designated by the Owner. Protect from weather until accepted by
Owner. This may include but is not limited to antennas, mounts, transmission lines, tower
lighting, lighting control and monitoring equipment and shelters.
C.
Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing tower or facility, prepare them for reuse, and
reinstall them where indicated. Protect from damage and weather until reinstallation.
D.
Existing to Remain: Existing items within the facility or on the tower that are not to be removed
and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and
reinstalled. Contract shall take any and all steps necessary to protect all items to remain from
damage during demolition.
E.
Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground
services within buildings.
1.4
MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A.
1.5
Historic items, relics, and other items of interest or value to ATC that may be encountered
during selective demolition remain property of ATC as applicable. Carefully remove each item
or object in a manner to prevent damage and deliver promptly to a location acceptable to ATC.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Examination of Existing Conditions: The Contractor shall examine the Contract Drawings for
demolition and removal requirements and provisions for work. Verify and document (photo or
video) all existing conditions and dimensions before commencing work. The Contractor shall
visit the site and examine the existing conditions as he finds them and shall inform
herself/himself of the character, extent and type of demolition and removal work to be
performed. Submit any questions regarding the extent and character of the demolition and
removal work in the manner and within the time period established for receipt of such questions
during the bidding period.
B.
Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work
similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project.
C.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning
selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction.
D.
Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.
E.
Pre-demolition Meeting: Conduct meeting at Project site to comply with requirements in Section
011000 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, Project Meetings. Review methods and procedures
related to selective demolition including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished.
Review the procedures and EPA and ATC guidelines for handling hazardous materials
such as lead paint, asbestos or contaminated soils.
Review structural load limitations of existing structure.
Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials,
demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid
delays.
Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed
by selective demolition operations.
Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.
DEMOLITION FOR TOWER SITES
024100 - 2
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
7.
8.
1.6
If the entire tower facility is being removed and not replaced, ATC Construction Manager
and Contractor shall complete a final review of SOW to ensure all conditions within the
ground lease will be met.
Post demolition site walk will be coordinated by ATC Construction Manager to ensure that
all work on site has been completed in accordance with the drawings and SOW provided
by ATC.
WARRANTY
A.
Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or
damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing
warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SALVAGING
A.
Salvaged for Reinstallation: Materials indicated on the Drawings or designated in the field by
ATC to be salvaged and reinstalled shall be carefully removed and stored at a location
acceptable to the ATC Construction Manager.
B.
Salvaged for Storage: Materials indicated on the Drawings or designated in the field by ATC to
be salvaged and stored shall be carefully removed and delivered to ATC at locations
determined by the ATC Construction Manager.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that all utilities have been disconnected, capped and meet local, State and Federal
codes.
B.
Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of
selective demolition required.
C.
Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be
removed and salvaged.
D.
When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended
function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict.
Promptly submit a written report to ATC Construction Manager.
E.
Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition
activities.
3.2
UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A.
Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility
services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be demolished.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Contractor to arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies and Owner.
Contractor to contact “Dig Safe 811” agency to mark out all existing utilities at least 72
hours prior to any excavation.
Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by ATC or others unless permitted in
writing by the utility owner or the ATC Construction Manager and then only after
arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated.
If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before
proceeding with selective demolition, provide temporary services/systems that bypass
DEMOLITION FOR TOWER SITES
024100 - 3
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
5.
6.
7.
B.
3.3
area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other
parts of site.
Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal
remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing. Where entire wall is to be removed,
existing services/systems may be removed with removal of the wall.
Prior to commencing cutting work in existing surfaces, take all precautionary measures to
assure that mechanical and electrical services to the particular area have been made
inactive. Coordinate with Electrical subcontractors. Only licensed tradesmen of that
particular trade shall disconnect and cap existing mechanical and electrical items that are
to be removed, abandoned and/or relocated.
If, during the process of cutting work, existing utility lines are encountered which are not
indicated on the Drawings, regardless of their condition, immediately report such items to
the ATC Construction Manager. Do not proceed with work in such areas until instructions
are issued by the ATC Construction Manager. Continue work in other areas.
Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be
removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active.
PREPARATION
A.
Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal
operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other
adjacent facilities.
1.
B.
Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required
by building codes and OSHA to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or
collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled
movement or collapse of construction being demolished.
1.
2.
3.
C.
2.
3.4
Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.
Remove temporary shoring, bracing and structural supports when no longer required.
Post warning signs and place barricades as applicable during placement and removal of
temporary shoring.
Conduct demolition operations to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and
facilities to remain. Ensure safe passage of people around demolition area(s) at all times.
1.
D.
Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Section 011000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, Temporary Facilities and Controls.
Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies, and covered
passageways, as necessary and where required by authorities having jurisdiction.
Provide temporary barricades as required to limit access to demolition areas.
Contractor shall protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to
remain.
Drain, purge, or otherwise remove, collect, and legally dispose of chemicals, gases, explosives,
acids, flammables, or other dangerous materials before proceeding with demolition operations.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL
A.
General: Demolish and remove existing construction as indicated in the specific project
documents. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing
regulations and as follows:
1.
Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete
selective demolition operations above each tower section before disturbing supporting
members on the next lower level.
DEMOLITION FOR TOWER SITES
024100 - 4
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
Removed and Salvaged Items:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use
cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction to
minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.
Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring
existing finished surfaces.
Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At
concealed spaces verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flamecutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during all
flame-cutting operations. Comply with local Fire Marshall requirements
Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and
promptly dispose of off-site.
Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid
free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.
Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to
impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in
Section 011000 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.
Clean salvaged items.
Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
Store items in a secure area until delivery to ATC.
Transport items to storage area designated by ATC.
Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
Removed and Reinstalled Items:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint
equipment to match new equipment.
Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.
Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new
materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials
necessary to make item functional for use indicated.
D.
Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling
during selective demolition. When permitted by ATC Construction Manager, items may be
removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and
reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.
E.
Items for Re-use and Preservation of Existing Surfaces to Remain:
1.
2.
3.5
The Contractor shall inspect closely each item specifically designated to be relocated, reused, or turned over to ATC prior to its removal, and immediately report damages and
defects to the ATC Construction Manager. The Contractor shall be responsible for any
subsequent damage to the same, and shall bear responsibility for its repair or same
replacement as directed by the ATC Construction Manager, to the satisfaction of ATC.
Unless special surface preparation is specified under other Specification Sections, leave
existing surfaces that are to remain in a condition suitable to receive new materials and/or
finishes.
PROTECTION OF PUBLIC AND PROPERTY
A.
Provide all measures required by federal, state and municipal laws, regulations, and ordinances
for the protection of surrounding property, the public, workmen, and ATC’s employees during all
demolition and removal operations. Measures are to be taken, but not limited to installation of
sidewalks, sheds, barricades, fences, warning lights and signs, trash chutes and temporary
lighting.
DEMOLITION FOR TOWER SITES
024100 - 5
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
B.
Protect all walks, roads, streets, curbs, pavements, trees and plantings, on and off premises,
and bear all costs for correcting such damage as directed by the ATC Construction Manager,
and to the satisfaction of ATC.
C.
Demolition shall be performed in such a manner that will insure the safety of adjacent property.
Protect adjacent property from damage and protect persons occupying adjacent property from
injuries which might occur from falling debris or other cause and so as not to cause interference
with the use of other portions of the building, of adjacent buildings or the free access and safe
passage to and from the same.
D.
Every precaution shall be taken to protect against movement or settlement of the tower
structure, of adjacent buildings, sidewalks, roads, streets, curbs and pavements. Provide and
place at the Contractor’s own expense, all necessary bracing and shoring in connection with
demolition and removal work.
E.
Remove portions of structures with care by using tools and methods that will not transfer heavy
shocks to existing and adjacent structures, both internal and external of the particular work area.
3.6
DISCOVERY OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
A.
If hazardous materials, such as chemicals, asbestos-containing materials, or other hazardous
materials are discovered during the course of the work, cease work in affected area only and
immediately notify the ATC Construction Manager of such discovery. Do not proceed with work
in such areas until instructions are issued by the ATC Construction Manager. Continue work in
other areas.
B.
If unmarked containers are discovered during the course of the work, cease work in the affected
area only and immediately notify the ATC Construction Manager of such discovery. Do not
proceed with work in such areas until instructions are issued by the ATC Construction Manager.
Take immediate precautions to prohibit endangering the containers integrity. Continue work in
other areas.
3.7
CUTTING
A.
Perform all cutting of existing surfaces in a manner which will ensure a minimal difference
between the cut area and new materials when patched. Use extreme care when cutting existing
surfaces containing concealed utility lines which are indicated to remain and bear full
responsibility for repairing or replacement of all such utilities that are accidentally damaged.
B.
Provide a flush saw cut edge where pavement, curb and concrete removals abut new
construction work or existing surfaces to remain undisturbed.
3.8
DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A.
General: Comply with requirements of Section 011000 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS and the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
Remove debris from elevated portions of tower structure by hoist, crane or other device
that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
Anchors, tower and building foundations shall be removed in accordance with the site
specific scope of work.
Burning: Do not burn any demolished materials.
DEMOLITION FOR TOWER SITES
024100 - 6
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
3.9
CLEANING
A.
Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective
demolition operations. Premises shall be left in a clean condition and ready to accept alteration
work and new construction.
END OF SECTION
DEMOLITION FOR TOWER SITES
024100 - 7
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
SECTION 033000
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
1.2
Attention is directed to all Sections within DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which
are hereby made a part of this Section of the Specifications.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1.
B.
Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and will be performed under
the designated Sections:
1.
2.
1.3
Cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture
design, placement procedures, and finishes for the following applications:
a.
Foundations and Piers.
b.
Foundation walls.
c.
Slabs-on-grade.
d.
Concrete toppings.
e.
Coordination with and cutting and patching of mechanical and electrical
penetrations through cast-in-place concrete.
Section 014320 – QUALITY CONTROL, TESTING, AND SPECIAL INSPECTION
SERVICES.
DIVISION 312000 – ACCESS ROADS AND EARTH MOVING for drainage fill under
slabs-on-grade.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the
following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, and silica fume; subject to
compliance with requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete
products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and
equipment.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from
the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from one source, and obtain admixtures
through one source from a single manufacturer.
C.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code-Reinforcing Steel."
D.
ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract
Documents:
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 1
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
1.
2.
1.5
ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete."
ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and
damage. Avoid damaging coatings on steel reinforcement.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.
Cement: shall be American-made Portland Cement, free from water soluble salts or alkalis
which will cause efflorescence on exposed surfaces. Portland Cement shall be Type II, ASTM
C150. Use only one brand of cement for each type of cement throughout project. Contractor
shall be responsible for whatever steps are necessary to insure that no visual variations in color
will result in exposed concrete and shall place on order and secure in advance a sufficient
quantity of cement to complete concrete work specified herein.
1.
2.
Fly Ash: ASTM C 618
Silica Fume: ASTM C 1240, amorphous silica.
B.
Normalweight Fine Aggregate: shall be washed, inert, natural sand conforming to ASTM C33,
C.
Normalweight Coarse Aggregate:
conforming to ASTM C33.
shall be well graded crushed stone or washed gravel
Maximum designated sizes for normalweight coarse aggregate to be used in concrete sections
shall be as noted below, except that sizes shall also be chosen in conjunction with required
clearances.
1.
2.
3.
One and one-half inches for sections over ten inches in thickness.
One inch for sections more than eight and up to ten inches in thickness.
Three-quarter inch for sections more than three and up to eight inches in thickness.
D.
Water: shall be from approved source, potable, clean and free from oils, acids, alkali, organic
matter and other deleterious material. In accordance with ASTM C 94/C 94M.
E.
Admixtures:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Water-reducing agent, in accordance with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A:
a.
"WRDA" - W.R. Grace & Co.
b.
"PDA25" - Protex Industries, Inc.
c.
"Pozzolith 344H" - Master Builder's Co.
d.
Note: Water-reducing agent shall be by same manufacturer as air-entraining
agent.
Air-entraining agent, in accordance with ASTM C 260/C 260M:
a.
"DAREX AEA" - W.R. Grace & Co.
b.
"PROTEX AEA" - Protex Industries
c.
"MB-VR" or "MB-AE" - Master Builder's Co.
Superplasticizer: High-range water-reducer conforming to ASTM C494, Type F or Type
G.
Retarding Admixture: in accordance with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.
Admixtures retarding setting of cement in concrete shall not be used without written
approval of ATC Construction Manager.
Admixtures causing accelerated setting of cement in concrete shall not be used without
written approval of ATC Construction Manager.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 2
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
2.2
CONCRETE MIXTURES
A.
Mixes shall be designed in accordance with "Method 1" of ACI 301, and the requirements of this
Section. All concrete is normalweight unless specifically designated otherwise; air-dry weight
not to exceed 150 lbs. per cubic foot.
B.
Water-Reducing Admixture - The approved water-reducing admixture shall be used in all
concrete, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
C.
The approved superplasticizer shall be used in all concrete slabs, including slabs on grade.
D.
Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than
portland cement in concrete as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Fly Ash: 25 percent.
Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent.
Silica Fume: 10 percent.
Combined Fly Ash, Pozzolans, and Silica Fume: 35 percent with fly ash or pozzolans not
exceeding 25 percent and silica fume not exceeding 10 percent.
E.
Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.10 percent by weight of
cement.
F.
Any deviation from approved mix design, which Contractor deems desirable under certain
project conditions, will not be allowed without written approval of ATC Construction Manager.
Cost of any additional testing by Testing Agency associated therewith shall be paid for by
Contractor. Additional cost of concrete due to additional additives will be the responsibility of the
Contractor.
G.
Foundations and Piers: Normal-weight concrete.
1.
2.
3.
H.
Foundation Walls and other formed concrete not listed: Normal-weight concrete.
1.
2.
3.
I.
Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi
Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.45
Slump Range: 3-6 inches.
Slabs-on-Grade: Normal-weight concrete.
1.
2.
3.
2.3
Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days.
Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.50
Slump Range: 3-6 inches
Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi
Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.45
Slump Range: 3-6 inches.
FORM MATERIALS
A.
Construct formwork to shapes, lines, and dimensions required, plumb and straight, secured and
braced sufficiently rigid to prevent deformation under load, and sufficiently tight to prevent
leakage, all in conformance with ACI Standard 347, “Recommended Practice for Concrete
Formwork”.
B.
Formwork for exposed concrete shall be medium-density plastic overlaid plywood, 5/8”
minimum thickness; for concealed concrete shall be “Plyform” plywood, 5/8” minimum thickness.
C.
Chamfer Strips: ¾”, 45 degree poplar wood strips, nailed six inches on center, and installed in
inside corners of all forms, unless otherwise directed by ATC Construction Manager.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 3
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
D.
Form Ties and Spreaders: Richmond Tyscrus by Richmond Screw Anchor Co.; Superior-ties by
Superior Concrete Accessories, Ind.; or Sure-Grip Ties by Dayton Sure-Grip and Shore Co.
Wire ties shall not be used. Ties for foundation walls shall be snap-ties or type specified above
with removal cones and shall incorporate water seal washer. Ties shall be arranged in a
symmetrical manner.
E.
Form Release Agent: Non-staining and non-emulsifiable type, or equal approved by ATC
Construction Manager. Form release agent shall be biodegradable and shall not impart any
stain to concrete nor interfere with adherence of any material to be applied to concrete surfaces.
2.4
REINFORCEMENT AND ACCESSORIES
A.
Reinforcing Steel Bars: shall be newly rolled billet steel conforming to ASTM A 615/A 615M/A996, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed, Bars shall be bent cold.
B.
Welded Wire Fabric: shall conform to ASTM A185.
C.
All structural steel reinforcement, tower anchor bolts and other embedded items shall be hot-dip
galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A123.
D.
Reinforcement Accessories: shall conform to Product Standard PS7-766, National Bureau of
Standards, Department of Commerce, Class C, as produced by Superior Concrete Accessories,
Inc.; Dayton Sure-Grip Co.; or R.K.L. Building Specialties Co., Inc. Reinforcement accessories
shall include spacers, chairs, ties, slab bolsters, clips, chair bars, and other devices for properly
assembling, placing, spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcement. Tie wire shall be of
sufficient strength for intended purpose, but not less than No. 18 gage. Metal supports shall be
of such type as not to penetrate surface of formwork and show through surface of concrete.
Accessories touching interior formed surfaces exposed to view shall have not less than 1/8 inch
of plastic between metal and concrete surface. Plastic tips shall extend not less than 1/2 inch
up on metal legs. Individual and continuous slab bolsters and chairs shall be of type to suit
various conditions encountered and must be capable of supporting 300 pound load without
damage or permanent distortion.
2.5
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Grout: shall be ready-to-use metallic aggregate product requiring only addition of water at job
site such as "Embeco Pre-mixed Grout" by Master Builder's; "Vibro-Foil Ready-Mixed" by W.R.
Grace & Co.; or "Ferrolith G" by Sonneborn Building Products, Inc. Grout shall be easily
workable and shall have no drying shrinkage at any age. Compressive strength of grout (2" x 2"
cubes) shall not be less than 5000 psi at 7 days, and 7500 psi at 28 days.
B.
Vapor Retarder: Minimum 10 mil polyethylene, unless specifically specified elsewhere.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
Examine all work prepared by others to receive work of this Section and report any defects
affecting installation to the ATC Construction Manager for correction.
1.
Inspection shall be performed by a civil or structural engineer licensed in the project
location or a qualified representative of the engineer. Certify compliance with shop
drawings.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 4
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
3.2
HANDLING, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION OF MATERIALS
A.
3.3
Handle and store materials separately in such manner as to prevent intrusion of foreign matter,
segregation, or deterioration. Do not use foreign materials or those containing ice. Remove
improper and rejected materials immediately from point of use. Cover materials, including steel
reinforcement and accessories, during construction period. Stockpile concrete constituents
properly to assure uniformity throughout project.
ERECTION OF FORMWORK, SHORING AND RESHORING
A.
Set and maintain formwork to insure complete concrete work within tolerance limits listed in ACI
347 latest edition, "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork", and with following
additional requirements:
1.
Variations in thickness of slabs, piers and walls.
a.
Minus: 1/8 inch
b.
Plus: 1/4 inch
B.
For a minimum of one hour prior to concrete placement, wet forms continuously with water to
swell forms in order to prevent leakage of concrete matrix and to minimize absorption of
concrete matrix water by form materials. This requirement may be waived for those specific
cases where ATC Construction Manager deems it unnecessary or impractical. Care must be
exercised to prevent a build-up of water at base of forms.
C.
Before form materials can be re-used, surfaces that will be in contact with freshly cast concrete
shall be thoroughly cleaned, damaged areas repaired and projecting nails withdrawn. Re-use of
form material shall be subject to approval by ATC Construction Manager.
3.4
PLACING OF REINFORCEMENT
A.
Reinforcement shall be placed in accordance with requirements of CRSI 63, "Recommended
Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars" and CRSI 65, "Recommended Practice for Placing Bar
Supports" and with further requirements below.
B.
Reinforcement shall be accurately placed in accordance with Design Documents and shall be
firmly secured in position by wire ties, chairs, spacers, and hangers
C.
Bending, welding or cutting reinforcement in field in any manner other than as shown on
Drawings, is prohibited, unless specific approval for each case is given by ATC Construction
Manager. Flame cutting of reinforcement is prohibited
D.
Reinforcement shall be continuous through construction joints unless otherwise indicated on
Drawings.
E.
Reinforcement shall be spliced only in accordance with requirements of Design Documents or
as otherwise specifically approved by ATC Construction Manager. Splices of reinforcement at
points of maximum stress shall generally be avoided. Welded wire fabric shall lap six inches or
one space plus two inches whichever is larger, and shall be wired together.
F.
At time concrete is placed, reinforcement shall be free of excessive rust, scale, or other coatings
that will destroy or reduce bond requirements. Reinforcement expected to be exposed to
weather for a considerable length of time shall be painted with a heavy coat of cement grout.
Protect stored materials so as not to end or distort bars in any way. Bars that become damaged
will be rejected.
G.
Before concrete is cast, check all reinforcement after it is placed to insure that reinforcement
conforms to Contract Documents. Such checking shall be done only by qualified experienced
personnel. In addition, the ATC Construction Manager shall be notified at least 36 hours prior to
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 5
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
concrete placement and given opportunity to inspect completed reinforcement and formwork
before concrete placement.
H.
3.5
Reinforcement steel shall be 100% tied and have no less than 3” of concrete cover.
JOINTS
A.
3.6
Construction and control joints indicated on Drawings are mandatory and shall not be omitted.
INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS
A.
Conform to requirements of ACI 318, paragraph 6.3, "Conduits and Pipes Embedded in
Concrete", and as specified below.
B.
Install steel sleeves, embedded wall plates and similar items, furnished by other trades, at
locations shown on the drawings.
C.
Anchor bolts for base plates shall be installed with templates provided. Vertical alignment and
plan locations shall be maintained within one-sixteenth inches of the locations shown on the
drawings.
3.7
MIXING, CONSISTENCY, AND DELIVERY OF CONCRETE
A.
Concrete shall be ready-mixed produced by plant acceptable to ATC Construction Manager.
Hand or site mixing shall not be done. Constituents, including admixtures except certain
corrosion inhibitors and superplasticizers, shall be batched at central batch plant. Admixtures
shall be premixed in solution form and dispensed as recommended by manufacturer.
B.
Central plant and rolling stock equipment and methods shall conform with Truck Mixer and
Agitator Standard of Truck Mixer Manufacturer's Bureau of National Ready-Mixed Concrete
Association, and Contract Documents. Consistency of concrete for tower foundations at time of
deposit shall be as directed in the foundation design drawings:
Slump
Portion of Structure
Recommended
Max. Range
Slabs on grade
4"
3" - 5"
C.
Ready mixed concrete shall be transported to site in watertight agitator or mixer trucks loaded
not in excess of rated capacities. Discharge at site shall be within one and one-half hours after
cement was first introduced into mix. Discard cement not discharged within one and one-half
hours and dispose of legally. Concrete with a temperature greater than 85 degrees F shall not
be placed. Central mixed concrete shall be plant mixed a minimum of five minutes. Agitation
shall begin immediately after premixed concrete is placed in truck and shall continue without
interruption until discharged. Transit mixed concrete shall be mixed at mixing speed for at least
ten minutes immediately after charging truck followed by agitation without interruption until
discharged. Concrete shall be furnished by a single plant unless accepted by the ATC
Construction Manager in writing.
D.
Retempering of concrete which has partially hardened, that is, mixing with or without additional
cement, aggregates, or water, will not be permitted.
3.8
PLACING CONCRETE
A.
Intent of this Specification is that concrete shall not be pumped.
B.
Remove water and foreign matter from forms and excavations and, except in freezing weather
or as otherwise directed, thoroughly wet wood forms just prior to placing concrete. Place no
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 6
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
concrete on frozen soil and provide adequate protection against frost action during freezing
weather.
C.
To secure full bond at construction joints, surfaces of concrete already placed, including vertical
and inclined surfaces, shall be thoroughly cleaned of foreign materials and laitance, roughened
with suitable tools such as chipping hammers or wire brushes, and recleaned by stream of
water or compressed air. Well before new concrete is deposited, joints shall be saturated with
water. After free or glistening water disappears joints shall be given thorough coating of neat
cement slurry mixed to consistency of very heavy paste. Surface shall receive coating of
approximately one-eighth inch thick; this shall be scrubbed in by means of stiff bristle brushes.
New concrete shall be deposited before neat cement dries or changes color.
D.
Do not place concrete having slump outside of allowable slump range.
E.
Transport concrete from mixer to place of final deposit as rapidly as practical by methods which
prevent separation of ingredients and displacement of reinforcement, and which avoid
rehandling. Deposit no partially hardened concrete. When concrete is conveyed by chutes,
equipment shall be of such size and U-shaped design as to insure continuous flow in chute.
Flat (coal) chutes shall not be employed. Chutes shall be of metal or metal lines and different
portions shall have approximately same slope. Slope shall not be less than 25 degrees nor
more than 45 degrees from horizontal and shall be such as to prevent segregation of
ingredients. Discharge end of chute shall be provided with baffle plate or spout to prevent
segregation. If discharge end of chute is more than five feet above surface of concrete in forms,
spout shall be used, and lower and maintained as near surface of deposit as practicable. When
operation is intermittent, chute shall discharge into hopper. Chute shall be thoroughly cleaned
before and after each run and debris and any water used shall be discharged outside forms.
Concrete shall not be allowed to flow horizontally over distances exceeding five feet.
F.
Concrete shall be placed in such manner as to prevent segregation, and accumulations of
hardened concrete on forms or reinforcement above mass of concrete being placed. To
achieve this end, suitable hoppers, spouts with restricted outlets and tremies shall be used as
required.
G.
During and immediately after depositing, concrete shall be thoroughly compacted by means of
internal type mechanical vibrators or other tools, or by spading to produce required quality of
finish. Vibration shall be done by experienced operators under close supervision and shall be
carried on only enough to produce homogeneity and optimum consolidation without permitting
segregation of constituents or "pumping" of air. Vibrators used for normal weight concrete shall
operate at speed at not less than 7,000 vpm and be of suitable capacity. Do not use vibrators
to move concrete. Vibration shall be supplemented by proper wooden spade puddling to
remove included bubbles and honeycomb adjacent to visible surfaces. At least one vibrator
shall be on hand for every 10 cubic yards of concrete placed per hour, plus one spare.
Vibrators shall be operable and on site prior to starting placement.
H.
Vertical lifts shall not exceed 18 inches. Vibrate completely through successive lifts to avoid
pour lines. Vibrate first lift thoroughly until top of lift glistens to avoid stone pockets, honeycomb,
and segregation.
I.
Concrete shall be deposited continuously, and in layers of such thickness that no concrete will
be deposited on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause formation of seams and
planes of weakness within section. If section cannot be placed continuously between planned
construction joints, as specified, field joint and additional reinforcement shall be introduced so
as to preserve structural continuity. ATC Construction Manager shall be notified in any such
case. The Engineer of record shall specify the proper key joint, size, type and number of
additional reinforcement and bonding agent to be used. On towers, it is expected that all
foundations be poured monolithically whenever possible. Cold joints outside of designed and
approved are unacceptable. ATC Construction Manager will require that entire section in which
blemish occurs be removed and replaced with new materials at Contractor's expense.
J.
When placing exposed concrete walls or piers, strike corners of forms rapidly and repeatedly
from outside along full height while depositing concrete and vibrating.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 7
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
K.
3.9
Chutes, hoppers, spouts, adjacent work, etc. shall be thoroughly cleaned before and after each
run and water and debris shall be discharged outside form.
FINISHING OF UNFORMED CONCRETE SURFACES
A.
Smooth troweled finish: shall be provided where concrete flatwork is to be exposed in the
finished work.
B.
Floated finish: shall be provided for top surfaces of walls and slabs.
C.
Rough struck surface shall be provided at top of piers.
D.
Steel Broom Finish (with smooth edging): shall be provided at exterior concrete walks,
pavements and steps.
E.
Contractor, at his own expense, shall level depressed spots and grind high spots in concrete
surfaces which are in excess of specified tolerances. Leveling materials proposed for providing
proper surface shall be approved by ATC Construction Manager.
3.10
A.
3.11
REPAIRING OF UNFORMED CONCRETE SURFACES
Tops of slabs and walls shall be repaired by using either same material as originally cast or by
use of dry-pack material, as approved by ATC Construction Manager. Areas affected shall be
chipped back square and to depth of one inch minimum. Hole shall then be moistened with
water for a minimum of two hours, followed by brush coat of 1/16 inch thick cement paste.
Immediately plug hole with concrete, or with dry pack material consisting of 1:1.5 mixture of
cement and concrete sand mixed slightly damp to touch. Hammer dry-pack into hole until
dense, and excess paste appears on surface. Finish patch flush and to same texture as
surrounding concrete. For large repairs employ 1-1-2 mixture of cement, concrete sand and
pea gravel at same dry-pack consistency.
CURING AND PROTECTION
A.
Cold-Weather Placement: When concrete is placed at or below ambient air temperatures of 40
degrees F, or whenever in the opinion of the ATC Construction Manager, lower temperatures
are likely to occur within 48 hours after placement of concrete, cold weather concreting
procedures, according to ACI 306 and as specified herein, shall be followed. To this end, entire
area affected shall be protected by adequate housing or covering, and heating; including
cylinder testing samples. No salt, chemicals or other foreign materials shall be used in the mix
to lower freezing point of concrete.
B.
Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) and as follows: Maintain concrete
temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped
ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total
amount of mixing water.
C.
Protect concrete work against injury from heat, cold, and defacement of any nature during
construction operations.
D.
Concrete shall be treated and protected immediately after concreting or cement finishing is
completed, to provide continuous moist curing above 50 degrees F. for at least seven days,
regardless of ambient air temperatures.
E.
Curing compounds will not be permitted for slabs
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 8
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
3.12
REMOVAL OF FORMWORK
A.
Contractor shall be responsible for proper removal of all formwork.
1.
No forms shall remain underground
B.
Forms shall be removed only after concrete has attained sufficient strength to support its shown
weight, construction loads to be placed thereon and lateral loads, without damage to structure
or excessive deflection.
C.
Forms and supports shall remain in place for not less than minimum periods of time noted
below. These periods represent cumulative number of days or fractions thereof, consecutive
unless otherwise approved by ATC Construction Manager during which time mean daily air
temperature at surfaces of concrete is above 50 degrees F.
3.13
REPAIRING AND FINISHING OF FORMED SURFACES
A.
In accordance with the provisions of ACI 301, Chapter 10, all concrete shall have "smooth form
finish".
B.
Intent of this Specification is to require forms, mixtures of concrete, and workmanship so that
concrete surfaces will require no patching, except for plugging of tie holes. However, where
patching is acceptable to ATC Construction Manager, procedure described below shall be
followed.
C.
Defective concrete and honeycombed areas shall not be patched unless examined and
approval is given by ATC Construction Manager. If such approval is received by Contractor,
areas involved shall be chipped down square and at least one inch deep to sound concrete by
means of cold chisels or pneumatic chipping hammers. If honeycomb exists around
reinforcement, chip to provide clear space at least three-quarter inch wide all around steel to
afford proper ultimate bond thereto. For areas less than one and one-half inches deep, patch
shall be made in same manner as described above for filling unformed concrete surfaces, care
being exercised to use crumbly-dry (non-trowelable) mixtures and to avoid sagging. Thicker
repairs shall require build-up in successive days, each layer being applied as described. To aid
strength and bonding of multiple layer repairs, non-shrink, non-metallic aggregate shall be used
as an additive as follows:
Materials
Volumes
Weights
Cement
Non-Metallic Aggregate
Sand
1.0
0.15
1.5
1.0
0.25
1.55
For very heavy (generally, formed) patches, pea gravel may be added to mixture and proportions
modified as follows:
Materials
Volumes
Weights
Cement
Non-Metallic Aggregate
Sand
Pea Gravel
1.0
0.2
1.0
1.5
1.0
0.33
1.0
1.55
After hardening, rub lightly as described above for form tie holes.
1.
2.
Mortar for patching shall be same mix as above except aggregate shall pass a No. 14
sieve.
Begin finishing operations as soon as practicable after removal of forms, continue with
curing operations after finishing is completed. After concrete has been well cured,
carefully inspect surfaces. Patch defects with finishing mortar as specified above, to
satisfaction of ATC Construction Manager.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 9
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
D.
3.14
Patches which become crazed, cracked, or sound hollow upon tapping shall be removed and
replaced with new material at Contractor's expense.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Independent Testing Agency: Cooperate with the Independent Testing Agency engaged by
ATC for field quality control activities required in Section 014320, “Quality Control, Testing and
Special Inspection Services.” Provide at least 48 hours notice to testing agency prior to the time
testing and/or inspection is required. Allow inspectors access to work areas and provide
support, as needed to perform inspections.
B.
Tests and Inspections: Engage Independent Testing Agency in accordance with Section 014320
“Quality Control, Testing and Special Inspection Services.” for testing of listed properties.
3.15
A.
CLEANING
Concrete surfaces shall be cleaned of objectionable stains as determined by the ATC
Construction Manager. Materials containing acid in any form or methods which will damage
"skin" of concrete surfaces shall not be employed, except where otherwise specified.
END OF SECTION
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 10
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
SECTION 034100
PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
1.2
Attention is directed to the all Sections within DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
which are hereby made a part of this Section of the Specifications.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1.
Engineering and construction requirements related to the fabrication, transportation, and
erection of precast, prestressed units, including miscellaneous items necessary for a
complete installation, and shall include:
a.
Furnishing all inserts and anchors which are embedded in the precast units
required to receive fastenings by other trades, and which are necessary to secure
units to the building structure and to each other.
B.
The requirements of Section 033000 “Cast-in-Place Concrete” shall apply to the Work of this
Section except as modified herein.
C.
Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and will be performed under
the designated Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Section 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Division 4 – MASONRY
Division 5 – METALS
Division 31 – EARTHWORK
PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A.
Delegated Design: Design precast concrete assemblies, including comprehensive engineering
analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design
criteria indicated.
B.
Structural Performance: Work shall conform to the latest editions of the following design codes
and standards. In case of conflict between referenced specifications and ATC Master
Specifications, ATC Master Specifications shall govern.
1.
Local, State and Federal Building Code.
2.
3.
American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM): Standards as referenced in this Section.
Prestressed Concrete Institute (PCI) Publication MNL-1115, “Manual for Quality Control
for Plants and Production of Precast and Prestressed Concrete Products.”
American Concrete Institute (ACI) publications as listed in Section 033000.
American Welding Society (AWS), Standard D1.1, “Structural Welding Code.”
4.
5.
PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
034100 - 1
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings: The precast, prestressed concrete manufacturer shall furnish and submit for
approval complete shop drawings for all members. Fabrication of members shall not proceed
until shop drawings are approved by ATC Construction Manager. The Contractor shall be
responsible for the coordination of the various trades with this work.
1.
Provide layout, dimensions, and identification of each precast unit corresponding to
sequence and procedure of installation. Indicate welded connections by AWS standard
symbols. Detail inserts, connections, and joints, including accessories and construction
at openings in precast units.
2.
Provide location and details or anchorage devices that are to be embedded in other
construction. Furnish templates for accurate placement.
3.
Include erection procedure for precast units, sequence of erection, and required handling
equipment.
4.
All inserts, hangers, pipe sleeves, blockouts, etc., required by various trades as indicated,
located and detailed on the final approved drawings, will be cast as such, and any
omissions or change in location or details by the Contractor of the various trades shall be
done at the expense of the Contractor.
B.
Delegated Design Submittal: Supply sealed shop drawings, fabrication drawings, and full
detailed calculations. Comply with all performance requirements and design criteria, including
analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
preparation. Include typical units and all special conditions and anchorage details for approval
with the shop drawings.
C.
All shop drawings shall be prepared under the supervision of a Professional Engineer registered
in the project location. All calculations are to be stamped and signed by a Professional
Engineer registered in the project location.
D.
Certificates
1.
2.
3.
1.5
Submit evidence of current plant certification under the PCI Plant Certification Program.
Submit records of tensioning, concrete, and calibrations as required by PCI MNL-116, as
well as manufacturer’s written certifications for materials, as required by PCI MNL-116.
Submit welding certificates in accordance with AWS D1.1.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications
1.
2.
3.
The precast concrete manufacturing plant shall be certified by the Precast/Prestressed
Concrete Institute’s Plant Certification Program, prior to the start of the production.
All prestressed concrete work shall be produced in one (1) existing production facility by a
fabricator who has been regularly and customarily engaged in the manufacture of
prestressed concrete products.
Only a firm which has successful experience in the fabrication of precast concrete units
similar to the units indicated will be acceptable. Fabricator shall have sufficient
production capacity to produce the required units without causing any delay in the work.
B.
Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, design calculations, and other
structural data by a qualified professional engineer.
C.
Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice
in the jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering
services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for
PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
034100 - 2
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
installations of precast concrete assemblies that are similar to those indicated for the Project in
material, design, and extent.
D.
Erector qualifications. Regularly engaged for at least three (3) years in the erection of precast
structural concrete similar to the requirements of this project or as approved by ATC.
E.
Welder qualifications shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1.
F.
Fabricate and erect precast members within the tolerances recommended in PCI MNL-116 for
the application type of member.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Protect tower assemblies from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery,
storage, and handling.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Cement shall be Portland Cement conforming to ASTM Specification C150 - Type III.
B.
Aggregates shall consist of sand and gravel conforming to ASTM Specification C33 - 80. Size
of coarse aggregate shall meet spacing requirements of prestressing steel and/or reinforcing
steel. The size of aggregate shall not exceed one inch (1”).
C.
Reinforcing steel shall be new billet steel conforming to ASTM Specification A615 Grade 60.
Welded wire fabric shall conform to ASTM Specification A185. Prestressing strand shall be
uncoated, seven-wire (7-wire) strand and shall conform to the ASTM Specification A416, Grade
270.
D.
Grout shall conform to ASTM Specification C476.
E.
Admixtures, anchors, inserts, and grout shall conform to the requirements of Section 033000.
F.
Bearing pads shall be Polyethylene Plastic ASTM D1248 IIIA. Surface shall be non-skid with
friction coefficient of 1.2 with concrete.
G.
Anchors and Inserts Finish
1.
2.
3.
2.2
Shop primer: Manufacturer’s standards.
Hot dip galvanized ASTM A153.
Zinc-rich coating MIL-P-21035, self-curing, one component, sacrificial.
CONCRETE MIXTURES
A.
Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash, pozzolan and ground granulated blast-furnace slag as
needed to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used, by not
less than 40 percent. Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland
cement in concrete as follows:
1.
2.
Fly Ash: 25 percent.
Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent.
PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
034100 - 3
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
2.3
CONCRETE STRENGTHS
A.
All precast, prestressed concrete members shall have a minimum twenty-eight (28)
compressive strength of 5000 psi.
B.
Unless otherwise specified by ATC Construction Manager , concrete shall attain a minimum
compressive strength of 3800 psi at transfer of prestressing force.
C.
Grout. 5000 psi at twenty-eight (28) days.
2.4
FABRICATION
A.
Manufacturing procedures shall be in general compliance with PCI MNL-116.
B.
All concrete shall be chamfered or rounded at sharp edges. Chamfered or radius shall be a
minimum of one-half inch (½”).
C.
Finishes
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Standard underside. Form casting against approved forms shall use good industry
practice in cleaning of forms, design of concrete mix placing, and curing. Small surface
holes caused by air bubbles, normal color variations, normal form joint marks, and minor
chips and spalls shall be tolerated, but no major or unsightly imperfections, honeycomb,
or other defects shall be permitted. All air pockets and holes over one-quarter inch (¼”)
in diameter shall be filled with sand/cement paste. All form offsets or fins over one-eighth
inch (1/8”) shall be ground smooth.
Vertical ends. When exposed to view strands shall be recessed a minimum of one-half
inch (½”), the holes filled with grout and the ends of the member shall receive sacked
finish.
Openings: The manufacturer shall provide for any opening that is three inches (3”) or
larger, round or rectangular. Other openings shall be located and field-drilled, or cut by
the trade requiring them after the precast, prestressed concrete products have been
erected. No reinforcing bars shall be cut or damaged in the process. Openings shall be
approved by ATC Construction Manager before drilling or cutting.
Patching of defects will not be allowed without approval by ATC Construction Manager on
each occasion.
Sizes of members shall conform to the following dimensional tolerances:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Cross section tolerance -- one-quarter inch (¼”)
Length of member -- three-eighths inch (3/8”)
Ends of members out of square -- one-quarter inch per foot (¼” per ft.)
Deviation from straight line in units shall not be greater than one-eighth inch per ten feet
(1/8” per 10’) of length measured by a light line stretched from end to end of unit.
Difference in camber between any two (2) adjacent planks shall not be more than onequarter inch (¼”)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
The Contractor shall inspect the work prepared by other trades to receive the Work of this
Section and shall correct any installation-related defects. Commencement of work will be
construed as complete acceptance of preparatory work by others.
B.
Damaged, cracked, or masonry chipped units shall be satisfactorily repaired and patched if
structurally and architecturally acceptable. ATC Construction Manager shall be sole judge as to
acceptability, and its decision shall be final. The manufacturer assumes responsibility for any
PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
034100 - 4
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
damage or impairment of the precast units. All exposed-to-view units shall be cleaned to obtain
a uniform finish.
3.2
ERECTION
A
Contractor shall be responsible for providing suitable access to the site, proper drainage, and
firm, level bearing for the hauling and erection equipment to operate under their own power.
B.
Units shall be shipped and erected by the Manufacturer or a competent erector approved by
ATC Construction Manager. All units shall be carefully erected by fully experienced workmen in
proper sequence, plumb, and square.
C.
All units shall be erected with particular care both with regard to damage to the exposed
exterior surface of the members and with regard to their tolerances in respect to line, plane, and
elevation of adjacent units.
D.
The fabricator and erector, or a responsible representative, shall check the acceptability of the
bearing surfaces before starting any erection and shall accept them in written form as being
satisfactory for his purpose. The fabricator and erector assume full responsibility for the
placement of all units as to alignment, evenness, and level in top and bottom surfaces.
E.
All members shall be adequately braced during and after erection until all final connections are
made. Take adequate precautions for crane, lines, slings, and all other lifting devices to
prevent failure.
F.
Grout or bearing pads required at slabs for setting or precast concrete members shall be of final
thickness as required, with spaces between contact areas completely filled. Grout mix shall be
1:2 Portland Cement and fine masonry sand. Bearing pads shall be plastic strips located under
all bearing points on masonry walls.
G.
All recesses and openings for anchorage devices shall be filled with grout and leveled flush with
adjacent concrete surfaces.
3.3
GROUTING
A.
Shear keys and joints shall be grouted with an approved non-shrink material and shall interlock
the grouted units completely.
B.
Joints shall be level and shall be clean and free from all debris and dirt before grouting.
C.
Dampen surfaces to be grouted.
3.4
A.
3.5
A.
FIELD WELDING
Field welding is to be done by qualified welders using equipment and materials compatible to
the base material.
ATTACHMENTS
Subject to approval of ATC Construction Manager, precast, prestressed concrete products may
be drilled provided that no contact is made with the prestressing steel, and that non-prestressed
steel is not damaged. Should spalling occur, it shall be repaired by the trade doing the drilling.
PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
034100 - 5
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
3.6
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Independent Testing Agency: Cooperate with the Independent Testing Agency engaged by
ATC for field quality control activities required in Section 014320, “Quality Control, Testing and
Special Inspection Services.” Provide at least 48 hours notice to testing agency prior to the time
testing and/or inspection is required. Allow inspectors access to work areas, as needed to
perform inspections.
B.
Tests and Inspections: Engage Independent Testing Agency in accordance with Section 014320
“Quality Control, Testing and Special Inspection Services.” for testing of listed properties.
3.7
REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A.
Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and
installed assemblies with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's
written instructions.
B.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
installer that ensures that assemblies are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion.
END OF SECTION
PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
034100 - 6
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
SECTION 042000
UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
1.2
Attention is directed to all Sections within DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which
are hereby made a part of this Section of the Specifications.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
1.3
Concrete masonry units.
Mortar and grout.
Reinforcing steel, masonry joint reinforcement, ties and anchors.
Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and
color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through one
source from a single manufacturer for each product required.
B.
Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including
color for exposed masonry, from a single manufacturer for each cementitious component and
from one source or producer for each aggregate.
C.
Testing: In accordance with Section 014320, “Quality Control, Testing and Special Inspection
Services.”
D.
1.4
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an
enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If
units become wet, do not install until they are dry.
B.
Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not
use cementitious materials that have become damp.
C.
Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination avoided.
D.
Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for lifting and
emptying into dispensing silo. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on
elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in a metal dispensing silo with
weatherproof cover.
E.
Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt
and oil.
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 1
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
1.5
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Scaffolding: Install scaffolding in accordance with OSHA Standard and code requirements.
Inspect and maintain daily.
B.
Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with
waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when
construction is not in progress.
1.
2.
C.
Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left
exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such
masonry.
1.
2.
D.
Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading
coverings on ground and over wall surface.
Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from
splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.
Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice
or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by
frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained
in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
1.
E.
Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place.
Where 1 wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes,
secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold
cover in place.
Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40
deg F and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days
after completing cleaning.
Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL
A.
2.2
Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to
exceed tolerances and to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the
standard. Do not uses units where such defects, including dimensions that vary from specified
dimensions by more than stated tolerances, will be exposed in the completed Work or will impair
the quality of completed masonry.
CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMUS)
A.
Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90, normal weight unless indicated otherwise manufactured
to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions.
B.
Shapes: Provide standard shapes indicated and as required for building configuration.
2.3
MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather
construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color
indicated.
B.
Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 2
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
C.
Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use
in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry
mortar.
D.
Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate
consisting of natural sand or crushed stone.
E.
Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
F.
Water: Potable.
2.4
REINFORCEMENT
A.
Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60.
B.
Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Multiwythe Masonry:
1.
2.5
Interior Walls: Mill-galvanized, carbon steel.
Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel.
Wire Size and Spacing: As required by Code.
Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units.
Ladder type with 1 side rod at each face shell of hollow masonry units more than 4 inches
in width, plus 1 side rod at each wythe of masonry 4 inches or less in width.
TIES AND ANCHORS
A.
Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent paragraphs that are made from
materials that comply with subparagraphs below, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.6
Mill-Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1
coating.
Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire:
ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153/A 153M,
Class B-2 coating.
Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 316.
Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel, G60 zinc coating.
Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
Stainless Steel Bars: ASTM A 276 or ASTM A 666, Type 304.
MASONRY CLEANERS
A.
Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing
mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without
discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use
by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.
1.
Available Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
2.7
Diedrich Technologies, Inc.
EaCo Chem, Inc.
ProSoCo, Inc.
MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A.
General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators,
retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise
indicated.
1.
Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 3
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
2.
B.
Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the
following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to
provide required compressive strength of masonry.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement and lime.
For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M.
For reinforced masonry, use Type S.
For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for
interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for other
applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N.
Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.
1.
2.
Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will
comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces
and pour height.
Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to
ASTM C 143/C 143M.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1.
2.
B.
3.2
For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental
to performance of work.
Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness
shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths
indicated.
B.
Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections.
C.
Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing
equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening.
D.
Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous
pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp,
unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut
units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. Do not use units cut to less
than one-half size.
E.
Do not install concrete masonry units with more than 5 percent damage to the face. Do not
install brick units which will show defects after installation.
3.3
LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A.
Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint
thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets.
Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at
other locations.
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 4
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
B.
Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in bond
pattern indicated on Construction Drawings; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch
horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by
racking back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming
work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and
mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry.
C.
Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections.
Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
D.
Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams,
lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof
structure above, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
3.
3.4
Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure
above.
Fasten partition top anchors to structure above and build into top of partition. Grout cells
of CMUs solidly around plastic tubes of anchors and push tubes down into grout to
provide 1/2-inch clearance between end of anchor rod and end of tube. Space anchors
48 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
Wedge non-load-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of tile, slate,
or metal. Fill joint with mortar after dead-load deflection of structure above approaches
final position.
MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A.
Lay hollow brick and concrete masonry units as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints.
With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.
With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on
footings.
With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on
footings where cells are not grouted.
B.
Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient
mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head
joints.
C.
Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint
thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than
paint), unless otherwise indicated.
3.5
CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
A.
General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses.
Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for inplane wall or partition movement.
B.
Form control joints in concrete masonry using one of the following methods:
1.
2.
Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of concrete masonry units on one side
of control joint. Fill resultant core with grout and rake out joints in exposed faces for
application of sealant.
Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block.
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 5
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
3.
4.
3.6
Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond-breaker strips at joint.
Keep head joints free and clear of mortar or rake out joint for application of sealant.
Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints and remove filler when unit masonry is
complete for application of sealant.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Independent Testing Agency: Cooperate with the Independent Testing Agency engaged by
ATC for field quality control activities required in Section 014320, “Quality Control, Testing and
Special Inspection Services.” Provide at least 48 hours notice to testing agency prior to the time
testing and/or inspection is required. Allow inspectors access to work areas, as needed to
perform inspections.
B.
Tests and Inspections: Engage Independent Testing Agency in accordance with Section 014320
“Quality Control, Testing and Special Inspection Services.” for testing of listed properties.
3.7
MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL
A.
Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's
property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.
B.
Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste and other masonry waste, and
legally dispose of off the Site.
END OF SECTION
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 6
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
SECTION 055000
METAL FABRICATIONS FOR TOWER SITES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
1.2
Attention is directed to all Sections within DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which
are hereby made a part of this Section of the Specifications.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following. Requirements for materials, hot-dip
galvanizing, and shop-applied primers are included with each item as applicable.
1.
Miscellaneous steel framing and supports:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Ladders:
a.
b.
c.
3.
B.
Steel ladders to all levels, galvanized at exterior locations.
Steel ladders at interior locations, shop-primed.
Steel ladder safety cages, galvanized at exterior locations.
Galvanized steel bollards with shop-applied primer.
Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Galvanized steel framing, elevated platforms and supports.
Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not
specified in other Sections; galvanized at exterior locations and in exterior walls.
Prefinished slotted steel channel support framing.
Section 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE for lintels, sleeves, anchors, inserts,
plates and similar items.
Section 042000 - UNIT MASONRY for lintels, miscellaneous metal and iron sleeves,
anchors, inserts and plates to be built into masonry walls.
Section 099000 - PAINTING AND COATING for field painting work of this section.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Delegated Design: Design ladders and miscellaneous framing and supports, including
comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance
requirements and design criteria indicated.
B.
Structural Performance of Ladders: Provide ladders capable of withstanding the effects of loads
and stresses within limits and under conditions specified in ANSI A14.3.
C.
Thermal Movements: Provide exterior metal fabrications that allow for thermal movements
resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by
preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and
other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials
due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1.
Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
METAL FABRICATIONS FOR TOWER SITES
055000 - 1
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings:
Sections.
B.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
C.
Welding certificates.
1.
1.5
Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other
Provide applicable welding certification to ATC Construction Manager for all welding
activities on towers or as required by local, State or Federal code.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, design calculations, and other
structural data by a qualified professional engineer.
B.
Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice
in the jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering
services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for
installations of metal fabrications that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material,
design, and extent.
C.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
1.6
AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum."
AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code--Stainless Steel."
Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise
indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials
without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with
metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.
1.
2.
1.7
Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying
the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal fabrications without
field measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that
actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint
and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats
are compatible with one another.
B.
Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings,
templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor
bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver
such items to Project site in time for installation.
C.
Coordinate installation of steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete that are
specified in this Section but required for work of another Section. Deliver such items to Project
site in time for installation.
METAL FABRICATIONS FOR TOWER SITES
055000 - 2
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FERROUS METALS
A.
Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B.
Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 666, Type 304 at interior, Type 316L
at exterior.
C.
Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304 at interior, Type 316L at exterior.
D.
Rolled-Steel Floor Plate:
ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled
ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.
E.
Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing.
F.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is
indicated or required by structural loads. Provide Schedule 80 pipe for bollards.
2.2
from
plate
complying
with
NONFERROUS METALS
A.
Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209/B 209M, Alloy 6061-T6.
B.
Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221/221M, Alloy 6063-T6.
C.
Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, Alloy 6061-T6.
D.
Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F.
2.3
FASTENERS
A.
General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior
use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, at
exterior walls. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. Select fasteners for
type, grade, and class required.
B.
Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. Provide hot-dip or mechanically deposited, zinc-coated
anchor bolts where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized. Unless otherwise directed
anchor bolts for towers will be provided by the tower manufacturer and delivered to the
Contractor hot dipped galvanized
C.
Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal
to four times the load imposed, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted
by a qualified independent testing agency.
1.
D.
Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M
malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as
needed, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153/A 153M.
Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain, without failure,
a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the
load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488,
conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
1.
Acceptable Manufacturers: Kwik-Bolt 3 by Hilti, Inc., TruBolt Wedge Anchor by ITW Red
Head or Power-Stud by Powers Fasteners.
METAL FABRICATIONS FOR TOWER SITES
055000 - 3
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
2.4
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
welded.
B.
Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer
complying with MPI#79. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from
zinc-rich primer.
C.
Zinc-Rich Primer:
topcoat.
1.
D.
2.5
Provide interior, field-applied primer with a VOC content of 250 g/L or less, when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel,
complying with SSPC-Paint 20.
1.
E.
Complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29 and compatible with
Provide interior, field-applied paint with a VOC content of 250 g/L or less, when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout
complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for
interior and exterior applications.
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units
only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain
structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
B.
Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius
of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on
exposed surfaces.
C.
Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or
otherwise impairing work.
D.
Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.
E.
Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove welding flux immediately.
At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent
surface.
F.
Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners
where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk)
screws or bolts, unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
G.
Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude
water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
H.
Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws,
and similar items.
METAL FABRICATIONS FOR TOWER SITES
055000 - 4
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
I.
2.6
Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring
devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.
MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A.
General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to
complete the Work.
B.
Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless otherwise
indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive
adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive
hardware, hangers, and similar items.
1.
2.
2.7
Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated.
Furnish inserts if units are installed after concrete is placed.
METAL LADDERS
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
2.8
Comply with ANSI A14.3, unless otherwise indicated.
Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches o.c. with welded or
bolted brackets, made from same metal as ladder.
Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung, either by coating rung with aluminum-oxide
granules set in epoxy-resin adhesive or by using a type of manufactured rung filled with
aluminum-oxide grout.
LADDER SAFETY CAGES
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
2.9
Fabricate ladder safety cages to comply with ANSI A14.3. Assemble by welding or with
stainless-steel fasteners.
Provide primary hoops at tops and bottoms of cages and spaced not more than 20 feet
o.c. Provide secondary intermediate hoops spaced not more than 48 inches o.c.
between primary hoops.
Fasten assembled safety cage to ladder rails and adjacent construction by welding or
with stainless-steel fasteners, unless otherwise indicated.
METAL BOLLARDS
A.
Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 80 steel pipe.
B.
Fabricate bollards with 3/8-inch-thick steel baseplates for bolting to concrete slab.
baseplates at all 4 corners for 3/4-inch anchor bolts.
1.
2.10
Drill
Where bollards are to be anchored to sloping concrete slabs, angle baseplates for plumb
alignment of bollards.
FINISHES, GENERAL
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
2.11
A.
STEEL PRIMERS AND FINISHES
Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with
minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and
environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications:
METAL FABRICATIONS FOR TOWER SITES
055000 - 5
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Zinc-Rich Primer: Urethane zinc rich primer compatible with topcoat Specified in Section
099000 - PAINTS AND COATINGS. Provide primer with a VOC content of 340 g/L (2.8 lb/gal.)
or less per OTC and HAPS COMPLIANT STANDARDS PER 2007 standards when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Provide Tnemec Series 394
Perimerprime at 3.0 mils DFT or approved equal by DuPont or Carboline.
1.
2.12
A.
A.
Hot-Dip Galvanizing: For steel exposed to the elements, weather or corrosive environments and
other steel indicated to be galvanized, provide coating for iron and steel fabrications applied by
the hot-dip process.
Comply with ASTM A 123 for fabricated products and ASTM A 153 for hardware.
Provide thickness of galvanizing specified in referenced standards.
Galvanizing bath shall contain special high grade zinc and other earthly materials.
Fill vent holes after galvanizing, if applicable, and grind smooth.
HOT-DIP GALVANIZING AND FACTORY-APPLIED PRIMER
Hot-Dip Galvanizing: For steel exposed to the elements, weather or corrosive environments and
other steel indicated to be galvanized, provide coating for iron and steel fabrications applied by
the hot-dip process.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Provide interior, field-applied primer with a VOC content of 250 g/L or less, when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
HOT-DIP GALVANIZING
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.13
Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B) and Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Urethane Primer:
SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 7, "Brush Off Blast Cleaning."
Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with
galvanized finishes and those to be field welded, embedded in concrete or masonry,
unless otherwise indicated. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of
2 inches.
Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and
Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
Comply with SSPC-PA 2, "Measurement of Dry Coating Thickness with magnetic Gages.”
Comply with ASTM A 123 for fabricated products and ASTM A 153 for hardware.
Provide thickness of galvanizing specified in referenced standards.
Galvanizing bath shall contain special high grade zinc and other earthly materials.
Fill vent holes after galvanizing, if applicable, and grind smooth.
Factory-Applied Primer over Galvanized Steel: Provide factory-applied prime coat, certified
OTC/VOC compliant less than 2.8 lbs/gal. and conforming to EPA and local requirements.
Apply primer within 12 hours after galvanizing at the same galvanizer’s plant in a controlled
environment meeting applicable environmental regulations and as recommended by the primer
coating manufacturer. Primer coat shall exhibit a rugosity (smoothness) not greater than 4 rug
(16-20 microns of variation) when measured by a profilometer over a 1 inch straight line on the
surface of architectural and structural elements that are less than 24 pounds per running foot.
Profilometer shall be capable of operating in 1 micron increments. Blast cleaning of the surface
is unacceptable for surface preparation. Primer shall have a minimum two year re-coat window
for application of finish coat. Coatings must meet or exceed the following performance criteria
as stipulated by the coatings manufacturer:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Basis-of-Design: Primergalv by Duncan Galvanizing.
Abrasion Resistance: ASTM D 4060 (CS17 Wheel, 1,000 grams load).1kg load, 200 mg
loss.
Adhesion: ASTM D4541, 1050 psi.
Corrosion Weathering: ASTM D5894, 13 cycles, 4,368 hours; rating 10 per ASTM D714
for blistering and rating 7 per ASTM D610 for rusting.
METAL FABRICATIONS FOR TOWER SITES
055000 - 6
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
2.14
Direct Impact Resistance: ASTM D2794, 160 in. lbs.
Flexibility: Method: ASTM D522, 180 degree bend, 1 inch mandrel, passes.
Pencil Hardness: ASTM D3363, 3B.
Moisture Condensation Resistance: ASTM D4585, 100 degrees F, 2000 hours; passes,
no cracking or delamination.
Dry Heat Resistance: Method: ASTM D2485, 250 degrees F.
Warranty: Provide galvanizer’s warranty that materials will be free from 10 percent or
more visible rust for a period of 20 years.
ALUMINUM FINISHES
A.
Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum
Association for designating aluminum finishes.
B.
As-Fabricated Finish: AA-M10 (Mechanical Finish: as fabricated, unspecified).
C.
Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated;
Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating
0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal
fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges
and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and
levels.
B.
Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are
not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove welding flux immediately.
At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent
surface.
Provide fire watch and comply with all local, State and Federal permitting and code
requirements
Use extreme caution and deploy protective measure to prevent fire and damage to
existing cables, wires and antennas when welding or cutting on towers.
D.
Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal
fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for
use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and
other connectors.
E.
Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete,
masonry, or similar construction.
F.
Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of steel that will come into contact with grout,
concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of isolation coating.
METAL FABRICATIONS FOR TOWER SITES
055000 - 7
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
3.2
INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A.
General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported,
including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.
B.
Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns. Secure girders
with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with bolts through top plates of
pipe columns.
1.
C.
Install pipe columns on concrete footings with grouted baseplates. Position and grout column
baseplates as specified in this Section.
1.
3.3
Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated for girders supported on concrete or
masonry, install as specified in this Section.
Grout baseplates of columns supporting steel girders after girders are installed and
leveled.
INSTALLING PIPE BOLLARDS
A.
Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Center and align bollards in holes 3 inches
above bottom of excavation. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Support and
brace bollards in position until concrete has cured.
B.
Fill bollards solidly with 2500 psi min. concrete, mounding top surface to shed water.
3.4
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop
painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1.
B.
Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.
Touch-Up and Repair for Galvanized Surfaces: For damaged and field-welded metal coated
surfaces, clean welds, bolted connections and abraded areas.
1.
2.
3.
For galvanized surfaces, apply organic zinc repair paint complying with requirements of
ASTM A 780, modified to 95 percent zinc in dry film. Galvanizing repair paint shall have
95 percent zinc by weight, ZiRP by Duncan Galvanizing. Thickness of applied
galvanizing repair paint shall be not less than coating thickness required by ASTM A 123
or A 153 as applicable. Touch-up of galvanized surfaces with silver paint, brite paint, or
aluminum paints is not acceptable.
For factory-applied finish coatings, field-touch-up shall be performed by factory approved
personnel for warranties to apply. Touch-up shall be such that repair is not visible from a
distance of 6 feet. If non factory-approved technicians are used for field touch-up, no
warranties shall exist.
A touch-up repair kit or touchup instructions shall be provided to ATC for each type of
factory-applied finish.
END OF SECTION
METAL FABRICATIONS FOR TOWER SITES
055000 - 8
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
SECTION 061000
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
1.2
Attention is directed to all Sections within DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which
are hereby made a part of this Section of the Specifications.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Wood blocking, cants, and nailers.
Plywood backing panels.
Framing and carpentry for equipment shelters
Section 042000 - UNIT MASONRY for wood nailers and blocking built into masonry.
Section 061600 - SHEATHING for plywood and gypsum sheathing.
Section 092110 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES for sheet metal backing.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels; place spacers between each bundle to provide air
circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A.
Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the American
Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for
moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed
sizes for dry lumber.
Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
Provide dry lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2inch nominal thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated.
All permanently installed lumber left exposed to weather shall be pressure and
preservative treated as discussed in section 2.2 below.
Plywood Panels:
1.
2.
3.
Plywood: Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2, unless otherwise indicated.
Marine Grade plywood shall be used when there is any potential for exposure to weather,
be painted and coated for such use and in which case shall not be used for structural
purposes.
Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified but not less than thickness
indicated.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
061000 - 1
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
4.
2.2
Factory mark panels according to indicated standard.
WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS
A.
Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior
construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in
contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground.
1.
2.
Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no
arsenic or chromium. Do not use inorganic boron (SBX) for sill plates.
For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical
formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise
adversely affect finishes.
B.
Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber and 15
percent for plywood. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements
for untreated material.
C.
Mark each treated item with the treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the
American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.
D.
Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1.
2.
2.3
Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar
members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in
contact with masonry or concrete in exterior walls.
MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A.
General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
2.4
Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
Blocking.
Cants.
Nailers.
Furring.
Grounds.
For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction, Stud, or No. 2 grade lumber with 15
percent moisture content.
PANEL PRODUCTS
A.
Miscellaneous Concealed Plywood: Exposure 1 sheathing, span rating to suit framing in each
location, and thickness as indicated but not less than 1/2 inch.
B.
Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged,
fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2 inch thick.
2.5
FASTENERS
A.
General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified
in this Article for material and manufacture.
1.
B.
Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated,
or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners of Type 304 stainless steel.
Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF-N-105.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
061000 - 2
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
C.
Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272.
D.
Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
E.
Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads
and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.
F.
Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where
indicated, flat washers.
G.
Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in
unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as
determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and
inspecting agency.
1.
2.6
Material:
Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 5; except provide Type 304 stainless steel where in contact with pressurepreservative treated wood.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Adhesive, Including Gluing Furring and Sleepers to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation
complying with ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer.
1.
Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of carpentry and that are too small to
use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.
B.
Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit
carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring,
nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other
construction. Lumber on or in buildings shall not be installed in a permanent installation when
left with potential for unprotected exposure to weather.
C.
Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber
and plywood.
D.
Securely attach carpentry work as indicated and according to applicable codes and recognized
standards.
E.
Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes with wood filler.
F.
Use fasteners of appropriate type and length.
splitting wood.
3.2
Predrill members when necessary to avoid
WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION
A.
Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated
and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other
work involved.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
061000 - 3
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
B.
Attach items to substrates to support applied loading.
surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
END OF SECTION
ROUGH CARPENTRY
061000 - 4
Recess bolts and nuts flush with
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
SECTION 070150
ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
1.2
Attention is directed to all Sections within DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which
are hereby made a part of this Section of the Specifications.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1.
2.
Asphalt shingles and underlayment.
EPDM roofing.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
B.
Modify existing roofing systems as required to accommodate new construction or
equipment removal.
Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Cover board.
Roof insulation.
Substrate Board (thermal barrier).
Vapor retarder.
Flashing for equipment mounted on roofing and for roofing penetrations.
Section 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY for plywood sheathing, wood nailers, cants,
curbs, and blocking.
Section 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM for metal roof penetration
flashings, flashings, and counterflashings.
Section 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS for sealants.
Division 22 - PLUMBING for roof drains.
Division 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING for roof curbs for
HVAC equipment.
DEFINITION
A.
1.4
Roofing Terminology: See ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and
Waterproofing Manual" for definitions of terms related to roofing work in this Section.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General: Provide installed roofing and base flashings that remain watertight; do not permit the
passage of water; and resist specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and
exposure to weather without failure. The roofing system shall be sloped per plans and to allow
to drain dry with no standing water.
1.
2.
Accelerated Weathering for EPDM roofing: Roofing system shall withstand 2000 hours of
exposure when tested according to ASTM G 152, ASTM G 154, or ASTM G 155.
Impact Resistance: Roofing system shall resist impact damage when tested according to
ASTM D 3746 or ASTM D 4272.
ROOFING
070150- 1
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
B.
Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under
conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing manufacturer based
on testing and field experience.
C.
Roofing System Design: Roofing system shall be designed to withstand loads not less than
loads required by Code.
D.
FM Global Listing: Roofing, base flashings and component materials shall comply with
requirements in FM Global 4450 or FM Global 4470 as part of a roofing system, and shall be
listed in FM Global's "RoofNav" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable.
Identify materials with FM Global markings as applicable.
1.
2.
Fire/Windstorm Classification: As required by location and/or jurisdiction
Hail-Resistance Rating: As required by location and/or jurisdiction
E.
Wind-resistance Characteristics: ASTM D 3161/UL 997 and ASTM D7158 Wind Resistant.
F.
Flashings: Provide base flashings, perimeter flashings, detail flashings and component materials
that comply with requirements and recommendations in FMG 1-49 Loss Prevention Data Sheet
for Perimeter Flashings; FMG 1-29 Loss Prevention Data Sheet for Above Deck Roof
Components; NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual (Fifth Edition) for Construction Details
and SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual (Seventh Edition) for Construction Details, as
applicable.
G.
Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108 or UL 790, Class A; for application and roof slopes
indicated; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of
applicable testing agency.
H.
Energy Performance: Provide steep slope roofing system with Solar Reflectance Index (SRI)
not less than 29 when calculated according to ASTM E 1980 based on testing identical products
by a qualified testing agency.
I.
Certification for Work Done on Existing Roof: Upon completion of work of this Section, submit
certification by existing roof manufacturer acknowledging that all work performed is acceptable
and that the entire roof remains under warranty.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain components for roofing system from or approved by single roofing
system manufacturer.
B.
Roofing Signage: At entry points to roof, provide signage-listing type of roofing system,
manufacturer, date installed, and holder of the warranty.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled
with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions
for storing and mixing with other components.
C.
Store roofing materials in a dry, well-ventilated, cool, weathertight location out of direct sunlight
according to manufacturer's written instructions. Store underlayment rolls on end on pallets or
other raised surfaces out of direct sunlight. Do not double stack rolls. Handle, store, and place
roofing materials in a manner to avoid significant or permanent damage to roof deck or
structural supporting members.
B.
Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location
and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored
liquid material from direct sunlight. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be
applied within its stated shelf life.
ROOFING
070150- 2
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
C.
Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight,
moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation
manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
D.
Protect unused underlayment from weather, sunlight, and moisture when left overnight or when
roofing work is not in progress.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.8
Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit roofing to be performed according to manufacturer's written instructions and
warranty requirements.
WARRANTY
A.
Roofing Contractor’s Warranty: The roofing subcontractor shall supply Owner with a minimum
two-year workmanship warranty for each roof. In the event any work related to the roofing,
flashing, or metalwork is found to be defective within two years of substantial completion, the
roofing contractor shall remove and replace such at no additional cost to the Owner. The
roofing subcontractor’s warranty obligation shall run directly to the Owner, and a copy the
roofing signed warranty shall be sent to the roofing system’s manufacturer. The duration of the
Roofing Contractor’s two-year warranty shall run concurrent with the roofing system’s
manufacturer’s warranty.
B.
EPDM Roofing Systems Manufacturer’s Warranty: The roofing manufacturer shall guarantee
roof areas to be in a watertight condition, for a period of 20 years, from the date of final
acceptance of the roofing system. The warranty shall be a 20-year no dollar limit (NDL), nonprorated total system labor and material warranty, for wind speed as required by Code or as
indicated on the Drawings. Total system warranty shall include all roofing materials, related
components and accessories including, but not limited to the substrate board, vapor retarder,
insulation board, cover board, roofing membrane, membrane flashings, fasteners, adhesives,
metal roof copings, metal roof edges and termination metals and roof drain assemblies. The
manufacturer shall repair defects in materials and workmanship as promptly after observation
as weather and site conditions permit.
C.
Asphalt Shingle Systems Manufacturer’s Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer
agrees to repair or replace asphalt shingles that fail in materials within specified warranty
period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
1.
2.
D.
Manufacturing defects.
Structural failures, including failure of asphalt shingles to self-seal after a
reasonable time.
Material Warranty Period: 30 years from date of Substantial Completion, prorated, with
first three years non-prorated.
Algae-Discoloration Warranty Period: Asphalt shingles will not discolor five years from
date of Substantial Completion.
Roofing Systems Manufacturer’s Warranty for Work Done on Existing Roof: Maintain existing
warranties. Coordinate with ATC Construction Manager and the Holder of the existing warranty
so as not to affect terms of existing warranty.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED ASPHALT SHINGLES
A.
Laminated-Strip Asphalt Shingles: ASTM D 3462, laminated, multi-ply overlay construction,
glass-fiber reinforced, mineral-granule surfaced, and self-sealing.
ROOFING
070150- 3
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
a.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
b.
c.
B.
Algae Resistance: Granules treated to resist algae discoloration.
Color and Blends: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
1.
2.
Felt: ASTM D 226, Type II, asphalt-saturated organic felts, non-perforated.
Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment, Polyethylene Faced: ASTM D 1970, minimum of 40mil-thick, slip-resisting, polyethylene-film-reinforced top surface laminated to SBSmodified asphalt adhesive, with release paper backing; cold applied.
a.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1)
2)
3)
C.
Rigid Ridge Vent: Manufacturer's standard, rigid section high-density polypropylene or
other UV-stabilized plastic ridge vent with nonwoven geotextile filter strips; for use under
ridge shingles.
a.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1)
2)
3)
Air Vent, Inc.; a Gibraltar Industries company.
Cor-A-Vent, Inc.
GAF Materials Corporation.
ACCESSORIES
1.
2.
Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type II, asbestos free.
Roofing Nails: ASTM F 1667; aluminum, stainless-steel, copper, or hot-dip galvanizedsteel wire shingle nails, minimum 0.120-inch-diameter, barbed shank, sharp-pointed, with
a minimum 3/8-inch-diameter flat head and of sufficient length to penetrate 3/4 inch into
solid wood decking or extend at least 1/8 inch through OSB or plywood sheathing.
a.
3.
E.
Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc.
Grace, W. R. & Co. - Conn.
Henry Company.
RIDGE VENTS
1.
D.
Atlas Roofing Corporation.
CertainTeed Corporation.
Elk Premium Building Products, Inc.; an ElkCorp company.
GAF Materials Corporation.
IKO.
Owens Corning.
Where nails are in contact with metal flashing, use galvanized nails made from
same metal as flashing.
Felt Underlayment Nails: Aluminum, stainless-steel, or hot-dip galvanized-steel wire with
low-profile capped heads or disc caps, 1-inch minimum diameter.
METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
1.
General: Comply with requirements in Section 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND
TRIM.
ROOFING
070150- 4
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
2.
3.
2.2
Form flashing to profiles indicated on Drawings, and to protect roofing materials from
physical damage and shed water.
Form sections square and accurate to profile, in maximum possible lengths, free from
distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance.
EPDM ROOFING MEMBRANE
A.
EPDM Roofing Membrane: ASTM D 4637, Type I, nonreinforced uniform, flexible sheet made
from EPDM, and as follows:
1.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
B.
Thickness: 60 mils (1.5 mm) nominal.
Exposed Face Color: White.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
1.
2.
3.
4.
General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended
use and compatible with membrane roofing.
Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall meet VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.
Sheet Flashing: 60-mil-thick EPDM, partially cured or cured, according to application.
Epichlorohydrin Sheet at Areas Requiring Grease Resistance: 60-mil-thick, unreinforced
flexible sheet with the following typical properties as determined per ASTM test method
indicated:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
C.
Carlisle SynTec Incorporated.
Firestone Building Products Company.
Johns Manville International, Inc.
Mule-Hide Products Co., Inc.
Versico Inc.
Tensile Strength: 1500 psi; ASTM D 412.
Ultimate Elongation: 200 percent; ASTM D 412.
Tear Resistance: 150 lbf/in; ASTM D 412.
Brittleness Temperature: Minus 20 deg F ASTM D 746.
Resistance to Ozone Aging: No cracks after 168 hours' exposure of 50 percent
elongated sample at 104 deg F and 100-pphm ozone; ASTM D 1149.
Resistance to Oil Aging: 15 percent maximum mass change after 168 hours'
immersion in diesel fuel No. 2 at 158 deg F; ASTM D 471.
Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard bonding adhesive.
Seaming Material: Manufacturer's standard synthetic-rubber polymer primer and 3-inchwide minimum with cover strip or 6-inch-wide, butyl splice tape with release film.
Lap Sealant: Manufacturer's standard single-component sealant, color to match roofing
membrane.
Water Cutoff Mastic: Manufacturer's standard butyl mastic sealant.
Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum
bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick; with anchors.
Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosionresistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening membrane to substrate, and
acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer.
Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet
flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, in-seam
sealants, termination reglets, cover strips, and other accessories.
VAPOR RETARDER
1.
Self-Adhering Sheet Vapor Retarder:
ASTM D 1970, minimum 40-mil- thick film
laminated to layer of rubberized asphalt adhesive; maximum permeance rating of 0.1
perm; cold-applied, with slip-resisting surface and release paper backing. Provide primer
when recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer.
ROOFING
070150- 5
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
2.
3.
Reinforced Fire-Retardant Vapor Retarder: 3-ply polyethylene and non-woven cord grid
equal to Griffolyn TX-1200FR with prefabricated Griffolyn pipe boots, mastic-type
Griffolyn Fab Tape at seams, and self-adhesive Griff-Tape at punctures by Reef
Industries, Inc.
Loose-Laid Sheet Vapor Retarder: Minimum 10 mil polyethylene sheet with maximum
permeance rating of 0.1 perm.
a.
D.
Tape:
Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder
manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.
ROOF INSULATION
1.
2.
General: Provide preformed roof insulation boards that comply with requirements and
referenced standards, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes and of thicknesses
indicated.
Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type IV, 1.6-lb/cu. ft. minimum
density, square edged.
a.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may
be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
3.
Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, felt or glass-fiber mat facer
on both major surfaces.
a.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may
be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
4.
5.
E.
DiversiFoam Products.
Dow Chemical Company.
Pactiv/Greenguard
Owens Corning.
Atlas Roofing Corporation.
Carlisle SynTec Incorporated.
Firestone Building Products Company.
GAF Materials Corp.
GenFlex Roofing Systems.
Johns Manville International Inc.
Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4
inch per 12 inches unless otherwise indicated.
Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes
where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.
INSULATION ACCESSORIES
1.
2.
3.
General: Furnish roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer
for intended use and compatible with membrane roofing.
Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosionresistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate,
and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
Cold Fluid-Applied Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard cold fluid-applied adhesive
formulated to adhere roof insulation to substrate.
a.
4.
Cover Board Adhesive: Manufacturer’s cold fluid-applied adhesive formulated to
adhere cover board to insulation substrate.
Cover Board: Provide one of the following, as required by roofing manufacturer to
comply with performance requirements and provide specified warranty.
ROOFING
070150- 6
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
a.
b.
5.
F.
Substrate Board (Thermal Barrier): ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant
gypsum substrate, Type X, 5/8 inch (16 mm) thick, factory primed.
WALKWAYS
1.
2.3
Cover Board: ASTM C 1278/C 1278M, cellulosic-fiber reinforced, water-resistant
gypsum substrate, 1/2 or 5/8 inch thick.
Cover Board: DOC PS 2, Exposure 1, oriented strand board, 7/16 inch (11 mm)
thick.
Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, solid-rubber, slip-resisting,
surface-textured walkway pads or rolls approximately 3/16 inch thick, and acceptable to
membrane roofing system manufacturer.
MATERIAL FOR WORK DONE ON EXISTING ROOFS
A.
Compatibility: Provide products recommended by manufacturers to be fully compatible with
indicated substrates. Provide separation materials as required to eliminate contact between
incompatible materials. Furnish specific product acceptable to manufacturer of roofing
membrane which will not compromise the roofing manufacturer's warranty
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
ASPHALT SHINGLE INSTALLATION
A.
EXAMINATION
1.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the
Work.
a.
b.
2.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION - EAVE ICE DAM PROTECTION (where applicalbe for climate)
1.
2.
3.
C.
Examine roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing
and blocking or metal clips and that installation is within flatness tolerances. Verify
that roof penetrations and plumbing stacks are in place and flashed to deck
surface
Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and
completely anchored; and that provision has been made for flashings and
penetrations through asphalt shingles. Verify deck surfaces are broom clean, dry
and free of ridges, warps, or voids.
Place the eave edge and gable edge metal flashing tight to the fascia boards. Weatherlap joints minimum of 2 inches. Secure flange with nails spaced 8 inches on center.
Apply chosen “Atlas Roofing Corporation shingle underlayment" as eave protection in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions and local building code requirements.
Extend eave protection membrane minimum 24 inches up slope beyond interior face of
exterior wall. For low slope roofs or severe climatic conditions, change to 48 inches or
greater – to comply with local code requirements.
UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
1.
2.
General: Comply with underlayment manufacturer's written installation instructions
applicable to products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements
apply.
Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment - Full Coverage: Install, wrinkle free, on roof deck.
Comply with low-temperature installation restrictions of underlayment manufacturer if
applicable. Install on roof deck parallel with and starting at the eaves lapped in direction
ROOFING
070150- 7
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
3.
to shed water. Lap sides a minimum of 3-1/2 inches over underlying course. Lap ends a
minimum of 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Roll laps with roller. Cover
underlayment within seven days.
Single-Layer Felt Underlayment: Install on roof deck parallel with and starting at the
eaves. Lap sides a minimum of 2 inches over underlying course. Lap ends a minimum
of 4 inches. Stagger end laps between succeeding courses at least 72 inches. Fasten
with felt underlayment nails.
a.
4.
Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install, wrinkle free, on roof deck. Comply with lowtemperature installation restrictions of underlayment manufacturer if applicable. Install at
locations indicated below, lapped in direction to shed water. Lap sides not less than 31/2 inches. Lap ends not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Roll
laps with roller. Cover underlayment within seven days.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
D.
Eaves: Extend from edges of eaves 36 inches beyond interior face of exterior wall.
Rakes: Extend from edges of rake 36 inches beyond interior face of exterior wall.
Valleys: Extend from lowest to highest point 18 inches on each side.
Hips: Extend 18 inches on each side.
Ridges: Extend 36 inches on each side without obstructing continuous ridge vent
slot.
Sidewalls: Extend beyond sidewall 18 inches and return vertically against sidewall
not less than 4 inches.
Dormers, Chimneys, Skylights, and Other Roof-Penetrating Elements: Extend
beyond penetrating element 18 inches and return vertically against penetrating
element not less than 4 inches.
Roof Slope Transitions: Extend 18 inches on each roof slope.
METAL FLASHING INSTALLATION
1.
E.
Install felt underlayment on roof deck not covered by self-adhering sheet
underlayment. Lap sides of felt over self-adhering sheet underlayment not less
than 3 inches in direction to shed water. Lap ends of felt not less than 6 inches
over self-adhering sheet underlayment.
General: Install metal flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements in
Section 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM.
ASPHALT SHINGLE INSTALLATION
1.
2.
General: Install asphalt shingles according to manufacturer's written instructions,
recommendations in ARMA's "Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual," and asphalt shingle
recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual."
Install starter strip along lowest roof edge, consisting of an asphalt shingle strip with selfsealing strip face up at roof edge.
a.
b.
3.
4.
5.
Extend asphalt shingles 3/4 inch over fasciae at eaves and rakes.
Install starter strip along rake edge.
Install first and remaining courses of asphalt shingles stair-stepping diagonally across
roof deck with manufacturer's recommended offset pattern at succeeding courses,
maintaining uniform exposure.
Fasten asphalt shingle strips with a minimum of four roofing nails located according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
Closed-Cut Valleys: Extend asphalt shingle strips from one side of valley 12 inches
beyond center of valley. Use one-piece shingle strips without joints in valley. Fasten with
extra nail in upper end of shingle. Install asphalt shingle courses from other side of valley
and cut back to a straight line 2 inches short of valley centerline. Trim upper concealed
corners of cut-back shingle strips.
a.
b.
Do not nail asphalt shingles within 6 inches of valley center.
Set trimmed, concealed-corner asphalt shingles in a 3-inch-wide bed of asphalt
roofing cement.
ROOFING
070150- 8
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
6.
7.
Ridge Vents: Install continuous ridge vents over asphalt shingles according to
manufacturer's written instructions. Fasten with roofing nails of sufficient length to
penetrate sheathing.
Ridge and Hip Cap Shingles: Maintain same exposure of cap shingles as roofing shingle
exposure. Lap cap shingles at ridges to shed water away from direction of prevailing
winds. Fasten with roofing nails of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing.
a.
8.
3.2
Fasten ridge cap asphalt shingles to cover ridge vent without obstructing airflow.
Do not permit traffic over finished roof surface.
EPDM ROOFING INSTALLATION
A.
EXAMINATION
1.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the
following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
B.
PREPARATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing
installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove
sharp projections.
Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling
or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work
is taking place or when rain is forecast.
Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water
from entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when
rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on
adjoining roofing.
Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so underlayment, vapor
retarder, insulation, and cover boards are not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at
the end of the workday.
SUBSTRATE BOARD INSTALLATION
1.
Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to roof
slopes with end joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt substrate boards together.
a.
b.
D.
Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and set and braced and that
roof drains are securely clamped in place.
Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at
penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation.
Verify that substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture
by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.
Verify that concrete curing compounds that will impair adhesion of roofing
components to roof deck have been removed.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Fasten substrate board to top flanges of steel deck to resist uplift pressure at
corners, perimeter, and field of roof according to roofing system manufacturers'
written instructions and as required to comply with performance requirements.
Fasten substrate board to top flanges of steel deck according to recommendations
in FM Global's "RoofNav" and FM Global Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29 for
specified Windstorm Resistance Classification.
VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION
1.
Self-Adhering Sheet Vapor Retarder:
ASTM D 1970, minimum 40-mil- thick film
laminated to layer of rubberized asphalt adhesive; maximum permeance rating of 0.1
ROOFING
070150- 9
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
2.
3.
E.
perm; cold-applied, with slip-resisting surface and release paper backing. Provide primer
when recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer.
Vapor Retarder: Loosely lay polyethylene-film vapor retarder over area to receive vapor
retarder, side, and end lapping each sheet a minimum of 2 inches and 6 inches,
respectively. Continuously seal side and end laps with tape.
Completely seal vapor retarder at side laps, end laps, terminations, obstructions, and
penetrations to prevent air movement into roofing system.
INSULATION AND COVERBOARD INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so insulation is not exposed
to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.
Comply with membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing
roof insulation.
Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.
Install one or more layers of insulation under area of roofing to achieve required
thickness. Install 2 or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from
joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches in each direction.
Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush
and does not restrict flow of water.
Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints
staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding
1/4 inch with insulation. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and
penetrations.
Mechanically Fastened Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure to deck
using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified boardtype roof insulation to deck type.
a.
b.
c.
8.
Mechanically Fastened Cover Boards: Install cover boards over insulation with long
joints in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered between rows. Offset joints of
insulation below a minimum of 6 inches in each direction. Loosely butt cover boards
together and mechanically fasten to roof deck.
a.
b.
c.
9.
Mechanically fasten cover boards, unless otherwise indicated.
Fasten insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof.
Fasten insulation according to requirements in FMG's "Approval Guide" for
specified Windstorm Resistance Classification.
Adhered Cover Boards: Install cover boards over mechanically-fastened insulation with
long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered between rows. Offset
joints of insulation below a minimum of 6 inches in each direction. Adhere cover boards
to mechanically-fastened insulation in ribbons of bead-applied adhesive or full-spread
adhesive, as required to comply with performance and warranty requirements.
a.
b.
c.
F.
Fasten insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof.
Fasten insulation according to requirements in FMG's "Approval Guide" for
specified Windstorm Resistance Classification.
For insulation applied in multiple layers, loose-lay first layer and mechanically
fasten top layer.
Locations for Adhered Cover Board Installation: Provide under green roof areas
and elsewhere, where indicated.
Adhere cover boards to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of
roof.
Fasten insulation according to requirements in FMG's "Approval Guide" for
specified Windstorm Resistance Classification.
ADHERED ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
1.
Install roofing membrane over area to receive roofing according to membrane roofing
system manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll roofing membrane and allow to relax
before installing.
ROOFING
070150- 10
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
G.
BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
H.
Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates
according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and
allow to partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to seam area of flashing.
Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured
sheet flashing.
Clean splice areas, apply splicing cement, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping
sheets to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed
edges of sheet flashing terminations.
Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings.
WALKWAY INSTALLATION
1.
3.3
Start installation of roofing membrane in presence of membrane roofing system
manufacturer's technical personnel.
Accurately align roofing membrane and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum
dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.
Bonding Adhesive: Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of roofing
membrane at rate required by manufacturer and allow to partially dry before installing
roofing membrane. Do not apply bonding adhesive to splice area of roofing membrane.
Mechanically or adhesively fasten roofing membrane securely at terminations,
penetrations, and perimeter of roofing.
Apply roofing membrane with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.
Tape Seam Installation: Clean and prime both faces of splice areas, apply splice tape,
and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping roofing membranes according to
manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap
sealant and seal exposed edges of roofing membrane terminations.
Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not meet requirements.
Spread sealant or mastic bed over deck drain flange at deck drains and securely seal
roofing membrane in place with clamping ring.
Apply epichlorohydrin sheet over roofing membrane at locations indicated.
Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Adhere walkway
products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system
manufacturer's written instructions.
MODIFICATIONS OF EXISTING ROOF
A.
Follow the recommendations in this section for work execution based on the type of existing
roofing.
B.
Protect existing roofing and adjacent systems from damage caused during construction.
C.
Provide protection from weather conditions to the facilities and equipment located below the roof
being modified. Put protection in place prior to starting roofing modifications and maintain
protection until roofing modifications are completed and roofing is weathertight.
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Independent Testing Agency: Cooperate with the Independent Testing Agency engaged by
ATC for field quality control activities required in Section 014320, “Quality Control, Testing and
Special Inspection Services.” Provide at least 48 hours notice to testing agency prior to the time
testing and/or inspection is required. Allow inspectors access to work areas, as needed to
perform inspections.
B.
Tests and Inspections: Engage Independent Testing Agency in accordance with Section 014320
“Quality Control, Testing and Special Inspection Services.” for testing of listed properties.
ROOFING
070150- 11
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
3.5
PROTECTING AND CLEANING
A.
Protect roofing system from damage and wear during the construction period. When remaining
construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage,
describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to the ATC Construction
Manager
B.
Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair
substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration
at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.
C.
Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures
recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
END OF SECTION
ROOFING
070150- 12
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
SECTION 072100
THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
1.2
Attention is directed to all Sections within DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which
are hereby made a part of this Section of the Specifications.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Insulation under slabs-on-grade.
Perimeter foundation wall insulation.
Cavity wall insulation.
Glass-fiber blanket insulation.
Spray polyurethane foam insulation.
Vapor retarders.
Air barriers.
Section 061000 – ROUGH CARPENTRY for sheathing substrate.
Section 070150 - ROOFING for roofing insulation on EPDM roofs.
Division 22 - PLUMBING for plumbing insulation.
Division 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING for mechanical
insulation.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Air Barrier Assembly: The collection of air barrier materials and auxiliary materials applied to an
opaque wall or soffit, including joints and junctions to abutting construction, to control air
movement through the wall.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
All work shall comply with the locally adopted version of ASHRAE 90.1 and IECC Section 502.
B.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to
ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of
applicable testing agency.
C.
Fire Test Performance: Passes NFPA 285, Standard Fire Test Method for Evaluation of Fire
Propagation Characteristics of Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Wall Assemblies Containing
Combustible Components.
D.
Air Barrier: Air barrier shall be capable of performing as a continuous vapor-retarding air barrier
and as a liquid-water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the exterior incidental condensation
or water penetration. Air barrier assemblies shall be capable of accommodating substrate
movement and of sealing substrate expansion and control joints, construction material changes,
penetrations, and transitions at perimeter conditions without deterioration and air leakage
exceeding specified limits. Air Barrier Assembly air leakage shall not exceed 0.03 cfm/sq. ft. of
surface area at 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. per ASTM E 2357.
THERMAL INSULATION
072100 - 1
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B.
Spray Foam Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who has been trained by and is
acceptable to spray polyurethane foam insulation manufacturer to install manufacturer's
products.
C.
Air Barrier Applicator Qualifications: A firm experienced in applying air barrier materials similar
in material, design, and extent to those indicated, whose work has resulted in applications with a
record of successful in-service performance.
D.
Energy Performance: completed building shall meet or exceed the requirements of the locally
accepted ASHRAE 90.1 energy code.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling,
and other sources. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged packages in a clean, dry,
protected location and within temperature range required by air barrier manufacturer. Comply
with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
B.
Remove and replace materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life.
C.
Protect insulation materials as follows:
1.
2.
3.
1.7
Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and
concealment.
Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver materials to Project site before
installation time.
Complete installation and concealment of materials as rapidly as possible in each area of
construction.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Install insulation within the range of ambient and substrate
temperatures recommended by manufacturer.
Protect substrates from environmental
conditions that affect performance of insulation. Do not apply air barrier to a damp or wet
substrate or during snow, rain, fog, or mist.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FOUNDATION WALL AND UNDER SLAB INSULATION
A.
All work under this section shall be in general conformance with ASCE/SEI 32-01, Design and
Construction of Frost Protected Shallow Foundations.
B.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
C.
DiversiFoam Products.
Dow Chemical Company.
Owens Corning.
Board Insulation: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation complying with ASTM C 578, square
edged of type, density, and compressive strength indicated below:
THERMAL INSULATION
072100 - 2
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
1.
2.
3.
D.
2.2
For vertical applications, Type IV, 1.6-lb/cu. ft. minimum density and 25-psi minimum
compressive strength.
For horizontal applications, pedestrian traffic, Type VII, 2.2-lb/cu. ft. minimum density and
60-psi minimum compressive strength.
For horizontal applications, vehicular traffic, Type V, 3-lb/cu. ft. minimum density and 100psi minimum compressive strength.
Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation
securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates.
CAVITY WALL INSULATION
A.
Available Products:
Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
Atlas Roofing Corp.
Dow Chemical Company.
Rmax Inc.
B.
Foil-Faced, Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type I, Class 1 or 2, with
maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 450, respectively, per
ASTM E 84; 25-psi minimum compressive strength.
C.
Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation
securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates.
D.
Joint Tape: Provide manufacturer’s recommended foil tape.
2.3
CAVITY WALL INSULATION (NOT FOR USE BEHIND METAL WALL PANEL)
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
DiversiFoam Products.
Dow Chemical Company.
Owens Corning.
B.
Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type X, with maximum flame-spread and
smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, and ASTM D 1621 compressive strength
of 15 pounds per square inch minimum.
C.
Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation
securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates.
2.4
GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
CertainTeed Corporation.
Guardian Building Products, Inc.
Johns Manville.
Knauf Insulation.
Owens Corning.
Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread and
smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for
combustion characteristics.
THERMAL INSULATION
072100 - 3
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
2.5
SPRAY POLYURETHANE FOAM INSULATION
A.
Available Products:
Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Closed-Cell Polyurethane Foam Insulation: ASTM C 1029, Type II, with maximum flame-spread
and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.
1.
2.6
BASF Corporation; WALLTITE.
CertainTeed Corporation; CertaSpray.
Corbond Corporation, a division of Johns Manville; Corbond III.
Dow Chemical Company; STYROFOAM Spray Polyurethane Foam (CM Series).
Henry Company; PERMAX.
NCFI, a Division of Barnhardt Mfg. Co.; InsulStar.
Minimum density of 1.5 lb/cu. ft., thermal resistivity of 6.2 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75
deg F.
SPRAY APPLIED CELLULOSE INSULATION
A.
Available Products:
Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Open-Cell Polyurethane Foam Insulation: With maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed
indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.
1.
2.7
Demilec (USA) LLC; Sealection 500
CertainTeed Corporation; CertaSpray Open Cell Foam.
Henry Company; PERMAX 0.5 lb. Open Cell.
Icynene Inc.; Icynene LD-C-50.
Minimum density of 0.4 lb/cu. ft., thermal resistivity of 3.4 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75
deg F.
SPRAYED-FOAM INSULATION AT GAPS
A.
Available Products:
Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Canam Building Envelope Specialists; Zerodraft Z1-24 Foam Sealant.
Dow Chemical; GreatStuff Pro.
Foam-Tech Div. of H.C. Fennell; SuperGreen Foam.
Todol Products; Pur Fill 1G.
B.
Zero VOC Product: Pro-Foam II by OSI, Henkel Corporation.
C.
Sprayed-Foam Insulation:
Water-cure closed cell polyurethane containing no ureaformaldehyde and no CFCs. Minimum density of 0.4 lb/cu. ft., thermal resistivity of 3.4 deg F
x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F.
2.8
THERMAL AND IGNITION BARRIERS
A.
Thermal Barrier for Foam Plastic Insulation at Occupied Spaces: Provide thermal barrier
recommended by foam plastic manufacturer and tested with the specific product. Product shall
have an active building code evaluation report that lists report number and effective dates of
product acceptance.
B.
Ignition Barrier for Foam Plastic Insulation at Attic and Crawl Spaces: Provide ignition barrier
recommended by foam plastic manufacturer and tested with the specific product. Product shall
have an active building code evaluation report that lists report number and effective dates of
product acceptance.
THERMAL INSULATION
072100 - 4
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
2.9
VAPOR RETARDERS
A.
Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils thick, with maximum permeance rating of
0.13 perm.
B.
Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder
manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.
2.10
A.
FIRE-RATED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.
W. R. Grace & Co.
Henry Company.
Sheet-Applied, Vapor-Retarding Aluminum-Faced Sheet:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Thickness: 40 mils minimum.
Vapor Permeance: Not more than 1 perm, ASTM E 96, Water Method.
Air Permeance: Not to exceed 0.004 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57-lbf/sq. ft. pressure
difference; ASTM E 2178.
Fastener Sealability: No water leaking through fastener penetration after 24 hours;
ASTM D 1970.
Basis-of-Design:
a.
b.
c.
2.11
A.
705 FR – Self Adhering Sheet membrane by Carlisle.
Perm-A-Barrier Aluminum Wall Membranes by Grace.
Metal Clad membrane by Henry.
SELF-ADHERING SHEET AIR BARRIER
Sheet-Applied, Vapor-Retarding Modified Bituminous Sheet: 40-mil-thick, self-adhering sheet
consisting of 36 mils of rubberized asphalt laminated to a 4-mil-thick, cross-laminated
polyethylene film with release liner on adhesive side and formulated for application with primer
that complies with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; CCW-705.
Grace, W. R. & Co.; Perm-A-Barrier.
Henry Company; Blueskin SA.
Meadows, W. R., Inc.; SealTight Air-Shield.
Rubber Polymer Corporation; Rub-R-Wall SA.
Tremco, Inc.; ExoAir 110.
Or approved equal.
Physical and Performance Properties:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Membrane Air Permeance: Not to exceed 0.004 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57lbf/sq. ft. pressure difference; ASTM E 2178.
Tensile Strength: 250 psi minimum; ASTM D 412, Die C, modified.
Ultimate Elongation: 200 percent minimum; ASTM D 412, Die C, modified.
Low-Temperature Flexibility: Pass at minus 20 deg F, ASTM D 1970.
Crack Cycling: Unaffected after 100 cycles of 1/8-inch movement; ASTM C 836.
Puncture Resistance: 40 lbf minimum; ASTM E 154.
Water Absorption: 0.15 percent weight-gain maximum after 48-hour immersion at
70 deg F; ASTM D 570.
Vapor Permeance: 0.05 perms, ASTM E 96, Water Method.
THERMAL INSULATION
072100 - 5
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
B.
Sheet-Applied, Vapor-Permeable Sheet: 40-mil-thick.
1.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
2.12
Blueskin VP 160 by Henry Company.
Perm-A-Barrier VPS by Grace Construction Products.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS FOR AIR BARRIERS
A.
General: Auxiliary materials recommended by air barrier manufacturer for intended use and
compatible with air barrier.
B.
Primer: Liquid waterborne or solvent-borne primer recommended for substrate by manufacturer
of air barrier material.
C.
Counterflashing Strip: Modified bituminous 40-mil-thick, self-adhering sheet consisting of 32
mils of rubberized asphalt laminated to an 8-mil-thick, cross-laminated polyethylene film with
release liner backing.
D.
Butyl Strip at Termination with EPDM Roofing Membrane: Vapor-retarding, 30- to 40-mil-thick,
self adhering; polyethylene-film-reinforced top surface laminated to layer of butyl adhesive, with
release liner backing.
E.
Modified Bituminous Strip To Cover Cracks and Joints and Terminate Air Barrier to Compatible
Roofing Membrane: Vapor-retarding, 40-mil-thick, smooth-surfaced, self-adhering; consisting of
36 mils of rubberized asphalt laminated to a 4-mil- polyethylene film with release liner backing.
F.
Termination Mastic: Cold fluid-applied elastomeric liquid; trowel grade.
G.
Substrate Patching Membrane: Manufacturer's standard trowel-grade substrate filler.
H.
Adhesive and Tape:
adhesive tape.
I.
Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, 0.0187 inch thick, and Series 300
stainless-steel fasteners.
J.
Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, single-component, neutral-curing silicone; Class 100/50 (lowmodulus), Grade NS, Use NT related to exposure, and, as applicable to joint substrates
indicated, Use O. Comply with Section 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS.
Air barrier manufacturer's standard adhesive and pressure-sensitive
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Verify that substrates are sound and
free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar, or other contaminants.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removing
projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment.
THERMAL INSULATION
072100 - 6
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
3.3
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application
indicated.
B.
Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any
time to ice, rain, and snow.
C.
Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly
around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with
placement.
D.
Spray Polyurethane Foam: Comply with recommendations of the American Chemistry Council,
“Health and Safety Product Stewardship Workbook for High-Pressure Application of Spray
Polyurethane Foam (SPF).”
1.
2.
3.
4.
E.
3.4
Spray Polyurethane Foam: Spray insulation no greater than 1-1/2 inch thickness per
layer. Allow each layer to fully cure before spraying additional thickness.
Contain and fully ventilate the area being sprayed with negative air machines, venting
directly to the exterior. Do not operate permanent building HVAC system during
installation. Continue ventilation during curing process.
Install spray polyurethane foam insulation with uniform full thickness and with density
which will not displace adjacent materials.
Do not apply insulation until installation of pipes, ducts, conduits, wiring, and electrical
outlets in walls is completed and windows, electrical boxes, and other items not indicated
to receive insulation are masked. After insulation is applied, make flush with face of
studs by using method recommended by insulation manufacturer.
Miscellaneous Voids: Install spray polyurethane foam insulation in miscellaneous voids and
cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation.
INSTALLATION OF BELOW-GRADE INSULATION
A.
On vertical surfaces, set rigid insulation units in adhesive applied according to manufacturer's
written instructions. Use adhesive recommended by insulation manufacturer. If not otherwise
indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 48 inches below exterior grade line. Refer to
engineering plans and local codes for frost depth. Exceed frost depth by 8 inches.
B.
On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay rigid insulation units according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units.
3.5
INSTALLATION OF CAVITY-WALL INSULATION
A.
3.6
On units of foam-plastic board insulation, install pads of adhesive spaced approximately 24
inches o.c. both ways on inside face, and as recommended by manufacturer. Fit courses of
insulation between wall ties (if applicable) and other obstructions, with edges butted tightly in
both directions. Press units firmly against inside substrates indicated. Fill gaps with compatible
insulating material.
INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION
A.
Glass-Fiber Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following
requirements:
1.
2.
3.
Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If
more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a
snug fit between ends.
Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between
edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or
protected from contact with insulation.
THERMAL INSULATION
072100 - 7
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
B.
3.7
Spray-Applied Insulation: Apply spray-applied insulation according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Do not apply insulation until installation of pipes, ducts, conduits, wiring, and
electrical outlets in walls is completed and windows, electrical boxes, and other items not
indicated to receive insulation are masked. After insulation is applied, make flush with face of
studs by using method recommended by insulation manufacturer.
INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS
A.
Place vapor retarders on side of construction indicated on Drawings. Extend vapor retarders to
extremities of areas to protect from vapor transmission. Secure vapor retarders in place with
adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits,
electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create
an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarders.
B.
Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work.
Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarders.
3.8
INSTALLATION OF AIR BARRIER
A.
Install modified bituminous sheets according to air barrier manufacturer's written instructions
and according to recommendations in ASTM D 6135.
When ambient and substrate
temperatures range between 25 and 40 deg F, install self-adhering, modified bituminous air
barrier sheets produced for low-temperature application. Do not use low-temperature sheets if
ambient or substrate temperature is higher than 60 deg F
B.
Corners: Prepare, prime, and treat inside and outside corners according to ASTM D 6135.
Install modified bituminous strips centered over vertical inside corners. Install 3/4-inch fillets of
termination mastic on horizontal inside corners.
C.
Prepare, treat, and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations with
termination mastic and according to ASTM D 6135.
D.
Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be
covered by air barrier sheet in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours.
E.
Apply and firmly adhere modified bituminous sheets horizontally or vertically over area to
receive air barrier sheets. Accurately align sheets and maintain a uniform 2-1/2-inch-minimum
lap widths and end laps. Overlap and seal seams and stagger end laps to ensure airtight
installation.
1.
2.
3.
Apply sheets in a shingled manner to shed water without interception by any exposed
sheet edges.
Roll sheets firmly to enhance adhesion to substrate.
Apply termination mastic on any horizontal, field-cut or non-factory edges.
F.
Apply continuous modified bituminous sheets over modified bituminous strips bridging substrate
cracks, construction, and contraction joints.
G.
Seal top of non-metallic through-wall flashings to air barrier sheet with an additional 6-inch- wide
strip.
H.
Seal exposed edges of metallic sheets at seams, cuts, penetrations, and terminations not
concealed by metal counterflashings or ending in reglets with termination mastic.
I.
Install air barrier sheets and auxiliary materials to form a seal with adjacent construction and to
maintain a continuous air barrier.
1.
2.
Coordinate the installation of air barrier with installation of roofing membrane and base
flashing to ensure continuity of air barrier with roofing membrane.
Install compatible strip on roofing membrane or base flashing so that a minimum of 3
inches of coverage is achieved over both substrates.
THERMAL INSULATION
072100 - 8
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
J.
Connect and seal exterior wall air barrier membrane continuously to roofing membrane air
barrier, concrete below-grade structures, floor-to floor construction, exterior louvers, exterior
door framing and other construction used in exterior wall openings using accessory materials.
K.
Wall Openings: Prime concealed perimeter frame surfaces of doors. Apply membrane
specified below so that a minimum of 3 inches of coverage is achieved over both substrates.
Maintain 3 inches of full contact over firm bearing to perimeter frames with not less than 1 inch
of full contact.
1.
2.
3.
Modified Bituminous Transition Strip: Roll firmly to enhance adhesion.
Elastomeric Flashing Sheet: Apply adhesive to wall, frame, and flashing sheet. Install
flashing sheet and termination bars, fastened at 6 inches o.c. Apply lap sealant over
exposed edges and on cavity side of flashing sheet.
Preformed Silicone-Sealant Extrusion: Set in full bed of silicone sealant applied to walls,
frame, and membrane.
L.
Fill gaps in perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, doors, and
miscellaneous penetrations of air barrier membrane with foam sealant.
M.
At end or each working day, seal top edge of membrane to substrate with termination mastic.
N.
Apply joint sealants forming part of air barrier assembly within manufacturer's recommended
application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within
these temperature ranges.
O.
Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams in air barrier. Slit and flatten fishmouths
and blisters. Patch with air barrier sheet extending 6 inches beyond repaired areas in all
directions.
P.
Correct deficiencies in or remove air barrier that does not comply with requirements; repair
substrates and reapply air barrier components.
3.9
PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A.
Protect installed materials from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and
other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where material is subject to abuse
and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after
installation.
B.
Protect material from exposure to UV light and harmful weather exposure as required by
manufacturer. Remove and replace material exposed to these conditions for more than 30
days.
C.
Clean spills, stains, and soiling from adjacent construction that would be exposed in the
completed work using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of
affected construction.
END OF SECTION
THERMAL INSULATION
072100 - 9
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
SECTION 076200
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
1.2
Attention is directed to d all Sections within DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which
are hereby made a part of this Section of the Specifications.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1.
Sheet metal flashing and trim for the following applications:
a.
b.
c.
B.
Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Through-wall flashing.
Formed wall flashing and trim.
Formed low-slope roof flashing and trim.
Section 042000 - UNIT MASONRY for through-wall flashings in masonry.
Section 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking.
Section 070150 - ROOFING for installing sheet metal flashing and trim integral with
roofing membrane.
Section 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION for perimeter terminations at air barrier
assembly.
Section 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS for field-applied sheet metal flashing and trim
sealants.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement,
thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and
fastener disengagement.
B.
Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are
indicated.
C.
For Asphalt Shingles: Install metal flashings according to recommendations in ARMA's
"Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual" and asphalt shingle recommendations in NRCA's "The
NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual."
D.
Fabricate and install roof edge flashing and copings capable of resisting Wind Zone forces
required by Code according to recommendations in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49.
E.
Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allow for thermal movements
resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by
preventing buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components, failure of
joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Provide clips that resist
rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of sheet metal and trim thermal movements. Base
engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
076200 - 1
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
nighttime-sky heat loss.
material surfaces.
F.
1.4
Temperature Change (Range):
120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F
Water Infiltration: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that do not allow water infiltration to
building interior.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications undamaged. Protect sheet metal
flashing and trim materials and fabrications during transportation and handling.
B.
Unload, store, and install sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications in a manner to prevent
bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.
C.
Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated
covering. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials
that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.
1.5
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate installation of sheet metal flashing and trim with interfacing and adjoining
construction to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SHEET METALS
A.
Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3004, 3105, or 5005. Thickness as specified in this
Section. Temper suitable for forming and structural performance required, but not less than
H14, finished as follows:
1.
High-Performance Organic Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with
inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid-chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion
coating; Organic Coating: as specified below). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to
exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written
instructions.
a.
Fluoropolymer 3-Coat System: Manufacturer's standard 3-coat, thermocured
system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer, fluoropolymer color
coat, and clear fluoropolymer topcoat, with both color coat and clear topcoat
containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight, with a
minimum total dry film thickness of 1.5 mil; complying with AAMA 2605. Color: As
selected by ATC Construction Manager from manufacturer's full range
B.
Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, with No. 2D dull, cold rolled finish.
Thickness as specified in this Section.
C.
Copper Sheet: ASTM B 370, cold-rolled copper sheet, H00 or H01 temper.
Exposed Finish: Mill
2.2
Non-patinated
UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A.
Felts: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated.
B.
Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized paper, minimum 3 lb/100 sq. ft.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
076200 - 2
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
2.3
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings,
separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal
flashing and trim installation.
B.
Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and
bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads.
1.
2.
3.
Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal by means of plastic caps or
factory-applied coating.
Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with
hex washer head.
Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets.
C.
Solder for Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with acid flux of type recommended by
stainless-steel sheet manufacturer.
D.
Solder for Copper: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead.
E.
Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealing tape
with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape.
F.
Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant; of type, grade,
class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain
watertight.
G.
Epoxy Seam Sealer:
Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound,
recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints.
H.
Isolation Coating: ASTM D 1187, cold-applied asphalt emulsion, VOC compliant, compounded
for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of
asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.
I.
Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.
2.4
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and
other characteristics of item indicated. Shop fabricate items where practicable. Obtain field
measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.
B.
Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with
performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal.
C.
Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks
and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
1.
2.
Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams
and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.
Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flatlock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.
D.
Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric
sealant to comply with SMACNA recommendations.
E.
Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in the Work cannot
be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled
with elastomeric sealant concealed within joints.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
076200 - 3
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
F.
Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible on exposed-to-view sheet metal
flashing and trim, unless otherwise indicated.
G.
Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or
from compatible, noncorrosive metal.
Thickness:
As recommended by SMACNA's
"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for application but not less than thickness of metal being
secured.
2.5
LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A.
Roof Edge Flashing (Gravel Stop) and Fascia Caps: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch-long, but
not exceeding 10-foot- long, sections. Furnish with 6-inch-wide joint cover plates.
1.
2.
Joint Style: Butt, with 12-inch-wide concealed backup plate.
Fabricate from the following material:
a.
b.
c.
B.
Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch-long, but not exceeding 10-foot-long, sections.
Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous cleats to support
edge of external leg and drill elongated holes for fasteners on interior leg. Miter corners, seal,
and solder or weld watertight. Joint Style: Butt, with 12-inch-wide concealed backup plate.
Fabricate copings from the following material:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Copper: 16 oz./sq. ft. thick.
Stainless Steel: 0.019 inch thick.
Roof-Drain Flashing: Fabricate from the following material:
1.
2.
H.
Copper: 16 oz./sq. ft. thick.
Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick.
Stainless Steel: 0.019 inch thick.
Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following material:
1.
2.
G.
Copper: 20 oz./sq. ft. (0.68 mm thick)
Aluminum: 0.040 inch (1.02 mm) thick.
Stainless Steel: 0.019 inch (0.48 mm) thick.
Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following material:
1.
2.
3.
F.
Copper: 16 oz./sq. ft. thick.
Aluminum: 0.050 inch thick.
Stainless Steel: 0.025 inch thick.
Base Flashing: Fabricate from the following material:
1.
2.
3.
E.
Copper: 24 oz./sq. ft. thick.
Aluminum: 0.050 inch thick.
Stainless Steel: 0.025 inch thick.
Roof and Roof to Wall Transition Expansion-Joint Cover: Fabricate from the following material:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Copper: 20 oz./sq. ft. thick.
Aluminum: 0.050 inch thick.
Stainless Steel: 0.019 inch thick.
Copper: 12 oz./sq. ft. thick.
Stainless Steel: 0.016 inch thick.
Splash Pans: Fabricate from the following material:
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
076200 - 4
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
1.
2.6
Stainless Steel: 0.0187 inch thick.
WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A.
Through-Wall Flashing, Typical: Fabricate continuous flashings in minimum 96-inch-long, but
not exceeding 12 foot long, sections, under copings, at shelf angles, and where indicated.
Fabricate discontinuous lintel, sill, and similar flashings to extend 6 inches beyond each side of
wall openings. Form with 2-inch-high end dams. Fabricate from the following material:
1.
2.
Copper: 16 oz./sq. ft. thick.
Stainless Steel: 0.016 inch thick.
B.
Through-Wall Flashing, In Masonry: As specified in Section 042000 – UNIT MASONRY.
C.
Wall Expansion-Joint Cover: Fabricate from the following material:
1.
2.
3.
2.7
Copper: 16 oz./sq. ft. thick.
Aluminum: 0.040 inch thick.
Stainless Steel: 0.019 inch thick.
FINISHES
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations,
dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1.
2.
3.2
Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely
anchored.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in
place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding
rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to
complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is
not permitted.
B.
Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other
permanent separation as recommended by fabricator or manufacturers of dissimilar metals.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Coat side of stainless-steel sheet metal flashing and trim with isolation coating where
flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.
Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood
substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip-sheet or install a
course of polyethylene underlayment.
Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required for waterproof
performance.
Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool
marks. Form flashing to profiles indicated on Drawings, and to protect roofing materials from
physical damage and shed water. Form sections square and accurate to profile, in maximum
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
076200 - 5
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
possible lengths, free from distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or
performance.Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide
uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and elastomeric sealant.
D.
Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance.
Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. Space
cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend tabs over
fasteners.
E.
Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space
movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or
intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions cannot be used or would not
be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1
inch deep, filled with elastomeric sealant concealed within joints.
F.
Fasteners: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than 1-1/4 inches for
nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws.
1.
2.
G.
3.3
Aluminum: Use aluminum or stainless steel fasteners.
Stainless Steel: Use stainless-steel fasteners.
Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required for watertight construction. Where sealant-filled
joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch into sealant. Form
joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is
moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F set joint members for 50 percent movement either way.
Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install
sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply
with requirements in Section 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS.
ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install sheet metal roof flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements ,
sheet metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet
Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as
indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight.
B.
Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top
edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending a minimum of 4 inches over base flashing. Install
stainless steel draw band and tighten.
C.
Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing.
Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend
counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches
and bed with elastomeric sealant. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of snap-in
installation and sealant.
D.
Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation
of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Install flashing by sealing with elastomeric sealant
and clamp flashing to pipes penetrating roof, except for flashing on vent piping.
3.4
WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture
according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of wall
flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers.
B.
Through-Wall Flashing In Masonry: As specified in Section 042000 - UNIT MASONRY.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
076200 - 6
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
3.5
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and
weathering.
B.
Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.
C.
Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim
are installed. On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces, including removing unused
fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain in a clean condition
during construction.
D.
Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated
beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
076200 - 7
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
SECTION 079200
JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
1.2
Attention is directed to all Sections within DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which
are hereby made a part of this Section of the Specifications.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1.
B.
Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1.
2.
1.3
Joint sealants and fillers.
Section 042000 - UNIT MASONRY for masonry control and expansion joint fillers and
gaskets.
Section 092110 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES for sealing perimeter joints of gypsum
board partitions to reduce sound transmission.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous
joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
B.
Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and waterresistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized Installer who is approved or licensed for
installation of elastomeric sealants required for this Project.
B.
Source Limitations:
manufacturer.
1.5
Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.6
When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by jointsealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F
When joint substrates are wet.
Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for
applications indicated.
If any condition exists capable of interfering with adhesion of joint substrates.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or
replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements
specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 1
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
1.
B.
Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which elastomeric sealant
manufacturer agrees to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not
comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified
warranty period.
1.
C.
Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint
sealants from the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant
manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by
structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction.
Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications.
Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.
Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric
contaminants.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible
with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
B.
VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide interior sealants and sealant primers that comply
with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D
(EPA Method 24):
1.
2.
3.
C.
2.2
Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.
Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: Provide colors from manufacturer’s full range of standard
colors; maximum of five colors.
JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each
liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920
classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.
B.
Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Elastomeric sealants shall be nonstaining to porous
substrates. Provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have
not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.
C.
Single-Component Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant:
1.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Dow Corning Corporation; 790.
GE Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700.
Tremco Inc.; Spectrem 1.
Pecora Corporation; 864.
Bondaflex Technologies; Sil 290
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 2
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
2.
D.
Extent of Use: Joints in exterior vertical and soffit surfaces.
Multicomponent Pourable Urethane Sealant:
1.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
E.
Extent of Use: Joints in exterior horizontal surfaces.
Single-Component Mildew-Resistant Acid-Curing Silicone Sealant:
1.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
F.
Dow Corning Corporation; 786 Mildew Resistant.
GE Silicones; Sanitary SCS1700.
Tremco Inc.; Tremsil 200.
Bondaflex Technologies; Sil 100 WF
Extent of Use: Sanitary joints at toilet rooms.
Latex Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 834, Type P, Grade NF.
1.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
2.3
Bostik Findley; Chem-Calk 550.
Meadows, W. R., Inc.; POURTHANE.
Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR-200.
Tremco Inc.; THC-901.
Bondaflex Technologies; PUR 2 SL
Bostik Findley; Chem-Calk 600.
Pecora Corporation; AC-20+.
Sonneborn, BASF Building Systems; Sonolac.
Tremco Inc.; Tremflex 834.
May National Bondaflex Sil-A 700
Extent of Use: Non-moving joints at interior locations.
JOINT-SEALANT BACKING
A.
General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible
with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications
indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B.
Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying
with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at
temperatures down to minus 26 deg F. Provide products with low compression set and of size
and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and to otherwise contribute to
optimum sealant performance.
C.
Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant
manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint
surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide selfadhesive tape where applicable.
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 3
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
2.4
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of
sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate
tests and field tests.
B.
Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants
and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or
harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to
promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.
C.
Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces
adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting jointsealant performance.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint
sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and
approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint
sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.
Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical
abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate
capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles
remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free
compressed air. Porous joint substrates include concrete, masonry and unglazed
surfaces of ceramic tile.
Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm
substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.
Nonporous joint substrates include the following metal, glass, porcelain enamel and
glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
B.
Joint Priming:
Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing by joint-sealant
manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply
primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas
of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C.
Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining
surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by
cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling
without disturbing joint seal.
3.3
INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A.
General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products
and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 4
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
B.
Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint
sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C.
Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position
required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint
widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1.
2.
3.
Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application
and replace them with dry materials.
D.
Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between
sealants and backs of joints.
E.
Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:
1.
2.
3.
F.
Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing
begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads
of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of
sealant with sides of joint.
1.
2.
3.
3.4
Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not
discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise
indicated.
PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A.
Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances
and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without
deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage
or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately
so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.
B.
Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by
methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and
of products in which joints occur.
END OF SECTION
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 5
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
SECTION 081110
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
1.2
Attention is directed to all Sections within DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which
are hereby made a part of this Section of the Specifications.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Standard hollow-metal steel doors.
Standard hollow-metal steel frames.
Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings.
Section 042000 - UNIT MASONRY for anchoring and grouting steel frames in masonry
construction.
Section 061000 – ROUGH CARPENTRY for rough opening
Section 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS for miscellaneous steel supports.
Section 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE for door hardware, lock cylinders and keying.
Section 099000 - PAINTING AND COATING for field painting steel doors and frames.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Standard hollow metal steel doors shall met the requirements of ANSI A250.8-2003 (SDl 100)
B.
Fire-Rated Door, Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled
by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fireprotection ratings and temperature-rise limits indicated, based on testing at positive pressure
according to ASTM E152 and UL-10B and UBC 7-2 and UL 10C and NFPA 252 . Door and
framing shall have a minimum of 1 hour fire rating.
1.
C.
Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with NFPA 80 that are identical to
access door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per the following
test method and that are listed and labeled by UL or another testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: Door and framing shall have a minimum of 1 hour
fire rating.
1.
2.
D.
Smoke- and Draft-Control Assemblies: Provide an assembly with gaskets listed and
labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance
with NFPA 105.
NFPA 252 for vertical access doors and frames.
ASTM E 119 for horizontal access doors and frames.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100.
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
081110 - 1
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Trained and approved by manufacturer.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain steel doors and frames through one source from a single
manufacturer for each type of door.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver doors and frames palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and
Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.
B.
Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded
to jambs and mullions.
C.
Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a
vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch-high wood blocking. Do
not store in a manner that traps excess humidity. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between
each stacked door to permit air circulation
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.7
Field Measurements:
fabrication.
Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate installation of anchorages for steel frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items
with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers for Hollow-Metal Doors and Frames: Subject to compliance with
requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,
but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Ceco Door Products; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company.
CURRIES Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company.
de LaFontaine
Mesker Door Inc.
Pioneer Industries, Inc.
Philipp Manufacturing Company.
Republic Builders Products Company.
Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company.
Available Manufacturers for Access Doors and Frames for Walls and Ceilings: Subject to
compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into
the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Acudor Products, Inc.
Babcock-Davis; A Cierra Products Co.
Dur-Red Products.
J. L. Industries, Inc.
Karp Associates, Inc.
Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
Milcor Inc.
Nystrom, Inc.
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
081110 - 2
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
2.2
MATERIALS
A.
Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for
exposed applications.
B.
Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale,
pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
C.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with
minimum G60 metallic coating.
D.
Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
1.
2.
ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products.
ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.
E.
Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 666, Type 316. Remove tool and
die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish. Finish: Directional Satin Finish, No. 4.
F.
Steel Finishes for Access Doors: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for
Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
1.
2.
Surface Preparation for Steel Sheet: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent
Cleaning," to remove dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond.
Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPCSP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling." Galvanizing
Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for re-galvanizing welds in steel, complying
with SSPC-Paint 20
Factory-Primed Finish: Apply shop primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.
G.
Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z coating designation; mill
phosphatized.
For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with
ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to
ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.
H.
Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.
I.
Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application
indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for
attaching hollow metal frames of type indicated.
J.
Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to
ASTM C 143/C 143M.
K.
Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting
of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6- to 12-lb/cu. ft. density; with maximum
flame-spread and smoke-development indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136
for combustion characteristics.
L.
Drywall Beads: Edge trim formed from 0.0299-inch zinc-coated steel sheet formed to receive
joint compound and in size to suit thickness of gypsum board.
M.
Isolation Coating: ASTM D 1187, cold-applied asphalt emulsion, VOC compliant, compounded
for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of
asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.
2.3
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
A.
Hollow metal Doors
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
081110 - 3
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
1.
General: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated
with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces, unless otherwise
indicated. Typical is 4 feet by 7 feet Comply with ANSI A250.8.
a.
b.
Design: Flush panel.
Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene,
polyurethane, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core that produces doors
complying with ANSI A250.8.
1)
2)
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch-thick end
closures or channels of same material as face sheets.
Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel
Doors and Frames."
Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. Provide doors
complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI A250.8 for level and
model and ANSI A250.4 for physical-endurance level: Level 3 and Physical Performance
Level A (Extra Heavy Duty 16 gauge Galvannealed steel), Model 2 (Seamless), 1-3/4
inches thick.
Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet, unless otherwise
indicated to comply with exterior door requirements. Provide doors complying with
requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI A250.8 for level and model and
ANSI A250.4 for physical-endurance level: Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B
(Heavy Duty 18 gauge cold rolled steel), Model 2 (Seamless), 1-3/4 inches thick.
Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing
plates from same material as door face sheets.
Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled
steel sheet.
Hollow Metal Frames
1.
2.
General: Comply with ANSI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.
Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet.
a.
b.
3.
4.
Fabricate frames with full profile welded joints.
Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors: 0.067-inch-thick steel sheet.
Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet, unless otherwise indicated to
comply with exterior frame requirements.
a.
b.
C.
Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection and temperature-rise
ratings indicated.
Thermal-Rated (Insulated) Exterior Doors: Where indicated, provide doors
fabricated with thermal-resistance value (R-value) of not less than 4.0 deg F
x h x sq. ft./Btu when tested according to ASTM C 1363.
Fabricate frames with full profile welded joints.
Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch-thick steel sheet.
Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcement
plates from same material as frames.
Frame Anchors
1.
Jamb Anchors:
a.
Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame
size, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less
than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch
thick.
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
081110 - 4
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
b.
c.
d.
2.
Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch thick,
and as follows:
a.
b.
D.
Provide hollow metal panels of same materials, construction, and finish as specified for
adjoining hollow metal work.
Louvers
1.
Provide louvers for interior doors, where indicated, that comply with SDI 111C, with
blades or baffles formed of no less than 0.020-inch-thick, cold-rolled steel sheet set into
0.032-inch-thick steel frame. Louvers shall be factory installed.
a.
b.
F.
Sightproof Louver: Stationary louvers constructed with inverted V-shaped or Yshaped blades.
Fire-Rated Automatic Louvers: Louvers constructed with movable blades closed
by actuating fusible link, and listed and labeled for use in fire-rated door
assemblies of type and fire-resistance rating indicated by same testing and
inspecting agency that established fire-resistance rating of door assembly.
Accessories
1.
2.
G.
Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.
Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips,
allowing not less than 2-inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at
finish floor surface.
Hollow Metal Panels
1.
E.
Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than
0.042 inch thick.
Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors.
Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8inch- diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from
frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor
location.
Ceiling Struts: Minimum 1/4-inch-thick by 1-inch-wide steel.
Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch thick.
Fabrication
1.
2.
3.
Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately
form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal.
Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper
assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory
assembled before shipment.
Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117.
Hollow Metal Doors:
a.
b.
4.
Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit
moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.
Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where
required by NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend
minimum 3/4 inch beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted.
Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or
handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same
thickness metal as frames.
a.
Full Profile Welded Frames: Weld joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make
smooth, flush, and not visible.
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
081110 - 5
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
b.
c.
d.
e.
Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed
fasteners unless otherwise indicated.
Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be
grouted.
Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four
spot welds per anchor.
Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
1)
Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and
bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as
follows:
a)
b)
c)
f.
Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of
frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
g.
h.
5.
Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches wide and mounted
in metal-stud partitions.
Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each jamb.
Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top
and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c.
Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers.
Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.
Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or
hot-rolled steel sheet.
1.
Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised
hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the
Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Section 087100 DOOR HARDWARE.
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.4
Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.
Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.
Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high.
Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as
follows. Keep holes clear during construction.
a.
b.
H.
Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.
Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.
Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high.
Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.
Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surfacemounted door hardware.
Comply
with
applicable
requirements
in
ANSI/SDI A250.6
and
ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for
hardware.
Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with
Division 26 - ELECTRICAL.
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS
A.
Flush Access Doors and Trimless Frames: Fabricated from steel sheet at typical areas and
from stainless-steel sheet at wet areas.
1.
2.
3.
Locations: Wall and ceiling surfaces.
Door: Minimum 16 gauge sheet metal, set flush with surrounding finish surfaces.
Frame: Minimum 16 gauge sheet metal with drywall bead flange.
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
081110 - 6
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
4.
5.
6.
B.
Recessed Access Doors and Trimless Frames: Fabricated from steel sheet at typical areas and
from stainless-steel sheet at wet areas.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Locations: Wall and ceiling surfaces.
Door: Minimum 16 gauge sheet metal in the form of a pan recessed 5/8 inch for gypsum
board infill.
Frame: Minimum 16 gauge sheet metal with drywall bead for gypsum board surfaces.
Hinges: Concealed pivoting rod hinge.
Lock: Cylinder.
Lock Preparation: Prepare door panel to accept cylinder specified in Section 087100,
DOOR HARDWARE.
Fire Rated, Uninsulated, Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: Fabricated from
steel at typical areas and from stainless-steel sheet at wet areas.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
D.
Hinges: Continuous piano.
Lock: Cylinder.
Lock Preparation: Prepare door panel to accept cylinder specified in Section 087100,
DOOR HARDWARE.
Locations: Wall surfaces.
Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than that of adjacent construction.
Door: Minimum 16 gauge sheet metal, flush construction.
Frame: Minimum 16 gauge sheet metal with 1-inch-wide, surface-mounted trim.
Hinges: Continuous piano.
Automatic Closer: Spring type.
Lock: Self-latching device with cylinder lock.
Lock Preparation: Prepare door panel to accept cylinder specified in Section 087100,
DOOR HARDWARE
Fabrication
1.
2.
3.
General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units
ready for installation.
Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide
materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with
exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.
Access Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent
surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access
panels to types of supports indicated.
a.
b.
c.
d.
4.
5.
Recessed Access Doors: Form face of panel to provide recess for application of applied
finish. Reinforce panel as required to prevent buckling. For recessed doors with plaster
infill, provide self-furring expanded metal lath attached to door panel
Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane
when closed.
a.
b.
E.
For trimless frames with drywall bead, provide edge trim for gypsum board and
gypsum base securely attached to perimeter of frames.
For trimless frames with plaster bead for full-bed plaster applications, provide zinccoated expanded metal lath and exposed casing bead welded to perimeter of
frames.
Provide mounting holes in frames for attachment of units to metal or wood framing.
Provide mounting holes in frame for attachment of masonry anchors.
For cylinder lock, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike.
For recessed panel doors, provide access sleeves for each locking device.
Furnish plastic grommets and install in holes cut through finish.
Steel Finishes
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
081110 - 7
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
1.
Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard epoxy primer immediately after cleaning
and pretreating.
a.
b.
Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer
complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer
manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings
despite prolonged exposure.
Refer to Section 099000 – PAINTING AND COATING for field-applied coating.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame
installation.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding,
filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed
faces.
B.
Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness,
alignment, twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
3.3
Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees
from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to
plane of wall.
Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel
lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from
head to floor.
Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door
hardware.
HOLLOW METAL DOOR AND FRAME INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in
place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with
ANSI/SDI A250.11.
1.
Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent
anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving
surfaces smooth and undamaged.
a.
b.
c.
At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.
Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling
limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously;
grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
Install door silencers in frames before grouting.
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
081110 - 8
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
d.
e.
f.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and
secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. Floor anchors may be set with powderactuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated.
Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames.
Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between
frames and masonry with grout.
Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with grout. Take
precautions, including bracing frames, to ensure that frames are not deformed or
damaged by grout forces.
In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled
expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible
on exposed faces.
In-Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion
anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and fill and make
smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to overhead
structural supports or substrates above frame unless frame is anchored to masonry or to
other structural support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for
securing to supporting construction. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to
frame jamb members.
Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment,
twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:
a.
b.
c.
d.
C.
Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90
degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line
parallel to plane of wall.
Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on
parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.
Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified
below. Shim as necessary.
1.
Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
3.4
Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been
properly set and secured.
Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim
as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
Field apply isolation coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout.
Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch.
Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch .
Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch.
Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4
inch.
Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.
Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors according to NFPA 105.
Install weather stripping for all exterior doors.
ACCESS DOOR AND FRAME INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.
B.
Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels
aligned with adjacent finish surfaces.
C.
Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material.
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
081110 - 9
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
3.5
OVERHEAD COILING DOOR INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install coiling doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware,
jamb and head molding strips, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports. Install firerated doors to comply with NFPA 80.
B.
Adjusting: Lubricate bearings and sliding parts; adjust doors to operate easily, free of warp,
twist, or distortion and with weathertight fit around entire perimeter.
C.
Startup Services: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
1.
2.
D.
3.6
Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment. Test door closing when activated by detector or alarm-connected fire-release
system. Reset door-closing mechanism after successful test.
Demonstration: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner’s
maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain overhead coiling doors.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final
inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace
defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
B.
Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation.
C.
Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of
prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.
D.
Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
E.
Remove and replace doors and/or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.
END OF SECTION
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
081110 - 10
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
SECTION 089000
LOUVERS AND VENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
1.2
Attention is directed to all Sections within DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which
are hereby made a part of this Section of the Specifications.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1.
B.
Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1.
2.
1.3
Fixed louvers and frames.
Section 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS for sealants installed in perimeter joints between
louver frames and adjoining construction.
Division 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING for louvers that are a
part of mechanical equipment.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Louver Terminology: Definitions of terms for metal louvers contained in AMCA 501 apply to this
Section unless otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
B.
Drainable-Blade Louver: Louver with blades having gutters that collect water and drain it to
channels in jambs and mullions, which carry it to bottom of unit and away from opening.
1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Structural Performance: Provide louvers capable of withstanding code required loading sudh as
gravity, wind and seismic under conditions indicated without permanent deformation of louver
components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver blade rattle or flutter, or permanent
damage to fasteners and anchors. .
B.
Thermal Movements: Provide louvers that allow for thermal movements resulting from the
following maximum change (120 deg F ambient; 180 deg F material surfaces.) in ambient and
surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components,
failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain louvers and vents through one source from a single manufacturer
where indicated to be of same type, design, or factory-applied color finish.
B.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1.
C.
AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum."
SMACNA Standard: Comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual" for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures.
LOUVERS AND VENTS
089000 - 1
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Field Measurements: Verify louver openings by field measurements before fabrication.
B.
Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the
Work, establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating louvers without field
measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond
to established dimensions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
Louvers and Vents:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.2
Airolite Company, LLC.
Construction Specialties, Inc.
Greenheck.
Industrial Louvers, Inc.
McDermott Metal Works Corporation
Nystrom Building Products.
Ruskin Company.
MATERIALS
A.
Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T5 or T-52.
B.
Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming, or as
otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.
C.
Fasteners: Of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal or 300 Series stainless steel,
unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are incompatible with joined materials.
2.3
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
Assemble louvers in factory to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as
necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and
coordinated installation.
B.
Maintain equal louver blade spacing, including separation between blades and frames at head
and sill, to produce uniform appearance.
C.
Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances
made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter
sealant joints.
D.
Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly.
E.
Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacings indicated, but not more than recommended by
manufacturer, or 72 inches o.c., whichever is less.
1.
Fully Recessed Mullions: Provide mullions fully recessed behind louver blades. Where
length of louver exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, fabricate with close-fitting
blade splices designed to permit expansion and contraction.
LOUVERS AND VENTS
089000 - 2
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
F.
2.4
Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds concealed from
view, unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between
frame members necessary.
FIXED, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS
A.
Horizontal Storm-Resistant Louvers:
1.
2.
Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: As required to comply with structural performance
requirements, but not less than 0.080 inch.
Performance Requirements:
a.
b.
B.
2.5
Free Area: Comply with requirements indicated on the Drawings.
Wind-Driven Rain Performance: Not less than 99 percent effectiveness when
subjected to a rain fall rate of 3 inches per hour and a wind speed of 29 mph at a
core area intake velocity of 300 fpm.
Finish: Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating
and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
DAMPERS
A.
General: If required in the drawings, provide square/rectangular dampers matching the louvers
dimensions.
B.
Secure in accordance with manufacturer instructions.
C.
Controls: Provide and connect controls with specified machinery synched to open and close
based on unit operation, temperature or need indicated in the drawings.
2.6
EXHAUST FANS
A.
General: If required in the drawings, provide exhaust fans in accordance with AMCA 99 and
201-90. Match specification in the drawings for flow, pressure and dimensions.
B.
Secure in accordance with manufacturer instructions.
C.
Controls: Provide and connect controls with specified machinery synched to operate based on
unit operation, temperature or need indicated in the drawings.
2.7
LOUVER SCREENS
A.
General: Provide screen at each exterior louver.
1.
2.
Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face.
Screening Type: Bird screening..
B.
Secure screens to louver frames with stainless-steel machine screws, spaced a maximum of 6
inches from each corner and at 12 inches o.c.
C.
Louver Screen Frames: Fabricate with mitered corners to louver sizes indicated.
D.
Bird Screening: Aluminum, 1/2-inch-square mesh, 0.063-inch wire.
2.8
BLANK-OFF PANELS
A.
Insulated, Blank-off Panels: Laminated metal-faced panels consisting of insulating core
surfaced on back and front with metal sheets.
1.
Thickness: 1 inch.
LOUVERS AND VENTS
089000 - 3
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
2.
3.
4.
5.
Metal Facing Sheets: Aluminum sheet, not less than 0.032-inch nominal thickness.
Insulating Core: Rigid insulation board.
Seal perimeter joints between panel faces and louver frames with 1/8-by-l-inch PVC
compression gaskets.
Panel Finish: Same finish applied to louvers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Examine substrates and openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation
only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of
anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery
of such items to Project site.
INSTALLATION
A.
Locate and place louvers and vents level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.
B.
Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws
where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.
C.
Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured.
D.
Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as
indicated.
E.
Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding. Restore finishes so no
evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the
factory, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit or provide new units.
F.
Protect galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by applying
a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry,
or dissimilar metals.
G.
Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as louver installation progresses,
where weathertight louver joints are required. Comply with Section 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS
for sealants applied during louver installation.
3.4
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
Clean exposed surfaces of louvers and vents that are not protected by temporary covering, to
remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. clean exposed surfaces with water and
a mild soap or detergent not harmful to finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry.
A.
Restore louvers and vents damaged during installation and construction so no evidence
remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by ATC
Construction Manager, remove damaged units and replace with new units. Touch up minor
abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches color and gloss of, and is compatible
with, factory-applied finish coating.
END OF SECTION
LOUVERS AND VENTS
089000 - 4
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
SECTION 092110
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
1.2
Attention is directed to all Sections within DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which
are hereby made a part of this Section of the Specifications.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1.
2.
1.3
Interior gypsum wallboard.
Cavity Shaft Wall systems
Non-load-bearing steel framing.
Installation of access panels.
Marking and identification for fire- and smoke-partitions.
Section 054000 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING for load-bearing steel framing.
Section 081110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES for installation in gypsum board
assemblies.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Structural Performance: Provide fire stop tracks capable of withstanding deflection within limits
and under conditions indicated. Design framing system to maintain clearances at openings, to
allow for construction tolerances, and to accommodate live load deflection of primary building
structure.
B.
Marking and Identification for Fire- and Smoke-Partitions: Fire walls, fire barriers, fire partitions,
smoke barriers, smoke partitions and other walls required to have protected openings or
penetrations shall be effectively and permanently identified with signs or stenciling. Such
identification shall:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
1.4
Be located in accessible concealed floor, floor-ceiling or attic spaces; and
Be repeated at intervals not exceeding 30 feet measured horizontally along the wall or
partition; and
Include lettering not less than 0.5 inch in height, incorporating the suggested wording:
"FIRE AND/OR SMOKE BARRIER - PROTECT ALL OPENINGS," or other wording.
Exception: Walls in Group R-2 occupancies that do not have a removable decorative
ceiling allowing access to the concealed space.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and
construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an
independent testing agency.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Trained and approved by manufacturer.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
092110 - 1
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
1.6
Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from
weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels flat
to prevent sagging.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations:
Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board
manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
B.
Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.
C.
Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold
damaged.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
A.
Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
1.
2.
2.2
Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless
otherwise indicated.
Protective Coating: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant zinc coating, unless
otherwise indicated.
SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A.
Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch-diameter wire, or
double strand of 0.0475-inch-diameter wire.
B.
Hanger Attachments to Concrete:
1.
Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching
wire hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that
imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by an
independent testing agency. Type: Postinstalled, expansion anchor.
C.
Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch diameter.
D.
Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.0538
inch and minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges with depth as required for span and loading and
indicated on Drawings.
E.
Furring Channels (Furring Members): 0.0538-inch bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inchwide flanges, 3/4 inch deep.
F.
Grid Suspension System for Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main
beams and cross-furring members that interlock.
1.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems.
Chicago Metallic Corporation; Drywall Furring System.
USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
092110 - 2
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
2.3
STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A.
Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 20 guage.
B.
Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- deep flanges in
thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner
and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the top of studs to provide lateral
bracing.
Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch-deep
flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer
runner sized to friction fit inside runner.
Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes
applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in
thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.
a.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may
be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1)
2)
3)
C.
Dietrich Metal Framing; SLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track.
Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiClip Series.
Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT).
Fire Stop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with
movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly
indicated; in thickness compatible with studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.
1.
2.
3.
Grace Construction Products; FlameSafe FlowTrak System.
Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak attached to studs with Fire Trak Slip Clip.
Metal-Lite, Inc.; The System.
D.
Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width
indicated. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 20 gauge.
E.
Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538-inch bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide
flanges. Depth: 1-1/2 inches. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 14 gauge,
galvanized steel.
F.
Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 20 gauge
inch. Depth: 1-1/2 inches.
G.
Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches wall attachment
flange of 7/8 inch, minimum bare-metal thickness of 24 gauge, and depth required to fit
insulation thickness indicated.
H.
Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and
other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
I.
Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow
fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size.
2.4
INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
USG Corporation.
Georgia-Pacific (G-P) Gypsum LLC.
National Gypsum Company.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
092110 - 3
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
B.
Fire-Resistant Type X: ASTM C 1396. Thickness: 5/8 inch. Long Edges: Tapered. Install
additional boards and or thickness as indicated in the drawings to achieve the required fire
rating.
C.
Flexible Type: ASTM C 1396. Manufactured to bend to fit radii and to be more flexible than
standard regular-type gypsum board of same thickness. Thickness: 1/4 inch. Long Edges:
Tapered.
D.
Ceiling Type: Manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular-type gypsum board.
Thickness: 1/2 inch. Long Edges: Tapered. Install additional boards and or thickness as
indicated in the drawings to achieve the required fire rating.
E.
Abuse-Resistant Type: ASTM C 1629. Manufactured to produce greater resistance to surface
indentation and through-penetration (hi impact resistance) than standard, Type X gypsum
board. Core: 5/8 inch, Long Edges: Tapered.
F.
Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396. With moisture- and moldresistant core and paper surfaces. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated
according to ASTM D 327. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X. Long Edges: Tapered.
2.5
CAVITY SHAFT WALL SYSTEMS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
USG Corporation (CGC).
Georgia-Pacific (G-P) Gypsum LLC.
National Gypsum Company.
B.
Cavity shaft wall systems around horizontal and vertical membranes, conduits and ducts
outside of egress paths or through other rated areas to meet UL fire rating.
C.
Fire-Resistant Type X: ASTM C 1658 and ASTM C 1396. Install additional boards and or
thickness as indicated by the manufacturer for the wall system to achieve the required fire
rating.
D.
Abuse-Resistant Type: ASTM C 1629. Manufactured to produce greater resistance to surface
indentation and through-penetration (hi impact resistance) than standard, Type X gypsum
board.
E.
Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396. With moisture- and moldresistant core and paper surfaces. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated
according to ASTM D 327.
2.6
TRIM ACCESSORIES
A.
Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1.
2.
Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc.
Shapes:
a.
b.
B.
Cornerbead.
Expansion (control) joint.
Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated.
1.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a.
Fry Reglet Corp.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
092110 - 4
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
b.
c.
2.
3.
2.7
Gordon, Inc.
Pittcon Industries.
Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of
ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5.
Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials
specified.
JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A.
General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B.
Joint Tape: Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.
C.
Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is
compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.8
Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas,
use setting-type taping compound.
Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and
trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.
Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
manufacturer's written recommendations.
B.
Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum
panels to continuous substrate. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
C.
Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from
0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.
For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by
panel manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames
and framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
B.
Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of
overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building
structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and
that hangers will develop their full strength. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
092110 - 5
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and
construction.
B.
Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials:
1.
2.
3.3
Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling
runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. Where
offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure
not more than 24 inches o.c.
After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent necessary
for installation of non-load-bearing steel framing. Do not reduce thickness of fire-resistive
materials below that required for fire-resistance ratings indicated. Protect adjacent fireresistive materials from damage.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply
to framing installation.
B.
Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim,
grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.
C.
Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.
D.
Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing
members. Frame both sides of joints independently.
3.4
INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A.
Install suspension system components in sizes and spacings indicated on Drawings, but not
less than those required by referenced installation standards for assembly types and other
assembly components indicated.
B.
Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by
building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.
C.
Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
D.
Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. Splay hangers
only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing,
countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension
system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of
trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to
support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation
standards.
Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts,
eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate,
and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching
to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for
structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or
otherwise fail.
Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck.
Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts
that extend through forms.
Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.
Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
092110 - 6
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
E.
Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems with hangers used for support.
F.
Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems
meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other
and butt-cut to fit into wall track.
G.
Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet
measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between
parallel members that will receive finishes.
3.5
INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A.
Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior
walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
B.
Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.
C.
Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural
supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to
terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above
ceiling.
1.
2.
Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to
produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished
assemblies.
Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on doorframes; install
runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.
a.
b.
c.
3.
4.
5.
Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch
clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished
assembly.
Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of
overhead structure.
Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as
required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of
openings to match framing required above door heads.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated
assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to
underside of solid structure. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain
continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.
Curved Partitions:
a.
b.
Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs.
Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along
arcs. On straight lengths of not less than 2 studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6
inches o.c.
D.
Horizontal bracing: Install 1-1/2” 16 gauge U-Channel bridging at 3rd points. Support with 1-1/2”
x 1-1/2” x 3-1/2” 18 gauge clip angle.
E.
Direct Furring: Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry
attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.
F.
Z-Furring Members:
1.
2.
Erect insulation vertically and hold in place with Z-furring members spaced 24 inches o.c.
Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with
concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners
spaced 24 inches o.c.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
092110 - 7
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
3.
3.6
At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange
extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring
channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more
than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit.
APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A.
Comply with ASTM C 840.
B.
Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid
abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent
panels, not less than one framing member.
C.
Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with
not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.
D.
Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate
supports or gypsum board back blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered
edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not
make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.
E.
Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.
F.
Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings,
etc.), except in chases braced internally.
1.
2.
3.
G.
3.7
Unless concealed application is indicated or required for fire, air, or smoke ratings,
coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.
Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof
slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow
1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant.
Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural
abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations, and trim
edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach
panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud
flanges first.
APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A.
Single-Layer Application:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest
extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.
On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels to minimize end joints.
On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end
joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.
Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
Multilayer Application:
1.
2.
On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on
walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to
framing members and offset face-layer joints 1 framing member, 16 inches minimum,
from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistancerated assembly.
On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers
vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring
member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer
joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger
joints on opposite sides of partitions.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
092110 - 8
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
3.
4.
On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer
either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical
joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring
members.
Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with
screws.
C.
Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate
(other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum
board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels
until fastening adhesive has set.
D.
Curved Surfaces:
1.
2.
3.8
Install panels horizontally (perpendicular to supports) and unbroken, to extent possible,
across curved surface plus 12-inch-long straight sections at ends of curves and tangent
to them.
For double-layer construction, fasten base layer to studs with screws 16 inches o.c.
Center gypsum board face layer over joints in base layer, and fasten to studs with screws
spaced 12 inches o.c.
INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A.
General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same
fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B.
Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840.
C.
Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:
1.
2.
D.
3.9
Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.
Curved-Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved openings.
Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings.
FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A.
General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,
fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces
for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B.
Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
C.
Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for
tape.
D.
Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Level 1:
Level 2:
Level 4:
Level 5:
Ceiling plenum areas and concealed areas not exposed to view.
Panels that are substrate for tile.
Panel surfaces that will be exposed to view (typical panels).
Where indicated on Drawings.
E.
Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.
F.
Sand flush in preparation for painting.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
092110 - 9
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
3.10
A.
3.11
INSTALLING IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE- AND SMOKE-PARTITIONS
Marking and Identification for Fire- and Smoke-Partitions: Permanently install as required by
Code.
PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A.
Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,
construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
B.
Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or exhibit mold growth. Repair of
damaged panels in place is not acceptable. Remove all dust and debris from the area.
END OF SECTION
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
092110 - 10
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
SECTION 096510
RESILIENT FLOORING AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
1.2
Attention is directed to all Sections within DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which
are hereby made a part of this Section of the Specifications.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Vinyl composition tile.
Resilient wall base and accessories.
Substrate preparation for resilient flooring and accessories.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.4
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products identical to those tested for fire-exposure
behavior per test method indicated by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.5
Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with
ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less
than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store tiles on flat surfaces.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F
or more than 95 deg F in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods:
1.
2.
3.
48 hours before installation.
During installation.
48 hours after installation.
B.
After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within
manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.
range
recommended
by
C.
Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation and as indicated by manufacturer
recommendations after installation.
D.
Protect resilient products during other finishing operations, including painting..
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
VINYL COMPOSITION TILE
A.
Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT): ASTM F 1066. Available manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
RESILIENT FLOORING AND ACCESSORIES
096510 - 1
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
2.
3.
4.
5.
Azrock Commercial Flooring, DOMCO
Congoleum Corporation
Roppe Corporation.
Tarkett Inc.
B.
Style and Colors: As indicated on the Finish Schedule
C.
Thickness: 0.125 inch
D.
Size: 12 by 12 inches.
E.
Products meeting this specification:
1.
2.2
ARMSTRONG IMPERIAL TEXTURE TILE #51836, COLOR SHELTER WHITE
RESILIENT WALL BASE
A.
Wall Base: ASTM F 1861. FS SS-W-40, UL 992. Available manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Roppe Corporation
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
Azrock Commercial Flooring, DOMCO
Burke Mercer Flooring Products
Johnsonite
Marley Flexco (USA), Inc.
Nora Rubber Flooring, Freudenberg Building Systems, Inc.
B.
Style and Colors: As indicated on the Finish Schedule.
C.
Type (Material Requirement): TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset) or TP (rubber, thermoplastic).
D.
Shape: Coved at resilient flooring.
E.
Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch.
F.
Height: 4 inches.
G.
Lengths: coils in manufacturer's standard length.
H.
Outside Corners: Premolded.
I.
Inside Corners: Premolded.
J.
Surface: Smooth.
K.
Products meeting this specification:
1.
2.3
ROPPE VINYL COVE BASE, COLOR BLACK
RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY
A.
Types Include the Following as Applicable: nosing for resilient floor covering, reducer strip for
resilient floor covering,. Available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into
the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Burke Mercer Flooring Products
Johnsonite
Marley Flexco (USA), Inc
Roppe Corporation
RESILIENT FLOORING AND ACCESSORIES
096510 - 2
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
B.
Material: Rubber.
C.
Profile and Dimensions: As indicated.
2.4
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, Portland cement based or
blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by resilient product
manufacturer for applications indicated.
B.
Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and
substrate conditions indicated.
1.
Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
a.
b.
c.
2.
C.
Seamless-Installation Accessories: Heat-Welding Bead: Manufacturer's solid-strand
product for heat welding seams. Color: Match floor covering.
Integral-Flash-Cove-Base Accessories:
1.
2.
D.
VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesives: 50 g/L.
Cove Base Adhesives: 50 g/L.
Rubber Floor Adhesives: 60 g/L.
Cove Strip: 1-inch radius provided or approved by manufacturer.
Cap Strip: Provided or approved by manufacturer.
Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance.
1.
2.
3.2
Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified
in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and
foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of
resilient products.
B.
Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by flooring manufacturer.
Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within a range on pH scale not
less than 5 or more than 9 pH, or as otherwise required in writing by manufacturer of
flooring.
Moisture Vapor Emission Testing:
Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test,
ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisturevapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours, or as otherwise required in
writing by manufacturer of flooring.
Perform tests indicated above and as recommended by flooring manufacturer. Proceed
with installation only after substrates pass testing.
RESILIENT FLOORING AND ACCESSORIES
096510 - 3
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
C.
Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that
contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer.
Do not use solvents.
D.
Access Flooring Panels: Remove protective film of oil or other coating using method
recommended by access flooring manufacturer.
E.
Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in
substrates.
F.
Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at
least 48 hours in advance of installation. Do not install resilient products until they are same
temperature as space where they are to be installed.
G.
Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before
installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and
dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.3
TILE INSTALLATION
A.
Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so
tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut
widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter. Lay tiles in pattern indicated within the
limits of the proposed equipment room.
B.
Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles.
C.
Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures
including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, doorframes, thresholds, and
nosings.
D.
Extend tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.
E.
Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting
by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent,
nonstaining marking device.
F.
Install tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar items in finished floor areas.
Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of tile installed on covers. Tightly
adhere tile edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters.
G.
Adhere tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to
produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,
telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
3.4
RESILIENT WALL BASE INSTALLATION
A.
Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other
permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
B.
Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of
adjacent pieces aligned.
C.
Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous
contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
D.
Do not stretch wall base during installation.
E.
On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of wall base
with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
RESILIENT FLOORING AND ACCESSORIES
096510 - 4
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
F.
3.5
Premolded Corners: Install premolded corners before installing straight pieces.
RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A.
3.6
Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates
throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor coverings that would
otherwise be exposed.
PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A.
Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. Do not wash surfaces until after time
period recommended by manufacturer.
Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer.
1.
2.
3.
Apply protective floor polish to horizontal surfaces that are free from soil, visible adhesive,
and surface blemishes if recommended in writing by manufacturer. Coordinate selection
of floor polish with the Owner’s maintenance service.
Cover products installed on horizontal surfaces with undyed, untreated building paper
until Substantial Completion.
Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over surfaces. Place hardboard or
plywood panels over flooring and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll
objects over panels without moving panels.
END OF SECTION
RESILIENT FLOORING AND ACCESSORIES
096510 - 5
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
SECTION 099000
PAINTING AND COATING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
1.2
Attention is directed to all Sections within DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which
are hereby made a part of this Section of the Specifications.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Field painting of exposed interior items and surfaces.
Field painting of exposed exterior items and surfaces.
Surface preparation for painting.
Section 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS for shop priming ferrous metal.
Section 081110 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES for factory priming steel
doors and frames.
Section 092110 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES for surface preparation of gypsum
board.
DEFINITIONS AND EXTENT
A.
General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed exterior and interior
items and surfaces.
1.
C.
Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at
an 85-degree meter.
Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 20 and 35 when
measured at a 60-degree meter.
Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 35 and 70 when
measured at a 60-degree meter.
Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 70 when measured at
a 60-degree meter.
Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to
shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.
Paint exposed surfaces, except where these Specifications indicate that the surface or material
is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned,
paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If a color of finish
is not indicated, ATC Construction Manager will select from standard colors and finishes
available.
1.
Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including
color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron supports, and surfaces of mechanical and
electrical equipment that do not have a factory-applied final finish.
PAINTING AND COATING
099000 - 1
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
D.
Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts,
and labels.
1.
Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Finished metal surfaces include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
3.
1.4
Anodized aluminum.
Stainless steel.
Chromium plate.
Copper and copper alloys.
Bronze and brass.
Galvanized Steel
Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
4.
Finished mechanical and electrical equipment.
Light fixtures.
Pre-fabricated structures with factory-applied finishes.
Valve and damper operators.
Linkages.
Sensing devices.
Motor and fan shafts.
Labels: Do not paint over UL, FMG, or other code-required labels or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings
similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated, whose work has resulted in
applications with a record of successful in-service performance.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers and primers for each coating system from the same
manufacturer as the finish coats.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing
manufacturer's name and label and the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum
ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of
foreign materials and residue.
1.
1.6
Product name or title of material.
Thinning instructions.
Application instructions.
Color name and number.
VOC content.
Protect from excessive heat and freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove
oily rags and waste daily.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air
are between 50 and 90 deg F.
PAINTING AND COATING
099000 - 2
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
B.
Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding
air are between 45 and 95 deg F.
C.
Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or
at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Available Products:
Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work are listed in the Finish Schedule at the end of this Section.
PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish-coat materials that are
compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B.
Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating types
specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application
indicated. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not
be acceptable.
1.
2.
C.
Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors
or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the
exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material
data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions.
Colors: As indicated on drawings.
VOC Content for Interior Paints and Coatings: Products shall comply with VOC limits of
authorities having jurisdiction and, for interior paints and coatings applied at Project site, the
following VOC limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L.
Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L.
Dry-Fog Coatings: 400 g/L.
Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L.
Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L.
Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L.
Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for paint application.
1.
2.
B.
Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected
and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry.
Start of painting will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions
within a particular area.
Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure
compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on
characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.
PAINTING AND COATING
099000 - 3
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
1.
3.2
Notify ATC Construction Manager about anticipated problems when using the materials
specified over substrates primed by others.
PREPARATION
A.
General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting
fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical
or impossible because of size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before
surface preparation and painting. After completing painting operations in each space or area,
reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved.
B.
Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of substances
that could impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning.
Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will
not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
C.
Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's
written instructions and technical bulletins for each particular substrate condition and as
specified.
1.
2.
Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime.
Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete unit masonry, cement plaster, and
mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence,
chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze.
If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of
surface preparation.
a.
b.
3.
Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral
spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off.
a.
b.
c.
4.
Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer.
Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate
tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and
burn, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces if moisture
content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white
shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming,
fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand
smooth when dried.
Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges,
ends, faces, undersides, and back sides of wood, including cabinets, counters,
cases, and paneling.
Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of
varnish or sealer immediately on delivery.
Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop
coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use
solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SSPC's recommendations.
a.
b.
c.
Exterior Exposed Steel: Clean steel surfaces in accordance with SSPC-SP
6/NACE No. 3 Commercial Blast Cleaning. Abrasive blast cleaned surfaces shall
exhibit a uniform, angular profile of 1.5-3.0 mils. Prime cleaned surfaces within 8
hours and prior to surface rusting.
Interior Exposed Steel, in Humid Environments:
Clean steel surfaces in
accordance with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3 Commercial Blast Cleaning. Abrasive
blast cleaned surfaces shall exhibit a uniform, angular profile of 1.5-3.0 mils. Prime
cleaned surfaces within 8 hours and prior to surface rusting.
Interior Exposed Steel, in Dry Environments: Clean steel surfaces in accordance
with SSPC-SP2 or SP3 Hand or Power Tool Cleaning.
PAINTING AND COATING
099000 - 4
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
D.
Material Preparation:
instructions.
1.
2.
3.
E.
3.3
Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written
Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign
materials and residue.
Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required
during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface
film and strain material before using.
Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.
Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple
coats of same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but
provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
APPLICATION
A.
General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and
techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or
otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent
surface deterioration.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the paint schedules.
Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions
detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.
Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.
The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures,
grilles, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar components are in
place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and
provide desired protection.
Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed
surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed
equipment or furniture with prime coat only.
Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through
registers or grilles.
Paint backsides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed
surfaces.
Finish exterior doors and doors in wet areas on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same
as exterior faces.
Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.
The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application
method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended
by manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to
manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications.
Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted.
If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional
coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to
ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film
thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat
surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky
under moderate thumb pressure, and until application of another coat of paint does not
cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.
Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate
size for surface or item being painted.
Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet-back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by
manufacturer for material and texture required.
PAINTING AND COATING
099000 - 5
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
3.
Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by
manufacturer for material and texture required.
D.
Minimum Coating Thickness:
Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's
recommended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated. Provide total dry film
thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer.
E.
Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items
exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces.
F.
Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
G.
Uninsulated metal piping.
Uninsulated plastic piping.
Pipe hangers and supports.
Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.
Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and
outlets.
Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having "all-service jacket" or other paintable jacket
material.
Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting.
Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
Panelboards.
Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting.
Conduits to match existing as noted on Construction Drawings
H.
Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by
manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime
coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or
unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other
defects due to insufficient sealing.
I.
Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth,
opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting,
holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be
acceptable.
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
3.5
Independent Testing Agency: Cooperate with the Independent Testing Agency engaged by
ATC for field quality control activities required in Section 014320, “Quality Control, Testing and
Special Inspection Services.” Allow inspectors access to work areas, as needed to perform
inspections.
CLEANING
A.
Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded
paint materials from site.
1.
3.6
After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered
paint by washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent finished
surfaces.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting.
Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting.
PAINTING AND COATING
099000 - 6
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
B.
Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting
operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work.
1.
3.7
After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted
surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1.
PAINT SCHEDULE
A.
Schedule: Provide products and number of coats specified. Use of manufacturer's proprietary
product names to designate colors, materials, generic class, standard of quality and
performance criteria and is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to
the exclusion of equivalent performing products of other manufacturers.
B.
Exterior Paint Schedule:
1.
Exterior Concrete and Masonry (where indicated), Painted Finish:
a.
One Coat:
1)
2)
3)
4)
b.
And One Coat:
1)
2)
3)
4)
2.
Tnemec 156 Enviro-Crete at 8 to 10 mils DFT.
Liquid Plastics Acrylic at 8.0 to 10.0 mils DFT.
Dupont Tufcryl at 8.0 to 10.0 mils DFT.
RD Coatings Elasto-Flex at 6.0 to 10.0 mils DFT.
Exterior Previously Painted Concrete and Previously Painted Masonry, Painted Finish:
a.
One Coat:
1)
2)
3)
4)
b.
Tnemec 151 Elast-Grip at 2.0 to 3.0 mils DFT.
Liquid Plastics Water Borne Penetrating Primer at 3.0 mils DFT.
Dupont Corlar 2.1 PRP at 1.0 to 2.0 mils DFT.
RD Coatings Multiprim at 1.5 to 2.0 mils DFT.
And Two Coats:
1)
2)
3)
4)
3.
Tnemec 156 Enviro-Crete at 6.0 to 10 mils DFT.
Liquid Plastics Acrylic at 8.0 to 10.0 mils DFT.
Dupont Tufcryl at 8.0 to 10.0 mils DFT.
RD Coatings Elasto-Flex at 6.0 to 10.0 mils DFT.
Tnemec 156 Enviro-Crete at 8 to 10 mils DFT.
Liquid Plastics Decadex at 10.0 to 12.0 mils DFT.
Dupont Tufcryl at 8.0 to 10.0 mils DFT.
RD Coatings Elasto-Flex at 6.0 to 8.0 mils DFT.
Exterior Ferrous Metal, Urethane System:
a.
b.
Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP6.
One Coat:
1)
2)
3)
4)
Tnemec 90G-1K97 at 3 mils DFT; shop applied under other Sections; use
for touch up.
PPG PMC Amercoat 68 MCZ at 3 mils DFT; shop applied under other
Sections; use for touch up.
Dupont Urethane Ganicin Zinc Rich Primer 80%zinc load at 3.0 mils DFT.
International Interzinc 315 at 2.0 to 3.0 mils DFT.
PAINTING AND COATING
099000 - 7
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
c.
And One Coat:
1)
2)
3)
4)
d.
And One Coat:
1)
2)
3)
4)
4.
b.
Surface Preparation: Pressure wash with Oakite and sand with 3M Scotch-Brite
nylon pads.
One Coat:
1)
2)
3)
4)
c.
Tnemec 66HS Hi-Build Epoxoline at 2.0 mils DFT.
PPG PMC Amerlock 400 Hi-Build Epoxy at 2.0 to 3.0 mils DFT.
Dupont 25P High Solids at 4.0 mils DFT.
International Intergard 475 HS at 5.0 to 10.0 mils DFT.
And One Coat:
1)
2)
3)
4)
Tnemec 73 Endura-Shield at 2.0 mils DFT.
PPG PMC Amercoat 450H Polyurethane at 3.0 mils DFT.
Dupont High Solids Imron 2.8 at 4.0 mils DFT.
International Interthane 990 HS at 3.0 to 4.0 mils DFT.
Exterior Existing Prepainted Steel, for Sandblasting and Painted Finish:
a.
b.
Surface Preparation- SSPC-SP 6 Commercial Blast Cleaning.
One Coat:
1)
2)
3)
c.
d.
Tnemec 90-97 or 90G-1K97 at 3 to 3.5 mils DFT.
PPG PMC Amercoat 68 MCZ at 3.0 mils DFT.
Dupont Ganicin 80% Zinc load Zinc Rich Primer at 3.0 to 3.5 mils DFT.
And One Coat:
1)
2)
3)
Tnemec 73 Endura-Shield at 3.0 to 4.0 mils DFT.
PPG PMC Amerlock 400 at 4.0 DFT.
Dupont Imron 2.8 at 4.0 to 5.0 mils DFT.
And One Coat:
1)
2)
3)
6.
Tnemec 73 Endura-Shield at 3.0 mils DFT.
PPG PMC Amerlock 450H Polyurethane Topcoat at 3.0 mils DFT.
Dupont High Solids Imron Urethane at 4.0 mils DFT.
International Interthane 990 HS at 2.0 to 3.0 mils DFT.
Exterior Aluminum (where required), Painted Finish:
a.
5.
Tnemec 66HS Hi-Build Epoxoline at 3.0 mils DFT.
PPG PMC Amerlock 400 Hi-Build Epoxy at 3.0 to 5.0 mils DFT.
Dupont 25P High Solids Epoxy at 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT.
International Intergard 475 HS at 4.0 to 8.0 mils DFT.
Tnemec 1070, 1071, or 1072 Flouronar at 2.5 to 3.5 mils DFT.
PPG PMC Corolon Coating at 5.0 mils DFT.
Dupont Flouropolymer at 3.0 mils DFT.
Exterior Existing Prepainted Painted Steel, for Overcoat Painted Finish:
a.
b.
Surface Preparation: Water Blast 5000 psi and SSPC-SP3 Power Tool Clean.
One Coat:
1)
2)
Tnemec 394 Omnithane at 3.0 to 3.5 mils DFT.
PPG PMC Amerlock 400 Hi-Build Epoxy at 3.0 to 4.0 mils DFT.
PAINTING AND COATING
099000 - 8
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
3)
4)
c.
And One Coat:
1)
2)
3)
4)
d.
Tnemec 73 Endura-Shield at 3.0 to 5.0 mils DFT.
PPG PMC Amercoat 450H at 3.0 mils DFT.
RD Coatings MurCryl at 3.0 to 4.0 mils DFT.
International Interthane 990 HS at 3.0 to 4.0 mils DFT.
Exterior Wood and Cellular PVC, for Painted Finish:
a.
One Coat, Primer:
1)
2)
3)
4)
b.
Duron Bond N-Seal Exterior Acrylic Latex Primer 08-124.
PPG Seal Grip Acrylic Latex Primer.
S-W Exterior Latex Acrylic Wood Primer.
California Paint Grip-Coat Bonding Primer 505 series.
And Two Coats, Semi-Gloss Finish:
1)
2)
3)
4)
C.
Tnemec 66HS Hi-Build Epoxoline at 3.0 to 5.0 mils DFT.
PPG PMC Amerlock 400 at 3.0 to 4.0 mils DFT.
RD Coatings Elasto Metal at 7.0 mils DFT.
International Intergard 475 HS at 5.0 to 10.0 mils DFT.
And One Coat:
1)
2)
3)
4)
7.
RD Coatings Elasto Metal at 3.0 mils DFT.
International Interplus 356 at 3.0 to 5.0 mils DFT.
Duron Weathershield Exterior 100% Acrylic Semi-Gloss House Paint.
PPG Sun-Proof Exterior Semi-Gloss Latex 78 line, N096 or 170.
S-W SuperPaint VinylSafe Exterior Latex Acrylic Satin A89 series.
California Paint Fresh Coat 100% Acrylic Satin-Gloss 471 series.
Interior Paint Schedule: FINISH ALL DRYWALL SCREWS OR NAILS, AND JOINTS, UNLESS
NOTED OTHERWISE. PRIME DRYWALL AND EXTERIOR SURFACES WITH ONE COAT OF
WHITE LATEX PRIMER. FINISH WITH TWO COATS OF INTERIOR SEMI-GLOSS LATEX
PAINT, COLOR INSIGNIA WHITE(FS27875 OR EQUAL). PAINT SHALL BE BY SHERMAN
WILLIAMS, BENJAMIN MOORE, DUTCH BOY OR EQUAL.
1.
Interior Gypsum Wallboard and Plaster, Latex Paint Finish:
a.
One Coat, Primer:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
b.
or
Moore Eco Spec WB Interior Latex Primer 372.
Duron Genesis Latex Primer.
S-W ProMar 200 Zero-VOC Latex Wall Primer.
PPG Pure Performance Latex Primer.
California Paint Envirotech Zero VOC Primer 646.
And Two Coats, Flat Finish: At ceilings, and elsewhere as indicated.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Moore Eco Spec WB Interior Latex Flat 373.
Duron Genesis Latex Flat.
S-W ProMar 200 Zero-VOC Latex Flat.
PPG Pure Performance Latex Eggshell.
California Paint Envirotech Zero VOC Flat 633.
PAINTING AND COATING
099000 - 9
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
c.
And Two Coats, Eggshell Finish: At walls, and elsewhere as indicated.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Moore Eco Spec WB Interior Latex Eggshell 374.
Duron Genesis Latex Eggshell.
S-W ProMar 200 Zero-VOC Latex Eggshell.
PPG Pure Performance Latex Eggshell.
California Paint Envirotech Zero VOC Eggshell 631.
or
d.
And Two Coats, Semi-Gloss Finish: At wet areas, and elsewhere as indicated.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
2.
Interior Finish Carpentry, Latex Paint Finish:
a.
One Coat, Primer:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
b.
Moore Eco Spec WB Interior Latex Semi-Gloss 376.
Duron Genesis Latex Semi-Gloss.
S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Semi-Gloss.
PPG Pure Performance Latex Semi-Gloss.
California Paint Envorotech Zero VOC Semi Gloss 663.
Interior Concrete Masonry Units in Dry Areas, Latex Paint Finish:
a.
One Coat:
1)
2)
3)
b.
PPG Speedhide Int/Ext Latex Block Filler 6-15 or 6-16.
S-W Loxon Block Surfacer.
California Paint Pro Block Filler 515-00.
And Two Coats:
1)
2)
3)
4.
Moore Eco Spec WB Interior Latex Primer 372.
Duron Genesis Latex Primer.
S-W ProMar 200 Zero-VOC Latex Primer.
PPG Pure Performance Latex Primer.
California Paint Envirotech Zero VOC Primer 646.
And Two Coats, Semi-Gloss:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
3.
Moore Eco Spec WB Interior Latex Semi-Gloss 376.
Duron Genesis Latex Semi-Gloss.
S-W ProMar 200 Zero-VOC Latex Semi-Gloss.
PPG Pure Performance Latex Semi-Gloss.
California Paint Envorotech Zero VOC Semi-Gloss 663.
PPG Pure Performance Latex Semi-Gloss.
S-W ProMar 200 Zero-VOC Latex Semi-Gloss.
California Paint Envirotech Zero VOC Semi-Gloss 663.
Interior Concrete Walls Exposed to View, Urethane Coating:
a.
b.
Surface Preparation: Cured, clean and dry, free of surface contaminants.
And One Coat:
1)
2)
3)
4)
Tnemec 201 Epoxoprime at 3.0- 4.0 mils DFT.
PPG PMC Amerlock Sealer at 3.0 to 4.5 mils DFT.
Dupont Hi-Solids Colar primer at 3.0 to 4.0 mils DFT.
International Interseal 670 HS at 3.0 to 4.0 mils DFT.
PAINTING AND COATING
099000 - 10
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
c.
And One Coat:
1)
2)
3)
4)
d.
And One Coat:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5.
b.
One Coat: Approved primer, in shop under other Sections (where specified). If not
shop primed, provide primer recommended by finish coating manufacturer.
And Two Coats:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
One Coat:
1)
2)
3)
4)
Tnemec 115 WB Unibond at 2.5 to 3.0 mils DFT.
PPG PMC Amercoat 220 Acrylic at 3.0 mils DFT.
International Intercryl 530 at 2.5 to 3.0 mils DFT.
RD Coatings Muracryl at 2.0 to 3.0 mils DFT.
Mechanical Room Concrete Floor, Epoxy Paint System:
a.
One Coat:
1)
2)
3)
b.
c.
Tnemec 201 Epoxoprime at 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT.
Dex-O-Tex C Bond Coat at 6.0-7.0 mils DFT.
RD Coatings Unifix at 2.0 mils DFT.
And One Coat:
1)
2)
3)
Tnemec 206 Flexible Epoxy Underlayment at 30 to 50 mils DFT.
Dex-O-Tex Cheminert SC Membrane at 70-80 mils DFT.
RD Coatings Elasto Deck at 50-80 mils DFT.
And One Coat:
1)
2)
3)
8.
Moore Eco Spec WB Interior Latex Semi-Gloss 376.
Duron Genesis Latex Semi-Gloss.
S-W ProMar 200 Zero-VOC Latex Semi-Gloss.
PPG Pure Performance Latex Semi-Gloss.
California Paint Envorotech Zero VOC Semi-Gloss 663.
Interior Exposed Steel, Joists, Ductwork, Conduit and Similar Items (where indicated),
Dry-Fall or Dry-Fog Painted System:
a.
7.
Tnemec 1080 or 1081 EnduraShield at 3.0 to 3.5 mils DFT.
PPG PMC AmerShield VOC at 2.0 to 3.0 mils DFT.
Dupont WB Urethane at 3.5 to 4.0 mils DFT.
International Water Borne Urethane at 3.0 to 4.0 mils DFT.
Interior Metals (Not specified to receive other coating systems/not shop finished), Latex
Painted Finish:
a.
6.
Tnemec 280 Tneme-glaze at 6.0 to 8.0 mils DFT.
PPG PMC Amercoat 351 Epoxy at 6.0 to 8.0 mils DFT.
Dupont 100 % Solids Epoxy at 8.0-10.0 mils.
International Interseal 670 HS at 3.0 to 4.0 mils DFT.
Tnemec 297 at 3.0 mils DFT.
Dex-O-Tex Quik-Glaze at 7.0-8.0 mils DFT.
RD Coatings Muracryl at 3.0 mils DFT.
Concrete Floor, Clear Exposed Sealer:
a.
One Coat:
PAINTING AND COATING
099000 - 11
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
1)
2)
3)
4)
9.
Curecrete Chemical; Ashford Formula.
Chem Probe; CT Denisifyer.
WR Meadows; Liqui-Hard.
L&M; Sealhard.
Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint all exposed items throughout the project except
factory finished items with factory-applied baked enamel finishes which occur in
mechanical rooms or areas, and excepting chrome or nickel plating, stainless steel, and
aluminum other than mill finished. Paint all exposed ductwork and inner portion of all
ductwork. Same as specified for other interior metals, hereinabove.
END OF SECTION
PAINTING AND COATING
099000 - 12
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
SECTION 102215
CHAIN LINK AND WIRE MESH PARTITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Attention is directed to all Sections within DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which
are hereby made a part of this Section of the Specifications.
SUMMARY
A.
Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1.
1.3
Industrial wire mesh and chain link partitions for interior use.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of construction contiguous with chain link and wire
mesh items by field measurements before fabrication.
B.
Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the
Work, establish location dimensions and proceed with fabricating chain link and wire mesh
items without field measurements. Coordinate with adjacent construction to ensure that actual
location dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
1.4
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate installation of anchorages for chain link and wire mesh items supported or anchored
to permanent construction. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing
anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors,
that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for
installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CHAIN LINK PARTITIONS
A.
Fabric: Provide fabric in one-piece heights measured between top and bottom of outer edge of
selvage knuckle or twist. Comply with ASTM A 392, CLFMI CLF 2445, and requirements
indicated below:
1.
2.
Steel Wire Fabric: Vinyl coated galvanized wire with a diameter of 0.192 inch.
a.
Mesh Size: 2” by 2”.
b.
Weight of Metallic (Zinc) Coating: ASTM A 392, Type II, Class 1, 1.2 oz./sq. ft.
with zinc coating applied before weaving.
Selvage: Knuckled at both selvages.
B.
Frames: Provide u-bending metal framing as indicated on Drawings. Finish: Vinyl coated
galvanized steel to match steel wire fabric
C.
Fittings: Comply with ASTM F 626.
D.
Polymer Finish: Vinyl-coated wire complying with ASTM F 1664, Class 1. Color: Black, unless
indicated otherwise on drawings.
CHAIN LINK AND WIRE MESH PARTITIONS
102215- 1
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
2.2
WIRE MESH PARTITIONS
A.
Scheduled and acceptable manufacturers must provide all the functions and features of the
specified product or it will not be approved.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Wire Crafters
SpaceGuard Products
King wire Partitions, Inc.
Cogan Wire and Metal Products, Ltd.
Fabric: Fabric shall be made of one of the following materials:
1.
2.
10 gauge (.134”), 2”x2” welded wire mesh. The fabric shall be welded to the frame at
every 6 inches.
Panels, whose size is equal to or exceeds 8-feet, shall be reinforced with two ½-inch solid
round bar, dividing the panel in 3 equal sections.
C.
Frames: Panel frames shall be made of 1¼”x1¼”x12gauge structural angle. Corners shall be
notched and seam welded.
D.
Fittings: Standard posts shall be fabricated with 2”x2” seam-welded square steel tube. Each
post shall have a welded base plate, 6”x6”x1/4”, with four oblong holes for easy adjustment.
Post spacing shall be either 8’ or 10’ center.
E.
Sliding Doors: Sliding doors shall be made of the same material and in the same method as the
panels. In addition, sliding door panels shall be reinforced with a 1½” square tube, bolted to the
front and leading edges. Sliding doors shall be equipped with guide track with three support
hangers, a door guide, a receiver and one set of hasps for padlocking.
F.
Finish: Powder coat finish. Color: Black, unless indicated otherwise on drawings.
2.3
GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT
A.
Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout:
Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout, recommended in writing by
manufacturer, for exterior applications.
B.
Erosion-Resistant Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydrauliccontrolled expansion cement formulation for mixing with potable water at Project site to create
pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. Provide formulation that is resistant to
erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and
that is recommended in writing by manufacturer, for exterior applications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B.
Examine floors for suitable conditions where chain link or wire mesh items will be installed.
C.
Examine walls to which chain link or wire mesh items will be attached for properly located
blocking, grounds, and other solid backing for attachment of support fasteners.
D.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
CHAIN LINK AND WIRE MESH PARTITIONS
102215- 2
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
The area where the partition enclosure is installed shall have a concrete slab, troweled smooth
and level. Working areas shall be inspected and cleaned of all debris to ensure that adequate
access is provided to the installers.
B.
Erection of the partition shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommended
installation procedures. All drawings must be reviewed carefully prior to installation.
3.3
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Adjust doors to operate easily without binding.
B.
Check and readjust operating hardware items before final inspection. Leave work in complete
and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work including doors and
framing that are warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
END OF SECTION
CHAIN LINK AND WIRE MESH PARTITIONS
102215- 3
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
SECTION 133419
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
1.2
Attention is directed to all Sections within DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which
are hereby made a part of this Section of the Specifications.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3
Structural-steel framing.
Metal roof panels.
Metal wall panels.
Doors and frames.
Accessories.
Section 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE for concrete slab substrate and
foundations.
Section 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS for pipe bollards to protect buildings.
Section 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE for cylinders and keying requirements.
Section 072100 – THERMAL INSULATION for frost protection of shallow foundations and
thermal insulation.
Section 230000 – HVAC for TOWER SITES
Section 260000 – ELECTRICAL WORK FOR TOWER SITES
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Terminology Standard: See MBMA's "Metal Building Systems Manual" for definitions of terms
for metal building system construction not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced
standards.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General: Delegated designs shall conform to all applicable local, state and federal code
requirements.
B.
Delegated Building Design: Design building, including comprehensive engineering analysis by
a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
C.
Delegated Foundation Design: Design foundation, including comprehensive engineering
analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design
criteria indicated.
D.
Structural Performance: Provide assemblies and foundation capable of withstanding design
loads within limits and under conditions indicated.
1.
2.
Design Loads: As indicated and as required by building code
Geotechnical Report: Design foundation in accordance with the geotechnical report
furnished by ATC.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
133419 - 1
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
E.
1.5
Energy Performance: completed building shall meet or exceed the requirements of the locally
accepted ASHRAE 90.1 energy code.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings: Show building plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other
work. Show required fabrication details; fastening and anchorage details, mechanical fastener
details, and anchor bolts design and embedment. Show bracing, splices, accessory connection
details, and member connection details. Show number and types of connection hardware, hole
sizes and base plate thicknesses.
B.
Foundation Drawings: Show foundation layout, all dimensions, depths below and above grade,
all rebar type and grade, rebar placement and location, all connection details, anchor steel
placement and embedment, concrete compressive strength and accessory connection details.
C.
Delegated Building Design Submittal: Supply sealed building drawings, fabrication drawings,
and full structural analysis showing all member use percentages and deflections. Comply with
all performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by
the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
D.
Delegated Foundation Submittal: Supply sealed foundation design drawings and sealed
calculations. Comply with all performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis
data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
E.
Welding certificates.
F.
Metal Building System Certificates: For each type of metal building system, from manufacturer.
1.
Letter of Design Certification: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional structural
engineer. Include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
1.6
Name and location of Project.
Order number.
Name of manufacturer.
Name of Contractor.
Building dimensions including width, length, height, and roof slope.
Number of building modules
Plumbing
Indicate compliance with AISC standards for hot-rolled steel and AISI standards for
cold-rolled steel, including edition dates of each standard.
Governing building code and year of edition.
Design Loads: Include dead load, roof live load, collateral loads, roof snow load,
deflection, wind loads/speeds and exposure, seismic design category or effective
peak velocity-related acceleration/peak acceleration, and auxiliary loads (cranes).
Load Combinations: Indicate that loads were applied acting simultaneously with
concentrated loads, according to governing building code.
Building-Use Category: Indicate category of building use and its effect on load
importance factors.
Exposure Catagory
Electrical Service Load:
Energy Zone: Energy Zone Classification
AISC Certification for Category MB: Include statement that metal building system
and components were designed and produced in an AISC-Certified Facility by an
AISC-Certified Manufacturer.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, design calculations, and other
structural data by a qualified professional engineer.
B.
Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice
in the jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
133419 - 2
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for
installations of metal buildings that are similar to those indicated for the Project in material,
design, and extent.
C.
Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency, or in-house
testing with calibrated test equipment indicating steel sheet complies with requirements,
including base-metal thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical
requirements, ductility, delamination, and metallic-coating thickness.
D.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding
Code--Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
E.
Manufacturer Qualifications:
A qualified manufacturer and member of MBMA.
AISC
Certification for Category MB: An AISC-Certified Manufacturer that designs and produces metal
building systems and components in an AISC-Certified Facility.
F.
Erector Qualifications: An experienced erector who specializes in erecting and installing work
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is acceptable to
manufacturer.
G.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.
H.
Source Limitations:
Obtain metal building system components, including primary and
secondary framing and metal panel assemblies, from single source from single manufacturer.
I.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1.
2.
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."
J.
Structural Steel: Structural steel materials, workmanship, and details shall conform to the latest
editions of the AISC 360 “Specification for Structural Steel Buildings” and the AISC “Code of
Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges”.
K.
Cold-Formed Steel: Comply with AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of ColdFormed Steel Structural Members" for design requirements and allowable stresses.
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver components, sheets, panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or
deformed. Package metal panels for protection during transportation and handling.
B.
Unload, store, and erect metal panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and
surface damage.
C.
Stack metal panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and
ventilated covering. Store metal panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of
water. Do not store metal panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining,
denting, or other surface damage.
1.8
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when weather conditions permit metal
panels to be installed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty
requirements.
B.
Field Measurements:
1.
Established Dimensions for Foundations: Comply with established dimensions on
approved anchor-bolt plans, establishing foundation dimensions and proceeding with
fabricating structural framing without field measurements. Coordinate anchor-bolt
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
133419 - 3
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
2.
1.9
installation to ensure that actual anchorage dimensions correspond to established
dimensions through the use of a template.
Established Dimensions for Metal Panels: Where field measurements cannot be made
without delaying the Work, either establish framing and opening dimensions and proceed
with fabricating metal panels without field measurements, or allow for field trimming metal
panels. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual building dimensions, locations of
structural members, and openings correspond to established dimensions.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete foundations and casting of anchor-bolt inserts into
foundation walls and footings. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are
specified in Section 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.
B.
Coordinate metal panel assemblies with flashing, trim, and construction of supports and other
adjoining work to provide a leak-proof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
C.
Coordinate sizes and locations for doors, wall ports, wall pack HVAC, utility penetrations, etc.
D.
Coordinate architectural features, overall dimensions and appearance with jurisdictionally
approved plans and specifications.
1.10
A.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty on Metal Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer
agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factoryapplied finishes within specified warranty period.
1.
Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
B.
Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.
Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
Special Weather-tightness Warranty for Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Manufacturer's
standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace standing-seam metal roof
panel assemblies that leak or otherwise fail to remain weather-tight within specified warranty
period.
1.
Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
A.
2.2
Description: Provide a complete, integrated set of mutually dependent components and
assemblies that form a metal building system capable of withstanding structural and other
loads, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure or infiltration of
water into building interior. Provide metal building system addition of size and with bay spacing,
roof slopes, and spans to match the existing structure. Refer to Drawings
METAL BUILDING SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
A.
Delegated Design: Design metal building system, including comprehensive engineering
analysis by a qualified professional structural engineer, using performance requirements and
design criteria indicated.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
133419 - 4
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
B.
Structural Performance: Metal building systems shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and
the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to
procedures in MBMA's "Metal Building Systems Manual."
1.
2.
Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
Metal panel assemblies shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and loads and
stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASTM E 1592.
C.
Seismic Performance: Metal building systems shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to ASCE/SEI 7 (latest).
D.
Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum
change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints,
overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other
detrimental effects. Base engineering calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to
both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F,
ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
E.
Air Infiltration for Metal Roof Panels: Air leakage through assembly of not more than 0.06
cfm/sq. ft. of roof area when tested according to ASTM E 1680 at negative test-pressure
difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.
F.
Air Infiltration for Metal Wall Panels: Air leakage through assembly of not more than 0.06
cfm/sq. ft. of wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at static-air-pressure difference of
1.57 lbf/sq. ft.
G.
Water Penetration for Metal Roof Panels: No water penetration when tested according to
ASTM E 1646 at test-pressure difference of 2.86 lbf/sq. ft.
H.
Water Penetration for Metal Wall Panels: No water penetration when tested according to
ASTM E 331 at a wind-load design pressure of not less than 2.86 lbf/sq. ft.
I.
Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580.
2.3
STRUCTURAL-STEEL FRAMING
A.
Primary Framing: Manufacturer's standard primary-framing system, designed to withstand
required loads and specified requirements.
B.
Secondary Framing: Manufacturer's standard secondary framing, including purlins, girts, eave
struts, flange bracing, base members, gable angles, clips, headers, jambs, and other
miscellaneous structural membersBracing: Provide adjustable wind bracing.
C.
Bolts: Provide plain-finish bolts for structural-framing components that are primed or finish
painted. Provide hot-dip galvanized bolts for structural-framing components that are galvanized.
D.
Finish: Factory primed.
2.4
METAL PANELS
A.
Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Manufacturers standard formed with ribs at panel edges
and between ribs; designed for sequential installation by mechanically attaching panels to
supports using concealed clips located under one side of panels and engaging opposite edge of
adjacent panels.
B.
Exposed-Fastener Metal Wall Panels: Manufacturers standard formed with raised ribs
C.
Materials and Finishes:
1.
Manufacturers standards approved for color and texture by ATC Construction Manager.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
133419 - 5
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
2.5
DOORS AND FRAMES
A.
2.6
Refer to Section 081110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
ACCESSORIES
A.
General: Provide accessories as standard with metal building system manufacturer and as
specified. Fabricate and finish accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by
manufacturer's standard procedures and processes. Comply with indicated profiles and with
dimensional and structural requirements. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are
without excessive oil-canning, buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels
indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems
B.
Provide components if not provided as a standard by the manufacturer required for complete
assembly for the following accessories:
1.
2.7
Roof Panel AccessoriesWall Panel AccessoriesFlashing and TrimLouvers:
Screening
Bird
FABRICATION
A.
General: Provide manufactureers standard and re-fabricate or special fitting to existing
conditions in accordance with manufactuerer specifications in a manner to maintain warranty.
Do not cut remove or replace any part of the supplied system without prior manufacturer and
ATC Construction Manager approval. Design components and field connections required for
erection to permit easy assembly.
1.
2.
Mark each piece and part of the assembly to correspond with previously prepared
erection drawings, diagrams, and instruction manuals.
Fabricate structural framing to produce clean, smooth cuts and bends. Punch holes of
proper size, shape, and location. Members shall be free of cracks, tears, and ruptures.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with erector present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Before erection proceeds, survey elevations and locations of concrete- and masonry-bearing
surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments to receive
structural framing, with erector present, for compliance with requirements and metal building
system manufacturer's tolerances. Engage land surveyor to perform surveying
C.
Proceed with erection only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for
each particular substrate condition.
B.
Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural
framing secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal
in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural framing,
connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated.
3.3
ERECTION OF STRUCTURAL FRAMING
A.
Erect metal building system according to manufacturer's written erection instructions and
erection drawings.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
133419 - 6
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
B.
Do not field cut, drill, or alter structural members without written approval from metal building
system manufacturer's professional structural engineer.
C.
Set structural framing accurately in locations and to elevations indicated, according to AISC
specifications referenced in this Section. Maintain structural stability of frame during erection.
D.
Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing
materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates.
1.
2.
3.
E.
Align and adjust structural framing before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean
bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with framing. Perform
necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.
1.
2.
F.
Make field connections using high-strength bolts installed according to RCSC's
"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for bolt type and
joint type specified. Joint Type: Snug tightened or pretensioned.
Secondary Framing: Erect framing level, plumb, rigid, secure, and true to line.
secondary framing to clips attached to primary framing.
1.
2.
3.
H.
Level and plumb individual members of structure.
Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean
temperature when structure will be completed and in service.
Primary Framing and End Walls: Erect framing level, plumb, rigid, secure, and true to line.
Level baseplates to a true even plane with full bearing to supporting structures, set with doublenutted anchor bolts. Use grout to obtain uniform bearing and to maintain a level base-line
elevation. Moist-cure grout for not less than seven days after placement.
1.
G.
Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required.
Tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do
not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before
packing with grout.
Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain.
Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure.
Comply with
manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.
Field bolt
Provide rake or gable purlins with tight-fitting closure channels and fasciae.
Locate and space wall girts to suit openings such as doors.
Provide supplemental framing at entire perimeter of openings, including doors, louvers,
and other penetrations of roof and walls.
Bracing: Install bracing in roof and sidewalls where indicated on erection drawings.
1.
2.
Tighten rod and cable bracing to avoid sag.
Locate interior end-bay bracing only where indicated.
I.
Framing for Openings: Provide shapes of proper design and size to reinforce openings and to
carry loads and vibrations imposed, including equipment furnished under mechanical and
electrical work. Securely attach to structural framing.
J.
Erection Tolerances: Maintain erection tolerances of structural framing within AISC 303.
3.4
METAL PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Examination: Examine primary and secondary framing to verify that structural-panel support
members and anchorages have been installed within alignment tolerances required by
manufacturer. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal panels, to
verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seams before metal panel installation.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
133419 - 7
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
B.
General: Anchor metal panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with
provisions for thermal and structural movement.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Field cut metal panels as required for doors, louvers, and other openings. Cut openings
as small as possible, neatly to size required, and without damage to adjacent metal panel
finishes. Field cutting of metal panels by torch is not permitted unless approved in writing
by manufacturer and approved by the ATC Construction Manager.
Install metal panels perpendicular to structural supports unless otherwise indicated.
Flash and seal metal panels with weather closures at perimeter of openings and similar
elements. Fasten with self-tapping screws.
Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment.
Locate metal panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports with end laps in
alignment.
Lap metal flashing over metal panels to allow moisture to run over and off the material.
C.
Lap-Seam Metal Panels: Install screw fasteners using power tools with controlled torque
adjusted to compress EPDM washers tightly without damage to washers, screw threads, or
metal panels. Install screws in predrilled holes. Arrange and nest side-lap joints so prevailing
winds blow over, not into, lapped joints. Lap ribbed or fluted sheets one full rib corrugation.
Apply metal panels and associated items for neat and weather-tight enclosure. Avoid "panel
creep" or application not true to line.
D.
Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect
against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with corrosion-resistant coating, by applying
rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as
recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.
E.
Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for
weatherproof performance of metal panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and
sealants indicated; or, if not indicated, provide types recommended by metal panel
manufacturer.
1.
2.
3.5
Seal metal panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant the full width of panel.
Seal side joints where recommended by metal panel manufacturer.
Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200 - JOINT
SEALANTS.
METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION
A.
General: Provide metal roof panels of full length from eave to ridge unless otherwise indicated
or restricted by shipping limitations.
1.
2.
B.
Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with concealed clips
at each standing-seam joint, at location and spacing and with fasteners recommended by
manufacturer.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.6
Flash and seal metal roof and wall panels where new panels meet existing building.
Flash and seal metal roof panels with weather closures at eaves and rakes. Fasten with
self-tapping screws.
Install clips to supports with self-drilling or self-tapping fasteners.
Install pressure plates at locations indicated in manufacturer's written installation
instructions.
Joint: Fasten seams and completely engage with sealant, to match existing.
Rigidly fasten eave end of metal roof panels and allow ridge end free movement due to
thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill panels for fasteners.
Provide metal closures at connection to existing construction and rake edges.
METAL WALL PANEL INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install metal wall panels in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated on Drawings.
Install panels perpendicular to girts, extending full height of building, unless otherwise indicated.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
133419 - 8
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
Anchor metal wall panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions
for thermal and structural movement.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
B.
3.7
Unless otherwise indicated, begin metal panel installation at corners with center of rib
lined up with line of framing.
Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal wall panels.
When two rows of metal panels are required, lap panels 4 inches minimum.
When building height requires two rows of metal panels at gable ends, align lap of gable
panels over metal wall panels at eave height.
Rigidly fasten base end of metal wall panels and allow eave end free movement due to
thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill panels.
Flash and seal metal wall panels with weather closures at eaves, rakes, and at perimeter
of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping screws.
Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes.
Install flashing and trim as metal wall panel work proceeds.
Apply elastomeric sealant continuously between metal base channel (sill angle) and
concrete, and elsewhere as indicated; or, if not indicated, as necessary for waterproofing.
Align bottom of metal wall panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-drilling or selftapping screws.
Provide weatherproof escutcheons for pipe and conduit penetrating exterior walls.
Metal Wall Panels: Install metal wall panels on exterior side of girts. Attach metal wall panels
to supports with fasteners as recommended by manufacturer.
DOOR AND FRAME INSTALLATION
A.
3.8
General: Refer to Section 081110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and
provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Accessory components: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written
installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed
fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps,
joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.
1.
2.
3.
3.9
Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly, including trim,
copings, ridge closures, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips,
and similar items.
Install components for a complete metal wall panel assembly, including trim, copings,
corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar
items.
Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against
galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with corrosion-resistant coating, by applying
rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent
separation as recommended by manufacturer.
Flashing and Trim: refer to Section 076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING Louvers: refer to
Section 089000, LOUVERS AND VENTS Locate and place louver units level, plumb, and
at indicated alignment with adjacent work.
Roof Curbs: Install curbs at locations indicated on Drawings. Install flashing around
bases where they meet metal roof panels.
Pipe Flashing: Form flashing around pipe penetration and metal roof panels. Fasten and
seal to panel as recommended by manufacturer.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Independent Testing Agency: Cooperate with the Independent Testing Agency engaged by
ATC for field quality control activities required in Section 014320, “Quality Control, Testing and
Special Inspection Services.” Provide at least 48 hours notice to testing agency prior to the time
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
133419 - 9
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
testing and/or inspection is required. Allow inspectors access to work areas, as needed to
perform inspections.
B.
3.10
Tests and Inspections: Engage Independent Testing Agency in accordance with Section 014320
“Quality Control, Testing and Special Inspection Services.” for testing of listed properties.
ADJUSTING
A.
Doors: After completing installation, test and adjust doors to operate easily, free of warp, twist,
or distortion.
B.
Door Hardware: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to
ensure proper operation and function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to
operate as intended.
3.11
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Repair damaged galvanized coatings on galvanized items with galvanized repair paint
according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged
during construction period.
C.
Touchup Painting: After erection, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field
connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted structural framing, bearing
plates, and accessories.
1.
2.
D.
Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning," or by SSPC-SP 3,
"Power Tool Cleaning."
Apply a compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent surfaces.
Metal Panels: Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal
panels are installed. On completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as
recommended by metal panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.
1.
Replace metal panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful
repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
133419 - 10
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
SECTION 133430
PRE-FABRICATED CONCRETE SHELTERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
1.2
Attention is directed to all Sections within DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which
are hereby made a part of this Section of the Specifications.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1.
2.
B.
Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1.
1.3
Pre-fabricated concrete telecom shelters.
Field Erectable lightweight shelters for minor DAS remote locations.
Section 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE for installing anchor bolts.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Delegated Design: Design precast concrete assemblies, including comprehensive engineering
analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design
criteria indicated.
B.
All shop drawings shall be prepared under the supervision of a Professional Engineer registered
in the project location. All calculations are to be stamped and signed by a Professional
Engineer registered in the project location.
C.
Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice
in the jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering
services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for
installations of precast concrete buildings that are similar to those indicated for the Project in
material, design, and extent.
D.
Structural Performance: Work shall conform to the latest editions of the following design codes
and standards. In case of conflict between referenced specifications and ATC Master
Specifications, ATC Master Specifications shall govern.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
E.
Local, State and Federal Building Code.
American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM): Standards as referenced in this Section.
Prestressed Concrete Institute (PCI) Publication MNL-1115, “Manual for Quality Control
for Plants and Production of Precast and Prestressed Concrete Products.”
American Concrete Institute (ACI) publications as listed in Section 033000.
American Welding Society (AWS), Standard D1.1, “Structural Welding Code.”
Design standard precast concrete units to withstand design load conditions in accordance with
the applicable industry design standards. Design must also consider stresses induced during
handling, shipping, and installation in order to avoid product cracking or other handling damage.
Design loads for precast concrete units shall be indicated on the shop drawings.
PRE-FABRICATED CONCRETE SHELTERS
133430 - 1
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Upon request, the precast concrete producer shall include proper installation
instructions and relevant product data for items including, but not limited to anchors, lifting
inserts and other devices, sealants, gaskets, pipe entry connectors, steps, racks, and other
items installed before or after delivery.
B.
Shop Drawings: The precast, prestressed concrete manufacturer shall furnish and submit for
approval complete shop drawings for all members. Fabrication of members shall not proceed
until shop drawings are approved by ATC Construction Manager. The Contractor shall be
responsible for the coordination of the various trades with this work.
1.
Provide location and details for anchorage devices that are to be connected to the
foundation.
2.
If Modular units, include erection procedure for precast units, sequence of erection, and
required handling equipment.
3.
All inserts, hangers, pipe sleeves, blockouts, etc., required by various trades as indicated,
located and detailed on the final approved drawings, will be cast as such, and any
omissions or change in location or details by the Contractor of the various trades shall be
done at the expense of the Contractor.
C.
Delegated Design Submittal: Supply sealed shop drawings, fabrication drawings, and full
detailed calculations. Comply with all performance requirements and design criteria, including
analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
preparation. Include typical units and all special conditions and anchorage details for approval
with the shop drawings.
D.
Certificates
1.
2.
E.
Test Reports:
1.
2.
1.5
Submit evidence of current plant certification under the PCI Plant Certification Program.
Submit records of tensioning, concrete, and calibrations as required by PCI MNL-116, as
well as manufacturer’s written certifications for materials, as required by PCI MNL-116.
Upon request, the precast concrete producer shall submit copies of test reports showing
that the mix has been successfully tested to produce concrete with the properties
specified and will be suitable for the project conditions. Such tests may include
compressive strength, plastic air content, temperature of freshly mixed concrete, and
slump of freshly mixed concrete.
Upon request, the precast concrete producer shall supply copies of in-plant QA/QC
inspection reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications
1.
2.
3.
B.
The precast concrete manufacturing plant shall be certified by the Precast/Prestressed
Concrete Institute’s Plant Certification Program, prior to the start of the production.
All precast concrete work shall be produced in an existing production facility by a
fabricator who has been regularly and customarily engaged in the manufacture of precast
concrete products.
Fabricator shall have sufficient production capacity to produce the required units without
causing any delay in the work.
Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, design calculations, and other
structural data by a qualified professional engineer.
PRE-FABRICATED CONCRETE SHELTERS
133430 - 2
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
C.
1.6
Fabricate and erect precast members within the tolerances recommended in PCI MNL-116 for
the application type of member.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.7
Protect shelter from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and
handling. Only place shelter on the foundation specifically installed for that shelter at delivery.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate installation of anchorages for shelters. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items
with integral anchors that are to be embedded in concrete. Deliver such items to Project site in
time for installation.
B.
Coordinate shelter dimensions and anchorage locations with civil and foundation drawings for
foundation size and dimensions, stoop locations matching the door location, and utility stub up
locations.
1.8
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish
or replace systems that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
1.9
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Handling: Precast concrete units shall be handled and transported in a manner to minimize
damage. Lifting devices or holes shall be consistent with industry standards. Lifting shall be
accomplished with methods or devices intended for this purpose as indicated on the shop
drawings. Upon request, the precast concrete producer shall provide documentation on
acceptable handling methods for the product.
B.
Storage: Precast concrete units shall be stored in a manner that will minimize potential damage.
C.
Delivery: Precast concrete units shall not be shipped until they have reached at least 70% of
their specified 28-day design strength. Precast concrete units shall be delivered to the site in
accordance with the delivery schedule. Upon delivery to the jobsite, all precast concrete units
shall be inspected by the Contractor for quality and final acceptance and placed directly on the
shelter foundation. Shelters shall not be temporarily stored on location.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PREFABRICATED SHELTERS, GENERAL
A.
General: Provide a complete, integrated set of mutually dependent components that form a
completely assembled, prefabricated shelter, ready for installation on Project site.
1.
2.
Configuration: As indicated on Drawings.
Doors: As indicated on Drawings.
B.
Building Dimensions: Shall match that of the approved drawings with a maximum footprint of
600 square feet with an eave height of 10 feet or less, unless otherwise noted by the plans and
the ATC Construction manager.
C.
Delegated Design Loading:
1.
Floor Load: 250psf
PRE-FABRICATED CONCRETE SHELTERS
133430 - 3
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Roof Load: 135psf
Ground Snow Load: 161psf (for winter climates)
Walls: 150 mph (where applicable)
Seismic Zone: 4, Category: E (where applicable)
Construction Type:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Floor: 5 ¾” lightweight concrete, waffle-type construction
Walls: 4” solid lightweight concrete; 2 – Hour Fire-rated Construction per UBC
Roof: solid lightweight concrete, 4” at eaves and 5” at ridge, gable design
Step-joint floor perimeter design
5000 psi lightweight concrete
Reinforcing steel #4 & #6 bars; 60,000 psi (Grade 60 ASTM-615)
Ballistics tested for U.L.752 Level IV (HPR - 30.06 – Point Blank Range)
Walls: washed exposed aggregate and sealed exterior finish
Roof: troweled surface, sealed and liquid applied roofing membrane
Walls: R-13 (no less than required by locally accepted energy code)
Ceiling: R-19 (no less than required by locally accepted energy code)
E.
Doors and Frames: Shall comply with Steel Door Institute “Recommended Specifications for
Standard Steel Doors and Frames” (SDI-100) and as herein specified. Doors and frames shall
be bonderized and painted one coat of rust inhibitive primer and one finish coat of enamel paint.
F.
Electrical Power Service: Service, wires, and panels shall be provided as shown on the
drawings; Run copper wiring in 1/2-inch EMT conduit. Provide one 120-V ground-fault circuit
interrupter (GFCI) power receptacle.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
G.
Lighting Fixtures:
1.
2.
3.
H.
Six (6) interior fluorescent light fixture, 32 watt, 2 bulb, 4 ft., T-8 with electronic ballast and
wrap-around lens cover
One (1) exterior light fixture, incandescent, 100watt, w/motion detector or equivalent
One (1) interior light switch, 120v, 15 amp
Cooling Unit:
1.
2.
3.
I.
One (1) loadcenter, 40 space, main breaker, coordinate voltage, size and phase with
drawings. NEMA 1, Square D, QO140M200 & cover or equivalent, breakers as required
One (1) surge arrestor, 1phase, MOV only, Transtector, 120TMR, 1101-808-1-MM or
equivalent
One (1) Manual transfer switch and generator plug, coordinate voltage, size and phase
with drawings
One (1) 3” sleeved ac power entry
Six (6) duplex receptacles, 125v, 20 amp, NEMA 5-20R, Leviton, CR20V-BU or
equivalent– wall mounted
Eight (8) quad receptacle, 125v, 20amp, NEMA5-20R, Leviton, CR20V-BU or equivalent
– ceiling mounted above equipment racks
One (1) exterior GFCI receptacle, 125v, 20 amp, NEMA 5-20R, Cooper VGF20V or
equivalent in weather proof box & cover
Two (2) wall mounted HVAC unit, 36,000 BTU, 410A refrigerant,
#AVPA36ACA050NU-A1-100 with built-in economizer or equivalent
One (1) lead lag controller, Marvair, Commstat 4 or matching equivalent
HVAC supply and return grilles
Alarms:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
All alarm conductors pulled to terminal block and terminated
One (1) alarm block, Siemon, S66M1-50 or equivalent
One (1) high temperature, Dayton, 1UUH2 or equivalent
One (1) low temperature, Dayton, 1UUH2 or equivalent
One(1) door intrusion alarm, magnetic contact
PRE-FABRICATED CONCRETE SHELTERS
133430 - 4
Marvair,
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
6.
7.
8.
J.
Cable ladder: Provide a cable ladder within the shelter. Coordinate with the site drawings.
1.
2.
3.
4.
K.
One (1) 16-hole, 4” diameter Microflect waveguide entry, 4x4 configuration with sealing
caps
Coordinate with drawings; linear feet of 1 ½” x 18” wide tubular cable ladder, gold
chromate, with appropriate hangers and mounting hardware
One (1) telco board, 4’ x 4’ x ¾”, white
One (1) 2” penetration for communications cable
Grounding: Provide a full grounding halo, holes for ground leads and ground bars at port; inside
and out.
1.
2.
3.
2.2
One (1) smoke detector, ionization, 120vac, Kidde, 3KN56 or equivalent
One (1) ac power failure relay
HVAC fail alarm
Halo ground, #2 green insulated stranded copper around inside perimeter of building with
(4) #2 green insulated stranded copper drops – 6 feet of extra wire coiled for attachment
to site ground ring
Two (2) ¼” x 4” x 20” copper ground bars, mounted on insulators/standoff – one interior
and one exterior
Four (4) 1” diameter PVC penetrations through wall for ground exit
FIELD ERECTABLE SHELTERS FOR DAS REMOTE UNITS
A.
General: Provide a complete, integrated set of mutually dependent components that form a
completely assembled, prefabricated shelter, ready for installation on Project site.
1.
2.
Configuration: As indicated on Drawings.
Doors: As indicated on Drawings.
B.
Building Dimensions: Shall match that of the approved drawings with a maximum footprint of
600 square feet with an eave height of 10 feet or less, unless otherwise noted by the plans and
the ATC Construction manager.
C.
Delegated Design Loading:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Floor Load: Utilize existing floor or install keyway slab by contractor.
Roof Load: 90psf
Ground Snow Load: 111psf (for winter climates)
Walls: 150 mph (where applicable)
Seismic Zone: 4, Category: E (where applicable)
Construction Type:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Construction shall meet required fire rating for the site specific installation.
Floor/Frame: N/A – customer to provide a keyway slab foundation to serve as floor
Walls: 3 5/8” x16” x 18 gauge interlocking galvanized steel panels with internal locking
mechanism; exterior wrapped in 6.5mil air infiltration barrier (tyvek); non-combustible wall
construction; (1) layers of 5/8” gypsum on interior
Roof: tapered 12” x 18gauge interlocking galvanized steel panels with internal locking
mechanism; standing seam exterior, (1) layer of 5/8” gypsum on interior
Exterior wall finish: exterior aggregate panels
Insulation: walls/ceiling, overall R-11 rating
E.
Doors and Frames: Shall comply with Steel Door Institute “Recommended Specifications for
Standard Steel Doors and Frames” (SDI-100) and as herein specified. Doors and frames shall
be bonderized and painted one coat of rust inhibitive primer and one finish coat of enamel paint.
F.
Electrical Power Service: Service, wires, and panels shall be provided as shown on the
drawings; Run copper wiring in 1/2-inch EMT conduit. Provide one 120-V ground-fault circuit
interrupter (GFCI) power receptacle.
PRE-FABRICATED CONCRETE SHELTERS
133430 - 5
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
G.
Lighting Fixtures:
1.
2.
3.
H.
2.
3.
2.
3.
4.
One (1) 16-hole, 4” diameter Microflect waveguide entry, 4x4 configuration with sealing
caps
Coordinate with drawings; linear feet of 1 ½” x 18” wide tubular cable ladder, gold
chromate, with appropriate hangers and mounting hardware
One (1) telco board, 4’ x 4’ x ¾”, white
One (1) 2” penetration for communications cable
Grounding: Provide a full grounding halo, holes for ground leads and ground bars at port; inside
and out.
1.
2.
3.
2.3
All alarm conductors pulled to terminal block and terminated
One (1) alarm block, Siemon, S66M1-50 or equivalent
One (1) high temperature, Dayton, 1UUH2 or equivalent
One (1) low temperature, Dayton, 1UUH2 or equivalent
One(1) door intrusion alarm, magnetic contact
One (1) smoke detector, ionization, 120vac, Kidde, 3KN56 or equivalent
One (1) ac power failure relay
HVAC fail alarm
Cable ladder: Provide a cable ladder within the shelter. Coordinate with the site drawings.
1.
K.
Two (2) wall mounted HVAC unit, 20,000 BTU, 410A refrigerant, Marvair, with built-in
economizer or equivalent
One (1) lead lag controller, Marvair, Commstat 4 or matching equivalent
HVAC supply and return grilles
Alarms:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
J.
Two (2) interior fluorescent light fixture, 32 watt, 2 bulb, 4 ft., T-8 with electronic ballast
and wrap-around lens cover
One (1) exterior light fixture, incandescent, 100watt, w/motion detector or equivalent
One (1) interior light switch, 120v, 15 amp
Cooling Unit:
1.
I.
One (1) loadcenter, 20 space, main breaker, coordinate voltage, size and phase with
drawings. NEMA 1, Square D, QO140M200 & cover or equivalent, breakers as required
One (1) surge arrestor, 1phase, MOV only, Transtector, 120TMR, 1101-808-1-MM or
equivalent
One (1) 3” sleeved ac power entry
Five (5) duplex receptacles, 125v, 20 amp, NEMA 5-20R, Leviton, CR20V-BU or
equivalent– wall mounted
Eight (8) quad receptacle, 125v, 20amp, NEMA5-20R, Leviton, CR20V-BU or equivalent
– ceiling mounted above equipment racks
One (1) exterior GFCI receptacle, 125v, 20 amp, NEMA 5-20R, Cooper VGF20V or
equivalent in weather proof box & cover
Halo ground, #2 green insulated stranded copper around inside perimeter of building with
(4) #2 green insulated stranded copper drops – 6 feet of extra wire coiled for attachment
to site ground ring
Two (2) ¼” x 4” x 20” copper ground bars, mounted on insulators/standoff – one interior
and one exterior
Four (4) 1” diameter PVC penetrations through wall for ground exit
PREFABRICATED SHELTERS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Fibrebond Corporation
PRE-FABRICATED CONCRETE SHELTERS
133430 - 6
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.4
Oldcastle Precast, Inc.
Kullman
CSI Shelter Technologies, Inc.
Miller-Brick
Precision Quincy Shelters, Inc.
FABRICATION
A.
Manufacturing procedures shall be in general compliance with PCI MNL-116.
B.
All concrete shall be chamfered or rounded at sharp edges. Chamfered or radius shall be a
minimum of one-half inch (½”).
C.
Fabricate shelters completely in factory.
D.
Install doors at factory.
E.
Prewire shelters at factory, ready for connection to service at Project site.
F.
Finishes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.5
Interior of Building: Walls and Ceiling: White high density polyethylene (NRP) over 5/8”
OSB
Exterior of Building: As indicated or from manufacturer’s standard finish options.
Form casting against approved forms shall use good industry practice in cleaning of
forms, design of concrete mix placing, and curing. Small surface holes caused by air
bubbles, normal color variations, normal form joint marks, and minor chips and spalls
shall be tolerated, but no major or unsightly imperfections, honeycomb, or other defects
shall be permitted. All air pockets and holes over one-quarter inch (¼”) in diameter shall
be filled with sand/cement paste. All form offsets or fins over one-eighth inch (1/8”) shall
be ground smooth.
Openings: The manufacturer shall provide for any opening that is three inches (3”) or
larger, round or rectangular. Other openings shall be located and field-drilled, or cut by
the trade requiring them after the precast, prestressed concrete products have been
erected. No reinforcing bars shall be cut or damaged in the process. Openings shall be
approved by ATC Construction Manager before drilling or cutting.
Patching of defects will not be allowed without approval by ATC Construction Manager on
each occasion.
Floor: 1/8” x 12” x 12” commercial grade vinyl tile with 4” base cove
MATERIALS
A.
Cement shall be Portland Cement conforming to ASTM Specification C150 - Type III.
B.
Aggregates shall consist of sand and gravel conforming to ASTM Specification C33 - 80. Size
of coarse aggregate shall meet spacing requirements of prestressing steel and/or reinforcing
steel. The size of aggregate shall not exceed one inch (1”).
C.
Reinforcing steel shall be new billet steel conforming to ASTM Specification A615 Grade 60.
Welded wire fabric shall conform to ASTM Specification A185. Prestressing strand shall be
uncoated, seven-wire (7-wire) strand and shall conform to the ASTM Specification A416, Grade
270.
D.
Grout shall conform to ASTM Specification C476.
E.
Admixtures shall conform to the requirements of Section 033000.
F.
Bearing pads shall be Polyethylene Plastic ASTM D1248 IIIA. Surface shall be non-skid with
friction coefficient of 1.2 with concrete.
G.
Anchors and Inserts Finish
PRE-FABRICATED CONCRETE SHELTERS
133430 - 7
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
1. Shop primer: Manufacturer’s standards.
2. Hot dip galvanized ASTM A153.
3. Zinc-rich coating MIL-P-21035, self-curing, one component, sacrificial.
H.
Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
I.
Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.
2.6
CONCRETE MIXTURES
A.
Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash and pozzolan as needed to reduce the total amount of
portland cement, which would otherwise be used, by not less than 40 percent. Limit
percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as
follows:
1. Fly Ash: 25 percent.
2. Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent.
B.
Precast and/or prestressed concrete: Normal-weight concrete.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Minimum Compressive Strength (28 days): 5000 psi
Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.45
Air Content: 6 percent plus or minus 1.5 percent for 3/4-inch nominal maximum
aggregate size.
Grout. 5000 psi at twenty-eight (28) days.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
The Contractor shall inspect the work prepared by other trades to receive the Work of this
Section and shall correct any installation-related defects. Proceed with installation only after
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Commencement of work will be construed as
complete acceptance of preparatory work by others.
B.
Damaged, cracked, or chipped units shall be satisfactorily repaired and patched if structurally
and architecturally acceptable. ATC Construction Manager shall be sole judge as to
acceptability, and its decision shall be final. The manufacturer assumes responsibility for any
damage or impairment of the precast units. All exposed-to-view units shall be cleaned to obtain
a uniform finish.
3.2
ERECTION
A.
Contractor shall be responsible for providing suitable access to the site, proper drainage, and
firm, level bearing for the hauling and erection equipment to operate under their own power.
B.
Units shall be shipped and erected by the Manufacturer or a competent erector. All units shall
be carefully erected by fully experienced workmen in proper sequence, plumb, and square.
C.
All units shall be erected with particular care both with regard to damage to the exposed exterior
surface of the members and with regard to their tolerances in respect to line, plane, and
elevation of adjacent units.
D.
The fabricator and erector, or a responsible representative, shall check the acceptability of the
bearing surfaces before starting any erection and shall accept them in written form as being
satisfactory for his purpose. The fabricator and erector assume full responsibility for the
placement of all units as to alignment, evenness, and level in top and bottom surfaces.
PRE-FABRICATED CONCRETE SHELTERS
133430 - 8
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
E.
All members shall be adequately braced during and after erection until all final connections are
made. Take adequate precautions for crane, lines, slings, and all other lifting devices to prevent
failure.
F.
Grout or bearing pads required at slabs for setting or precast concrete members shall be of final
thickness as required, with spaces between contact areas completely filled. Grout mix shall be
1:2 Portland Cement and fine masonry sand. Bearing pads shall be plastic strips located under
all bearing points on masonry walls.
G.
All recesses and openings for anchorage devices shall be filled with grout and leveled flush with
adjacent concrete surfaces.
H.
Install shelters according to manufacturer's written instructions.
I.
Set shelters plumb and aligned. Level baseplates true to plane with full bearing on concrete
bases.
J.
Fasten shelters securely to cast-in anchor bolts.
K.
Connect electrical power service to power distribution system according to requirements
specified in Division 26 Sections.
3.3
GROUTING
A.
Shear keys and joints shall be grouted with an approved non-shrink material and shall interlock
the grouted units completely.
B.
Joints shall be level and shall be clean and free from all debris and dirt before grouting.
C.
Dampen surfaces to be grouted.
3.4
FIELD WELDING
A.
3.5
Field welding is to be done by qualified welders using equipment and materials compatible to
the base material.
ATTACHMENTS
A.
3.6
Precast, prestressed concrete products may be drilled provided that no contact is made with the
prestressing steel, and that non-prestressed steel is not damaged. Should spalling occur, it
shall be repaired by the trade doing the drilling.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Independent Testing Agency: Cooperate with the Independent Testing Agency engaged by
ATC for field quality control activities required in Section 014320, “Quality Control, Testing and
Special Inspection Services.” Provide at least 48 hours notice to testing agency prior to the time
testing and/or inspection is required. Allow inspectors access to work areas, as needed to
perform inspections.
B.
Tests and Inspections: Engage Independent Testing Agency in accordance with Section 014320
“Quality Control, Testing and Special Inspection Services.” for testing of listed properties.
3.7
REPAIRS, ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION
A.
Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and
installed assemblies with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's
written instructions.
PRE-FABRICATED CONCRETE SHELTERS
133430 - 9
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
B.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
installer that ensures that assemblies are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion.
C.
Adjust doors and hardware to operate smoothly, easily, properly, and without binding. Confirm
that locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding.
D.
Lubricate hardware and other moving parts.
E.
After completing installation, inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes.
END OF SECTION
PRE-FABRICATED CONCRETE SHELTERS
133430 - 10
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
SECTION 230000
HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING FOR TOWER SITES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
1.2
Attention is directed to all Sections within DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which
are hereby made a part of this Section of the Specifications.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1.
2.
B.
Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and will be performed under
the designated Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Alterations, additions and/or removal of existing HVAC systems within the renovated area
in order to conform to new space requirements.
New HVAC systems for new stand-alone telecom equipment rooms.
Section 033000 – CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE for cutting and patching of concrete
walls and for concrete equipment pads, manhole and thrust block requirements.
Section 092110 – GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES for coordination with gypsum ceilings
and walls.
Section 260000 - ELECTRICAL WORK FOR TOWER SITES for electrical power to
mechanical equipment as indicated on the Drawings.
Division 31 – EARTHWORK for excavation and backfilling.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Work shall be neat and rectilinear.
Install material and equipment as required by
manufacturers. Installation shall operate safely and without leakage, undue wear, noise,
vibration or corrosion. Work shall be properly and effectively protected.
B.
Except as specified otherwise, material and equipment shall be new. Provide supplies,
equipment and connections necessary for complete and operational installation.
C.
Perform work strictly as required by rules, regulations, standards, codes, ordinances, and laws
of local, state, and Federal governments, and other authorities that have legal jurisdiction over
the site. Materials and equipment shall be manufactured, installed and tested as specified in
latest editions of applicable publications, standards, rulings and determinations of:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Local and state building, plumbing, mechanical, electrical, fire and health department
codes.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
American Insurance Association (A.I.A.) (formerly National Board of Fire Underwriters).
Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA).
Factory Mutual Association (FM).
Underwriters’ Laboratories (UL).
American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).
HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING FOR DAS SITES
230000 - 1
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
D.
1.4
Do not interrupt existing services without the ATC Construction Manager’s written approval. For
work in existing facilities, interruptions shall be scheduled at such times of day and work so that
they have minimal impact on the facility operations.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An experienced HVAC system installer who specializes in installing
work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated. Installer shall be licensed in the
jurisdiction where the project is located as required by the local jurisdiction.
B.
Confirm that units will not interfere with “Quiet Enjoyment” of tenant spaces adjacent to and
below the proposed units.
C.
Compliance: ARI 210,360; ASHRAE 15; ASME Code
D.
Warranty: Warranty for HVAC components shall begin when the unit is delivered.
1.5
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with
HVAC systems by field measurements before.
B.
Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the
Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal fabrications without field
measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that actual
dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
C.
Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.7
Store materials in a manner that will maintain an orderly clean appearance. If stored on site in
open or unprotected areas, all equipment and material shall be kept off the ground by means of
pallets or racks, and covered with tarpaulins.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacture’s product data and installation instructions for each material
and product used.
B.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer’s operation and maintenance data,
including operating instructions, list of spare parts and maintenance schedule.
1.8
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate air handlers and condensers with architectural, civil, structural electrical and
mechanical drawings for location, orientation, mounting, power, condensate pumps and drain
locations, ducting, etc. details.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ANCHORS
A.
Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain, without failure,
a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the
load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488,
HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING FOR DAS SITES
230000 - 2
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. Inserts shall be iron or steel of type to
receive machine bolt head or nut after installation. Inserts shall permit adjustment of bolt in one
horizontal direction and shall develop strength of bolt when installed in properly cured concrete
Acceptable Manufacturers: Kwik-Bolt 3 by Hilti, Inc., TruBolt Wedge Anchor by ITW Red Head
or Power-Stud by Powers Fasteners.
2.2
SELF-CONTAINED AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
A.
Provide self-contained air conditioning units of size and capacity as shown on Drawings, wall
pack or roof mounted. Units shall be by Carrier, Marvair, Trane, McQuay, York or approved
equal. Units shall be of one piece packaged construction, completely assembled, wired, factory
tested. Provide operating charge of refrigerant.
B.
Provide hermetic compressor suction gas cooled with forced feed lubrication and internal motor
winding protection.
C.
Color code wires not visible in basic control panel except those connected directly to three
phase motors.
D.
Evaporator coil shall be embossed aluminum fins mechanically bonded to seamless prime
surface copper tubing. Minimum rows shall be four.
E.
Condenser shall be air cooled with aluminum plate fins mechanically bonded to seamless ACR
copper tubing. Condenser air shall be drawn through and discharged from rear face of unit.
Blowers shall be of double inlet centrifugal type capable of discharging through ducting without
sacrificing capacity.
F.
Provide forward curved centrifugal fans. Blowers shall run on permanently lubricated bearings
with Fibrex V belt drive and variable pitch fan motor pulleys.
G.
Provide low voltage controls, branch circuit fuse protection, compressor motor protection and
high low pressure switch(es). Single overload protection or fusing of more than one motor will
not be acceptable; each motor shall be supplied with individual overload protection.
H.
Cabinet shall be 14 gauge cold rolled steel, thermally and acoustically insulated and finished
with two coats of smooth baked enamel. Provide access panels for serviceable components.
I.
Arrange electrical control and compressor sections so that electrical and refrigeration analysis
can be accomplished without disturbing normal airflow over heat transfer surfaces. Provide
fittings to attach gauges to read suction and discharge pressures without loss of refrigerant.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Obtain and follow detailed installation information from manufacturers of equipment provided
under this Section.
B.
Installation Only Items
1.
Where this contractor is required to install items which it does not purchase, it shall
coordinate their delivery and be responsible for their unloading from delivery vehicles and
for their safe handling and field storage up to the time of installation. This trade shall be
responsible for:
a.
Any necessary field assembly and internal connections, as well as mounting in
place of the items, including the purchase and installation of all dunnage
HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING FOR DAS SITES
230000 - 3
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
2.
supporting members and fastenings necessary to adapt them to architectural and
structural conditions.
b.
Their connection to building systems including the purchase and installation of all
terminating fittings necessary to adapt and connect them to the building systems.
This contractor shall carefully examine such items upon delivery. Claims that any of
these items have been received in such condition that their installation will require
procedures beyond the reasonable scope of work of this contractor will be considered
only if presented in writing within one week of their date of delivery. Unless such claims
have been submitted this contractor shall be fully responsible for the complete
reconditioning or replacement of the damaged items.
C.
Anchors and Inserts: Inserts shall be iron or steel of type to receive machine bolt head or nut
after installation. Inserts shall permit adjustment of bolt in one horizontal direction and shall
develop strength of bolt when installed in properly cured concrete. Provide anchors as
necessary for attachment of equipment supports and hangars.
D.
Equipment
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.2
Install materials and system in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved
submittals.
Avoid interference with structure and with work of other trades, preserving adequate
headroom and clearing doors and passageways in accordance with code requirements.
Installation shall permit clearance for designed air flow patterns, access to equipment for
repair, servicing and replacement.
Install equipment so as to properly distribute equipment loads structural members
provided for equipment support.
Provide suspended platforms, strap hangers, brackets, shelves, stands or legs as
necessary for floor, wall or ceiling mounting of equipment provided under this Section.
Provide steel supports and hardware for proper installation of hangers, anchors, guides,
etc.
Charge the HVAC system, test for leaks, and verify the unit is fully operational. Clearly
label and tag all components. Test and balance all systems for proper operation. Remove
and replace units which do not operate properly at no additional expense to company.
Restore damaged finishes. Clean and protect work from damage.
PENETRATIONS AND SLEEVES
A.
General
1.
2.
3.
B.
Pipe Sleeves
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Provide pipe and duct sleeves and packing materials at penetrations of foundations,
walls, slabs (except on grade), partitions and floors. Sleeves shall meet NFPA 101.
Provide core drilling as necessary if walls are poured, or otherwise constructed, without
sleeves and a wall penetration is required. Provide core drilling as required for
penetrations of existing construction. Do not penetrate structural members without ATC
approval.
Sleeves for insulated pipe and duct in non-fire rated construction shall accommodate
continuous insulation without compression. Sleeves and/or penetrations in fire rated
construction shall be packed with fire rated material which shall maintain the fire rating of
the wall. Seal ends of penetrations to provide continuous vapor barrier where insulation
is interrupted. Sleeves through floors shall be water tight and shall extend 2" above floor
surface.
Annular space between pipe and sleeve shall be at least 1/4".
Sleeves are not required for slabs on grade unless specified otherwise.
Sleeves and packing materials, through rated fire walls and smoke partitions shall
maintain fire rating of construction penetrated.
Do not support piping risers on sleeves.
Installation Testing, Listings and Approvals
HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING FOR DAS SITES
230000 - 4
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
1.
3.3
Installation shall meet material manufacturer's recommendations exactly, particularly as
regards safety, ventilation, removal of foreign materials and other details of installation.
Dam openings as recommended. Remove flammable materials used for damming and
forming seals in fire rated construction.
STARTUP, TESTING AND BALANCING
A.
General
1.
2.
3.
3.4
Provide qualified personnel, equipment, apparatus and services for startup, testing and
balancing of mechanical systems, to performance data shown in schedules, as specified,
and as required by codes, standards, regulations and authorities having jurisdiction..
Leaks, damage and defects discovered or resulting from startup, testing and balancing
shall be repaired or replaced to like new condition with acceptable materials. Tests shall
be continued until system operates without adjustments or repairs.
Qualified representative of equipment manufacturer shall be present at test.
PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A.
Replace filters prior to final inspection and testing.
B.
Remove and dispose of dirt and debris, and keep premises reasonably clean. Upon completion
of work, remove equipment and unused material. Put building and premises in neat and clean
condition, and do cleaning and washing required to provide acceptable appearance and
operation of equipment.
C.
Provide 4 spare filters for each unit installed.
END OF SECTION
HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING FOR DAS SITES
230000 - 5
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
SECTION 260000
ELECTRICAL WORK FOR TOWER SITES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
1.2
Attention is directed to all Sections within DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which
are hereby made a part of this Section of the Specifications.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1.3
Primary electric service make ready work including but not limited to conduit(s), hand
holes, pull boxes, risers, transformer base and grounding.
Secondary electric service including underground conduit(s) and secondary service
entrance feeders from the utility company transformer, service main disconnect multigang meter bank, grounding, and electrical distribution.
All lighting systems (indoor and outdoor) including all fixtures, lamps, mounting
accessories, switches, controls, outlets, wiring, raceways, monitoring equipment, FAA
tower lighting and all other components and fittings required for a complete lighting
system.
Wiring devices (switches and receptacles) complete with associated wall plates.
Testing of all electrical systems.
Emergency distribution system including diesel generator, automatic transfer switch,
panelboards, and all other components required for a complete system.
Coordination between electrical and other trades.
All other systems hereinafter specified or indicated on the Contract Drawings, complete,
leaving ready an electrical system in perfect operating condition.
Lightning protection system.
SURVEYS AND MEASUREMENTS
A.
1.4
Base all required measurements, both horizontal and vertical, on reference points established
by the ATC Construction Manager and be responsible for the correct laying out of the electrical
work. In the event of a discrepancy between actual measurements and those indicated, notify
the ATC Construction Manager in writing, and do not proceed with the work required until
written instructions have been issued by the ATC Construction Manager.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Follow manufacturer's directions for articles furnished, in addition to directions shown on
drawings or specified herein.
B.
Protect all work, materials, and equipment from damage during process of work. Replace all
damaged or defective work, materials and equipment without additional cost to ATC.
C.
All equipment and materials for permanent installation shall be the products of recognized
manufacturers and shall be new.
D.
Equipment and materials shall:
ELECTRICAL WORK FOR TOWER SITES
260000 - 1
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Where normally subject to Underwriters Laboratory Inc. listing or labeling services, be so
listed or labeled.
Be without blemish or defect.
Not be used for temporary light and power purposes.
Be in accordance with the latest applicable NEMA standards.
Be products which will meet with the acceptance of all authorities having jurisdiction over
the work. Where such acceptance is contingent upon having the products examined,
tested and certified by Underwriters or other recognized testing laboratory, the product
shall be so examined, tested and certified.
E.
Except for conduit, conduit fittings, outlet boxes, wire and cable, all items of equipment or
material of one generic type shall be the product of one manufacturer throughout.
F.
For items which are to be installed but not purchased as part of the electrical work, the electrical
work shall include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
G.
1.5
The coordination of their delivery.
Their unloading from delivery trucks driven into any point on the property line at grade
level.
Their safe handling and field storage up to the time of permanent placement in the
project.
The correction of any damage, defacement or corrosion to which they may have been
subjected. Replacement if necessary shall be coordinated with Contractor who originally
purchased the item.
Their field make up and internal wiring as may be necessary for their proper operation.
Their mounting in place including the purchase and installation of all dunnage, supporting
members, and fastenings necessary to adapt them to architectural and structural
conditions.
Their connection to the wiring system including the purchase and installation of all
termination junction boxes necessary to adapt and connect them to this wiring. Included
also shall be the purchase and installation of any substitute lugs or other wiring
terminations as may be necessary to adapt their terminals to the wiring system as called
for and to the connection methods set forth in these specifications.
Items which are to be installed but not purchased as part of the electric work shall be carefully
examined upon delivery to the project. Claims that any of these items have been received in
such condition that their installation will require procedures beyond the reasonable scope of the
electric work will be considered only if presented in writing within one week of the date of
delivery to the project of the items in question. The electric work includes all procedures,
regardless of how extensive, necessary to put into satisfactory operation, all items for which no
claims have been submitted as outlined above.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
1.6
All materials for the work of this section shall be delivered, stored and handled so as to preclude
damage of any nature. Manufactured materials shall be delivered and stored in their original
containers, plainly marked with the products' and manufacturer's name. Materials in broken
containers or in packages showing watermarks or other evidence of damage, shall not be used
and shall be removed from the site.
TEMPORARY POWER AND LIGHTING
A.
If required, the Contractor shall furnish and install feeders of sufficient size from the Utility
Company's power lines for the electric light and power requirements for the site while under
construction and until the permanent feeders and related equipment have been installed and
are in operation. The Contractor is responsible to provide and pay for adequate power and
lighting on the job site for the duration of project. This may include the use of a temporary
generator.
ELECTRICAL WORK FOR TOWER SITES
260000 - 2
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
B.
All necessary transformers, meters, cables, panelboards, switches, temporary lamp
replacements and accessories required for the temporary light and power installation shall be
provided by the Electrical Subcontractor.
C.
All temporary electrical work shall meet the requirements of the National Electrical Code Article
305 Temporary Wiring, the Local Utility Company, and all Federal Standards and Laws.
D.
All temporary wiring and accessories thereto installed by the Contractor shall be removed after
their purposes have been served.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Product specifications are written in such a manner so as to specify what materials may be
used in a particular location or application and therefore do not indicate what is not acceptable
or suitable for a particular location or application. As an example: non-metallic sheathed cable
is not specified; therefore, it is not acceptable.
B.
On all tower sites unless direct otherwise Contractor shall furnish and install a 600 amp main
disconnect and a four (4) gang meter bank. Square D, Cutler Hammer or approved equal
C.
For purpose of establishing a standard of quality and not for purpose of limiting competition, the
basis of this Specification is upon specified models and types of equipment and materials, as
manufactured by specified manufacturers.
D.
In all cases, standard cataloged materials and systems have been selected. Materials such as
lighting fixtures specially manufactured for this particular project and not part of a manufacturers
standard product line will not be acceptable. In the case of systems, the system components
shall be from a single source regularly engaged in supplying such systems. A proposed system
made up of a collection of various manufacturers products will be unacceptable.
E.
All materials shall be new and shall be UL listed.
2.2
RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
A.
Raceways - General:
1.
2.
For the purposes of this specification section, all of the following shall be considered to be
raceway whether metallic or nonmetallic: conduit (i.e. FMC, IMC, LFMC, LFNC, RMC,
RNC), tubing (i.e. EMT), wireways, surface raceways, ducts, and duct banks.
Products:
a.
EMT:
Electrical metallic tubing.
1)
2)
3)
b.
c.
ENT:
FMC:
1)
2)
d.
IMC:
Shall conform to, and be installed in accordance with Article 346 of NFPA
70.
Shall be zinc coated steel conforming to industry standards.
May be used in masonry block walls, stud partitions, above furred ceilings,
where exposed but not subject to mechanical damage, and shall be used for
fire alarm work.
Electrical nonmetallic tubing. ENT is not allowed.
Flexible metal conduit.
Shall be used for connections to recessed lighting fixtures and motors.
Shall include a grounding conductor.
Intermediate metal conduit. IMC is not allowed.
ELECTRICAL WORK FOR TOWER SITES
260000 - 3
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
e.
LFMC:
1)
2)
f.
g.
Shall be used for connections where flexibility is required in all locations not
allowed for FMC.
Shall include a grounding conductor.
LFNC:
RMC:
1)
2)
3)
h.
Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit. LFNC is not allowed.
Rigid metallic conduit.
Shall conform to, and be installed in accordance with, Article 346 of NFPA
70.
Shall be heavy wall zinc coated steel conforming to American Standard
Specifications C80-1. Aluminum is not allowed.
May be used for service work, exterior work, slab work, and below grade
level slab, wet locations, and in mechanical rooms and where raceway may
be subject to mechanical damage.
RNC:
1)
2)
3)
Rigid nonmetallic conduit.
May be used for service work, exterior work, below grade level, and wet
locations.
Shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC) schedule 40 below grade and where
protected, schedule 80 all other installations.
Shall not be used:
a)
b)
In concrete slabs.
Within a building or structure.
4)
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.3
RMC elbows or stubs shall be used for penetrations through slab or through
exterior building walls.
Except for floor boxes, no conduit shall be allowed in elevated floor slabs. When
connecting to a floor box, that conduit raceway shall take the shortest run in the floor
slab.
No raceway shall be used smaller than 3/4" diameter except where specifically indicated.
No conduit shall have more than four (4) 90 degree bends, or the equivalent, in any one
run, and where necessary, pull boxes shall be provided..
Raceways and fittings shall be produced by same manufacturer.
Fittings:
a.
Provide insulated bushings on all raceways 1 inch diameter or larger.
b.
Manufacturer's standard fittings shall be used for raceway supports.
c.
Expansion Fittings: Expansion fittings shall be used where structural and concrete
expansion joints occur and shall include a ground strap.
d.
Couplings for rigid metal conduit shall be threaded type.
e.
Threadless fittings for EMT shall be watertight compression type. Set-screw type
fittings are not acceptable. All fittings shall be concrete tight. No diecast fittings
allowed.
f.
Cable supports in vertical raceways shall be of the split wedge type. Armored
cable supports for vertical runs to be of wire mesh basket design.
g.
Wall entrance seals shall be equal to O.Z. Gedney type "WSK".
h.
Couplings, elbows and other fittings used with rigid nonmetallic raceways shall be
of the solvent cemented type to secure a waterproof installation.
WIRING MATERIALS
A.
Unless required otherwise by the local power utility provider all conductors shall be copper with
600V insulation, THWN for branch circuitry and XHHW for feeders.
B.
Conductors shall be of soft drawn 98% minimum conductivity properly refined copper, solid
construction where No. 10 AWG and smaller, stranded construction where No. 8 AWG and
larger.
ELECTRICAL WORK FOR TOWER SITES
260000 - 4
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
C.
Exterior of wires shall bear repetitive markings along their entire length indicating conductor
size, insulation type and voltage rating.
D.
Exterior of wires shall be color coded, so as to indicate a clear differentiation between each
phase and between each phase and neutral. In all cases, grounded neutral wires and cables
shall be identified by the colors white or gray. In sizes and insulation types where factory
applied colors are not available, wires and cables shall be color coded by the application of
approved colored plastic tapes in overlapping turns at all terminal points, and in all boxes in
which splices are made. Colored tape shall be applied for a distance of 6 inches along the
wires and cables, or along their entire extensions beyond raceway ends, whichever is less.
E.
Final connections to motors shall be made with 18" of neoprene sheathed flexible metal conduit.
F.
Minimum conductor size shall be No. 12 AWG installed in conduit. Motor control circuit wiring
shall be minimum No. 14 AWG installed in conduit.
G.
Other wires and cables required for the various systems described elsewhere in this section of
the Specifications shall be as specified herein, as shown on the Contract Drawings, or as
recommended by the manufacturer of the specific equipment for which they are used, all
installed in conduit.
H.
Except for homeruns from the first device or lighting fixture, Type "MC" cable may be used for
all concealed 20 AMP 120V receptacle and lighting branch circuits where allowed by code if
installed and terminated as specified under Execution Section.
2.4
OUTLET, JUNCTION, AND PULL BOXES FOR ALL SYSTEMS
A.
Outlets Boxes:
1.
2.
B.
Each outlet in wiring systems shall be provided with an outlet box to suit conditions
encountered. Boxes installed in normally wet locations shall be of cast-metal type having
hubs. Concealed boxes shall be cadmium plated or zinc coated sheet metal type. Old
work boxes with Madison clamps not allowed in new construction.
Each box shall have sufficient volume to accommodate number of conductors in
accordance with requirements of NFPA 70. Boxes shall not be less than 1-1/2" deep
unless shallower boxes are required by structural conditions and are specifically
approved by ATC Construction Manager. Ceiling and bracket outlet boxes shall not be
less than 4" octagonal except that smaller boxes may be used where required by
particular fixture to be installed. Flush or recessed fixtures shall be provided with
separate junction boxes when required by fixture terminal temperature requirements.
Switch and receptacle boxes shall be 4" square or of comparable volume.
Pull and Junction Boxes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Where necessary to terminate, tap off, or redirect multiple raceway runs or to facilitate
conductor installation, furnish, and install appropriately designed boxes.
Boxes, other than exterior underground, shall be fabricated from code gauge steel
assembled with corrosion resistant machine screws.
Box size shall be as required by Code.
Where intermediate cable supports are necessary because of box dimensions, provide
insulated removable core brackets to support conductors.
Junction boxes are to be equipped with barriers to separate circuits.
Where splices are to be made, boxes shall be large enough to provide ample work space.
All conductors in boxes are to be clearly tagged to indicate characteristics.
Boxes shall be supported independently of raceways.
Junction boxes in moist or wet areas shall be galvanized type.
Boxes larger than 4 inches square shall have hinged covers.
Boxes larger than 12 inches in one dimension will be allowed to have screw fastened
covers, if a hinged cover would not be capable of being opened a full 90 degrees due to
installation location.
C.
Handholes and Boxes for Exterior Underground Wiring
ELECTRICAL WORK FOR TOWER SITES
260000 - 5
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.5
Units shall be designed for flush burial and have open bottom unless otherwise indicated.
Cover shall be weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having
structural load rating consistent with enclosure, shall have nonskid finish, and shall have
a molded lettering legend appropriately indicating the service.
Duct entrance provisions shall have fittings that mate with entering ducts for secure, fixed
watertight installation in enclosure wall.
Polymer Concrete Handholes and Pull Boxes with Polymer Concrete Cover shall be
molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with a polymer resin, and reinforced with
steel or fiberglass or a combination of the two.
Fiberglass Handholes and Pull Boxes with Polymer Concrete Frame and Cover shall be
sheet-molded, fiberglass reinforced, polyester resin enclosure joined to polymer concrete
top ring or frame.
High-Density Plastic Pull Boxes shall be injection molded of high-density polyethylene or
copolymer-polypropylene. Cover shall be polymer concrete or hot-dip galvanized-steel
diamond plate.
WIRING DEVICES
A.
Provide galvanized steel wiring device type plates for all wall mounted devices.
B.
Wiring devices standard for the project (i.e., with no specific type indicated) shall conform to the
following:
1.
2.
C.
Wiring device switches shall be toggle type, A.C. specification grade, 20 amps on 120 volt
circuits. Switches shall be mounted 48" to center line above finished floor unless noted
otherwise.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
D.
Visible part colors of wiring devices shall Ivory unless otherwise noted.
Exclude compact or "despard" type devices.
Single pole switch shall be equal to Hubbell No. HBL1221.
Double pole switch shall be equal to Hubbell No. HBL1222.
Three-way switch shall be equal to Hubbell No. HBL1223.
Four-way switch shall be equal to Hubbell No. HBL1224.
Single pole pilot light switch shall be equal to Hubbell No. HBL1221PL.
Equivalent 277 volt 20 amp switches shall be used where required.
Standard duplex convenience receptacles shall be 125 volt, 20 amps, three wire (two circuit
wires plus ground), "U bar" ground NEMA slot configuration 5 20R, specification grade with a
one-piece ground assembly. Receptacles shall be mounted 18" to center line above finished
floor unless noted otherwise.
1.
2.
Equal to Hubbell No. HBL5362.
Where indicated on plans provide receptacles with ground fault current interrupters, UL
class A, 20A, 125V to be equal to Hubbell No. GF5352.
E.
Nonstandard convenience receptacles and special purpose power supply receptacles shall be
as listed on plans.
F.
Where more than one wiring device is indicated in the same location, the devices shall be
mounted in gangs under a common wall plate.
G.
Mount duplex convenience and power receptacles vertically with grounding posts at top of
device unless otherwise indicated. Locate grounding post to left when horizontal mounting is
indicated.
H.
Wiring devices and associated hardware shall be manufactured by Arrow Hart, Leviton, or Pass
and Seymour.
ELECTRICAL WORK FOR TOWER SITES
260000 - 6
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
2.6
SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES (TVSS)
A.
Description: This section describes the materials and installation requirements for integrated
surge protection devices (SPD) in switchboards, panelboards, and motor control centers.
B.
Approved Vendors: Square D Company XTE/XHP/CX for service entrance, and XTE/XGA for
distribution and/or motor control center applications.
C.
Integral Surge Suppressor
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
SPD shall be Listed and Component Recognized in accordance with UL 1449 to include
Section 37.3 highest fault current category. SPD shall be UL 1283 listed.
SPD shall be installed by and shipped from the electrical distribution equipment
manufacturer’s factory.
SPD shall provide surge current diversion paths for all modes of protection; L-N, L-G, N-G
in WYE systems, and L-L, L-G in DELTA systems.
SPD shall be modular in design. SPD for service entrance application shall provide two
modules per phase for redundant protection. Each mode including N-G shall be fused
with a 200kAIC UL recognized surge rated fuse and incorporate a thermal cutout device.
Audible diagnostic monitoring shall be by way of audible alarm. This alarm shall activate
upon a fault condition. An alarm on/off switch shall be provided to silence the alarm. An
alarm push to test switch shall be provided.
If a dedicated breaker for the SPD is not provided, the SPD shall include a UL recognized
disconnect switch. A dedicated breaker shall serve as a means of disconnect for
distribution SPDs
SPD shall meet or exceed the following criteria:
a.
Minimum surge current capability (single pulse rated) per phase shall be:
1)
Service entrance switchboard: 240kA per phase
2)
Panelboard/MCC locations: 160kA per phase
b.
UL 1449 Suppression Voltage Ratings:
VOLTAGE
LOCATION L-N L-G N-G
208Y/120V
Service Entrance:
Distribution: 330V
480Y/277V
9.
10.
2.7
600V
330V
330V
700V
700V
330V
Service Entrance:
Distribution: 600V
8.
330V
330V
700V
600V
SPD shall have a minimum EMI/RFI filtering of -50dB at 100kHz with an insertion ration
of 50:1 using MIL-STD-220A methodology.
SPD shall be provided with one set of NO/NC dry contacts.
SPD shall have a warranty for a period of five years, incorporating unlimited replacement
of suppressor parts. Warranty shall be the responsibility of the electrical distribution
equipment manufacturer and shall be supported by their respective field service division.
ENCLOSURES
DEVICES
FOR
INDIVIDUALLY
MOUNTED
OVERCURRENT
AND
SWITCHING
A.
Construction shall be NEMA Type 1, where installed indoors.
B.
Construction shall be NEMA Type 4, where installed outdoors, in mechanical rooms, in locations
defined as damp or wet by NFPA 70 or where indicated as weatherproof.
C.
Operating handles shall be front or side type to accommodate hand access space and flush or
surface mounting requirements.
D.
Each shall be equipped with padlock for locking operating handle in the open position.
ELECTRICAL WORK FOR TOWER SITES
260000 - 7
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
2.8
PAD MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS
A.
2.9
Pad mounted transformers shall be furnished and may be installed by others, typically the local
utility for services, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. Coordinate with the local utility
and ATC Construction Manager for site specific requirements. Contractor shall comply with the
local utility service provider’s standards when performing and make ready work in support of the
primary service feeding the tower site.
DRY-TYPE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS
A.
Voltage and Phase
1.
2.
B.
Primary/Secondary voltage as indicated on drawings or as required for the most efficient
distribution.
3-phase primary shall be delta configuration and 3-phase secondary shall be wye
configuration unless otherwise indicated on drawings.
General Transformer Requirements
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Factory-assembled and –tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service.
Grain-oriented, non-aging silicon steel cores with brazed or pressure type internal coil
connections.
Comply with NEMA ST 20, and list and label as complying with UL 1561.
One core leg per phase.
Enclosure:
a.
b.
6.
7.
Gray enclosure finish shall comply with NEMA 250.
Transformer taps:
a.
b.
c.
8.
9.
b.
2.10
A.
Smaller than 3kVA: One (1) 5 percent tap above normal full capacity.
7.5 to 24kVA: One (1) 5 percent tap above and one (1) 5 percent tap below
normal full capacity.
Larger than 24kVA: Two (2) 2.5 percent taps above and two (2) 2.5 percent taps
below normal full capacity.
220 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a maximum 150 deg C rise
above 40 deg C ambient temperature.
Each winding shall have an independent, single, full-width copper electrostatic shield
arranged to minimize interwinding capacitance.
a.
10.
11.
Indoor, ventilated, NEMA 250, Type 2.
Outdoor, ventilated, NEMA 250, Type 3R.
Arrange coil leads and terminal strips to minimize capacitive coupling between
input and output terminals.
Include special terminal for grounding the shield.
Wall brackets, where required, shall be manufacturer’s standard brackets.
Permanent fungicidal treatment for coil and core.
PANELBOARDS
Panelboards shall consist of factory completed deadfront assemblies of back pans, main
busses, overcurrent and switching units, sheet metal cabinets and trims. They shall be so
designed that switching and overcurrent devices can be replaced without disturbing adjacent
units and without removing the main bus connectors, so that circuits may be changed without
machining drilling or tapping.
ELECTRICAL WORK FOR TOWER SITES
260000 - 8
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
B.
Where indicated as power or distribution panels, they shall be of the “I-Line” (Square D), “PowR” (Cutler Hammer) or “spectra” (General Electric).
C.
Bus bars for their mains shall be of copper having current capacities as indicated and sized for
such capacities in accordance with Underwriter Laboratory standards. Provide UL listed nonlinear rated panels with 200% neutral bus bars and lugs for all 120/208 volt panelboards where
fed from K rated transformers. Bus bar taps for panels with single pole branches shall be
arranged for sequence phasing of the branch circuit devices. Bussing shall be braced
throughout to conform to industry standard practice governing short circuit stresses in
panelboards. Phase bussing shall be full height without reduction.
D.
A ground bus shall be provided for each panel. Each ground bus shall be of the same material
as the phase and neutral buses.
E.
Cabinets shall be fabricated from industry standard gauge galvanized sheet steel with corners
lapped and riveted, or fastened by approved methods.
F.
The inside and outside of the trims shall be factory painted with one rustproofing primer coat
and one finish coat. The finish paint shall be of a type to which field applied paint will bond. All
trims shall be hinged.
G.
Cabinets and trims shall be suitable for the required mounting. Trims shall be fastened to
cabinets and shall be of a type that are self supporting on cabinets. Trims for flush panels shall
overlap cabinets by at least 3/4" all around. Where two section panels are required, cabinets
shall be of equal height including those cases where there is one main for both sections.
H.
Unless local electrical code or utility provider standards specify otherwise, cabinets and trims for
lighting and appliance panels shall accommodate and conform to the following limiting
dimensions:
1.
2.
3.
Minimum wiring gutter width on each side: 5 3/4".
Maximum overall width: 24".
Maximum overall depth: 6".
I.
Where wires or cables are used within panelboards to make up internal connections (factory
installed or otherwise) such wire or cable shall have copper conductors only.
J.
Any cabinet for a power or distribution panel shall (regardless of the actual devices required to
be in it) have a width, depth and bussing adequate for a three pole branch device equal in rating
to the panel mains. In no case shall the cabinet be wider than 42 inches or deeper than 18
inches.
K.
Hinged doors covering all switching device handles shall be included in all panel trims.
L.
Doors in panelboard trims shall conform to the following:
1.
2.
In making switching device handles accessible, doors shall not uncover any live parts.
Doors shall have flush type paracentric cylinder locks and catches. Two keys shall be
supplied for each lock and each key shall open all panelboards. Locks and keys shall
conform to a "standard keying policy" as directed.
M.
Where "spaces only" for overcurrent protection and switching devices are called for in a panel,
its main bus, and backpan, as well as its cabinet and trim, shall be extended to accommodate
these spaces and shall include all necessary hardware including bus connectors to add future
devices.
N.
Panelboards shall comply with the following industry standards:
1.
UL Standards:
a.
Panelboards: UL67
b.
Cabinet & Boxes: UL50
ELECTRICAL WORK FOR TOWER SITES
260000 - 9
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
2.
NEMA Standard: PB1
O.
Panelboards shall be labeled with a UL short circuit rating adequate for the available short
circuit and based on the lowest panel mounted circuit breaker available UL listed interrupting
current rating, but in no case less than 65 ka for 480 volt and 22 ka for 240 volt panelboards.
P.
Provide "lock on" clips for the toggle handles of certain branches serving the Fire Alarm System,
security, etc.
Q.
When called for, supply TVSS units in accordance with TVSS specification section here within.
R.
Panelboards shall be manufactured by General Electric, Cutler Hammer or Square D.
2.11
A.
MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Molded case type circuit breakers shall consist of manually operated quick make quick break
mechanically trip free operating mechanisms for simultaneous operation of all poles, with
contacts, arc interrupters and trip elements for each pole, all enclosed in molded phenolic
plastic cases.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
2.12
Their tripping units shall be of the "thermal magnetic" type having bimetallic elements for
time delay overload protection and magnetic elements for short circuit protection.
They shall be manually operable by means of toggle type operating handles having
"tripped" position midway between the "on off" position.
They shall each be contained in an individual case enclosing only the number of poles
required for the particular breaker.
All panels and individually mounted circuit breakers shall have short circuit ratings
exceeding the available short circuit or the values indicated in the Power System Studies
in this section by a factor of 1.2 with a minimum as follows:
a.
240V class panels/breakers
1)
110 kAIC where shown fed by a 150 kVA or less transformer
2)
222 kAIC where shown fed by a 300 kVA or less transformer
b.
480V Class Panels/Breakers shall be 65 kAIC.
They shall be of the "bolted in" type.
Where necessary, to accommodate other requirements, their frame sizes shall be
increased to conform to such requirements, frame sizes being indicated only as a
reference to the minimum acceptable interrupting ratings noted above.
Where single pole in trip sizes 20 amps or less, they shall be rated for switching duty.
They shall be equipped with 5 milliamp sensitivity ground fault interrupting features where
so indicated.
They shall be manufactured by Square D, Cutler Hammer, or General Electric.
ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM
A.
As defined in the project scope, install one (1) ATC provided standby electric generating
systems rated for continuous standby service as shown on the drawings. Voltage, current,
phase, and power ratings shall be as specified on the drawings. The system shall be a package
of new and current equipment.
B.
Acceptable engine generator system is that as supplied by Generac. All of the following have
the same Standard Features:
1.
2.
3.
4.
50kW Standby rating, Model SD050
80kW Standby rating, Model SD080
130kW Standby rating, Model SD130
150kW Standby rating, Model SD150
C.
Include the following Configurable Options:
ELECTRICAL WORK FOR TOWER SITES
260000 - 10
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.13
10A UL Battery Charger
Battery warmer
Main Line Circuit Breaker as indicated on the drawings
Weather Protected Enclosure
Remote Communication – Ethernet
Block Heaters
Diesel Fuel Tank suitable to operate generator for 24 hours at full load.
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH
A.
As defined in the project scope, install the ATC provided Automatic Transfer Switches as
required to transfer loads to be supplied from the Engine Generator System upon loss of
primary power.
B.
Acceptable Automatic Transfer Switch(es) are that as supplied by Generac. Model HTS 100400 Amp specifically sized for the voltage and current as required, with the following Optional
Accessories:
1.
2.
NEMA 3R enclosure
Utility Monitoring
C.
Design and Install Standby System as a non-separately derived system as defined by the NEC
with a solid, non-switching, neutral bar insulated from the grounding bar or jumper.
D.
The generator installation shall include but is not limited to the install of the generator, ATS,
trenching, backfill, conduits, wiring, connections, alarming inspections, start-up, testing and
integration into ATC Network Operations Center (NOC)
1.
During the start-up and testing phase with a factory authorized generator technician the
Contractor shall call the ATC NOC to validate all generator alarms are fully functional.
a.
2.14
ATC NOC: 1-877-518-6937
LIGHTING FIXTURES
A.
Lighting fixtures shall be in accordance with identifications on the drawings and the following.
B.
Finishes shall be as indicated on the plans.
C.
Any additional appurtenances required for installation and operation, where same are not
covered by the identification used on the drawings, shall be included.
D.
Recessed fixtures shall be coordinated with ceiling construction.
E.
Fixtures for use outdoors or in areas designated as damp locations shall be suitably gasketed
and U.L. listed for such applications.
F.
All ballasts or transformers for discharge type lamps shall be for 60 Hz operation.
G.
All ballasts or transformers for discharge or fluorescent type lamps shall be high power factor
type.
H.
In-line fuses shall be provided for all ballast and transformers.
I.
Ballasts for T8 fluorescent lamps shall be electronic high frequency electronic type (20 KHZ or
greater) type "P", class “A” sound rated, instant start and parallel wired such that if one lamp
burns out the remaining lamps stay lit. Electronic ballasts shall comply with UL 935, ANSI
C82.1, CBM certified and meet FCC standards for EMI/RFI (FCC 47 CFR Part 18 non
ELECTRICAL WORK FOR TOWER SITES
260000 - 11
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
consumer) with a total harmonic distribution of less than 20%. Ballasts shall carry a
manufacturer’s warranty of five years and be manufactured by Osram Sylvania, Magnetek,
Advance or approved equal.
J.
Remote ballasts shall be standard core and coil type "P", sound rating "A".
K.
All ballasts or transformers for discharge type lamps intended for use outdoors shall be of the
low temperature type having the lowest temperature rating available in standard manufacture.
L.
All fixtures shall be UL approved with labels attesting thereto.
M.
All lamps shall be included. Except where specifically noted otherwise all fluorescent lamps
shall be as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Fluorescent lamps of the proper wattage and voltage rating shall be provided in each
fixture as indicated on the fixture schedule. All fluorescent lamps shall be manufactured
to appropriate specifications given in ANSI C78. Unless noted otherwise, fluorescent
lamps shall be T8 3500EK and have a minimum CRI of 82.
Unless otherwise noted, all compact fluorescent lamps shall be 3500K and have a
minimum CRI of 82. The contractor shall verify that the proper lamp type for the specified
ballast type is furnished with the compact fluorescent fixture.
a.
Compact fluorescent ballasts shall be UL listed, Class P, Type 1 and CBM
Certified.
b.
Where 4-pin electronic ballast compatible compact fluorescent lamps are specified,
electronic ballasts shall include circuitry capable of sensing when lamp is
approaching end of life and shut down the lamp circuit. This end of life sensing
must be impervious to low/high line voltage conditions and result in no false
tripping or overheating of lamp bases.
All metal halide lamps of the proper wattage and voltage rating shall be provided in each
fixture as indicated on the fixture schedule and the ANSI designation of the ballast.
Unless otherwise noted metal halide lamps shall be universal burn type with a clear outer
glass jacket.
All HPS lamps of the proper wattage and voltage rating shall be provided in each fixture
as indicated on the fixture schedule and the ANSI designation of the ballast.
All incandescent lamps shall be rated for 130 volt operation.
N.
All lamps shall be of the type specified in the light fixture schedule.
O.
Include the aiming and/or adjustments of all lighting fixtures requiring same in accordance with
instructions issued by the ATC Construction Manager in the field.
P.
All lamp sockets in lighting fixtures shall be suitable for the indicated lamps and shall be set so
that the lamps are positioned in optically correct relation to all lighting fixtures components.
Q.
Lighting fixtures shall be supported from building structure only, not from hung or suspended
ceiling, by means of chains or threaded rods. The use of tie wire will not be allowed.
R.
All fixtures shall include seismic clips and shall be supported to comply with seismic regulations.
S.
Lamps shall be manufactured by General Electric, Phillips, OSRAM, or Sylvania.
2.15
GROUNDING REQUIREMENTS
A.
Ground all systems and equipment in accordance with best industry practice, the requirements
of TIA/EIA and other applicable regulations
B.
The grounding electrode conductor, shall be insulated and in conduit. If conduit is metallic,
bond both ends utilizing grounding bushings and jumpers at both ends of conduit.
ELECTRICAL WORK FOR TOWER SITES
260000 - 12
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
C.
All grounding electrodes, including those indicated on the plans, present at each service
location shall be bonded together to form the grounding electrode system. If no grounding
electrodes exist, one or more grounding electrodes shall be installed and used.
D.
The grounding system shall have a measured resistance to ground of not more than EIA/TIA
recommendedation of 10 ohms. Provide independent certification confirming this.
E.
Provide grounding bonds between all metallic conduits of the light and power system which
enter and leave cable chambers or other non metallic cable pulling and splicing boxes.
Accomplish this by equipping the conduits with bushings of the grounding type individually cross
connected.
F.
Bond all metallic conduits of the light and power system which terminate in pits below
equipment for which a ground bus is specified. Accomplish this by equipping the conduits with
bushings of the grounding type connected individually to the ground bus.
G.
Provide supplementary bond where metallic conduits terminate at metal clad equipment (or at
the metal pull box of equipment) for which a ground bus is specified. Accomplish this by
equipping the conduits with bushings of the grounding type connected individually by means of
jumpers to the ground bus. Exclude the jumpers where directed. This exclusion will be required
where an isolated ground for electronic equipment is to be maintained.
H.
Each grounding type bushing shall have the maximum ground wire accommodation available in
standard manufacture for the particular conduit size.
I.
Bonding conductors on the load side of the service device and equipment grounding conductors
shall be sized in relation to the fuses or trip size of the overcurrent device supplying the circuit.
Where the ungrounded conductors are increased in size, these grounding conductors shall be
increased in size proportionately according to the cross sectional area of the ungrounded
conductors.
2.16
A.
LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
Design Guidelines
1.
2.
Design shall meet these guidelines where economically feasible.
Design shall meet the following objectives, or provide documentation of verifiable
circumstances that do not allow for these goals to be met:
a.
b.
c.
3.
Measurements
a.
b.
4.
Tower radial ground system impedance shall be less than or equal to 10 ohms to
remote earth.
Associated tower equipment building(s) impedance shall be less than or equal to
10 ohms to remote earth each building.
Total overall site ground impedance shall be less than 10 ohms to remote earth.
Prior to all construction, conduct four (4) probe soil resistivity test, per IEEE Std 81,
at each proposed structure location in minimum 2 perpendicular directions.
After construction/installation, conduct a three (3) probe total site grounding
impedance test, per IEEE Std 81, at the single point ground (SPG) to verify that the
site grounding system meets the specified objectives. Perform this test, prior to
the electrical connection of the power multi-grounded neutral to site system
ground. Issue a report to the ATC Construction Manager that shall include
proposed actions to meet any failed objectives.
Material
a.
b.
#2 AWG Solid Bare Tinned Copper (SBTC) for all grounding system wire, unless
noted otherwise.
If the desired Ohmn reading cannot be achieved encompass all underground
laterals (rings and radials) with Sankosha Conductive Cement. Encompass all
ELECTRICAL WORK FOR TOWER SITES
260000 - 13
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
c.
5.
ground rods with Sankosha as may be required to achieve better system
impedance performance.
Ground rods shall be copper-clad galvanized steel or stainless steel, 10 feet in
length and placed in undisturbed soil 24” below grade or below frost line.
Ground Rings
a.
General
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
b.
Tower Ring
1)
c.
d.
e.
f.
Sized to meet design objectives, minimum 5/8 in X 10 ft.
Minimum separation between any two rods shall be twice the rods’ depth.
Minimum two (2) rods per tower ring. Minimum one (1) rod per tower leg and guy
anchor.
Minimum four (4) rods per equipment building rod, typically one at each corner.
Minimum one (1) electrical service grounding electrode rod.
Install ground rod at ends of radials, provided that separation distance can be
maintained to other radials.
Radials
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
8.
Minimum four (4) ground rods per building ring, typically one at each corner.
Ground rods
a.
b.
c.
7.
Bond each tower leg to ring at two (2) points curving in opposite directions
on each side of a tower leg ring ground rod. For a single-legged tower or
monopole provide four (4) bonds, two (2) each curving in opposite directions
on each direction of a tower ring ground rod installed on opposite sides of
the tower leg.
Building Rings
1)
6.
Bond to any metal object or structure within 5 feet.
Install minimum 30 inches below grade, or below frost line, whichever is
deeper.
Install minimum 2 feet from foundations, footings, other grounding systems,
and similar structures.
Install wire with minimum 18 inch bend radii.
All connections in contact with earth shall be bonded by exothermic welding.
Bond each ring together at a single point ground (SPG) location with a single
ground wire.
Minimum four (4), maximum ten (1) ring radials dependent on measured soil
resistance, and grounding performance required.
Each radial minimum 20 ft, maximum 80 ft.
Minimum 200 ft combined length of all radials.
Extend radials perpendicular from rings.
Direct radials away from ring in as straight line as possible. Direct away from other
ring grounds. Space equally apart, not closer than 5 feet at end points.
Minimum 5 feet from foundations, footings, other grounding systems, and similar
structures.
Guyed Anchors
a.
b.
c.
d.
Minimum one (1) ground rod per anchor.
Minimum one (2) single 20 ft radial in direction away from tower. Follow guidelines
for radials herein.
Connect guy wires to ground rod with #2 AWG Solid Bare Tinned Copper (SBTC)
ELECTRICAL WORK FOR TOWER SITES
260000 - 14
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
e.
Each individual guy wire shall be connected to ground wire with electro tin plated
bronze wire clamps with 304 stainless steel hardware
f.
9.
10.
11.
Single Point Ground shall be tinned copper bar with number of two hole lug connections
to accommodate all connections required.
Ground Rod Inspection Well, minimum one (1) for system test in close proximity to Single
Point Ground (SPG). Include well at one anchor for guy towers.
(Conductive) Fence
a.
12.
Conductors
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
13.
Ground if within 5 ft of any building ring ground or 20 feet within tower ring ground,
then Bond the fence to the ring ground, bond the fence corner posts to the ring
ground, and bond the openings across the fence together. All gates shall have a
braided grounding jumper
Minimum #2 AWG Solid Bare Tinned Copper (SBTC)
Minimum 18 inch bend radius. Minimize the number of bends.
Avoid long runs. Make direct runs as much as possible.
U-shaped runs prohibited.
When passing through conduit, install in non-metallic conduit only, or bond both
ends of metallic conduit to conductor.
Place through non-metallic sleeves in floors, walls, ceilings, and similar structures.
Bond all conductor connections with exothermic welding, irreversible compression
connectors, or listed compression two-hole lugs.
Equipment Buildings
a.
b.
c.
Install building lightning protection system if considered exposed to a direct
lightning strike per NFPA 780.
Bond interior Main Grounding Bar (MBG) to system Single Point Ground (SPG).
HALO Ground
1)
2)
3)
14.
15.
Transient Voltage Surge Suppresion (TVSS) at electrical service main and building subpanels.
Tower Equipment Grounding
a.
b.
c.
d.
B.
Bond to external building ring ground at the four building corners and to the
interior MGB.
Bond to all fixed metal building components.
Do not bond to fire protection systems and to interior equipment.
Install non-insulating ground bar at tower base and at antenna locations.
Base tower ground bar bonded to tower ring with two connections in opposite
directions along ring.
Bond antennas, and antenna coax shields to all tower ground bars. Run leads in a
downward attitude with minimum bends.
Bond antenna coax shields to a ground bar just prior to entry into equipment
building.
General
1.
The Contractor shall retain the services of a UL listed Master Label Lightning Protection
design/built firm to provide certified design plans and specifications for submittal review
and installation services for a complete UL listed Master Label Lightning Protection
system for the building and associated structures and includes requirements for lightning
protection systems components including, but not limited to, the following:
a.
Air terminals.
b.
Bonding plates.
c.
Conductors.
d.
Connectors.
ELECTRICAL WORK FOR TOWER SITES
260000 - 15
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Fasteners.
Grounding plates.
Grounding rods.
Rod clamps.
Splicers.
Lightning protection system shall coordinate with all building systems as shown in
the Contract Documents including but not limited to the Architectural, Structural,
Electrical, HVAC, Plumbing and Fire Protection systems where bonding is
required.
Raceways used for lightning protection system conductors are specified elsewhere in this
Section.
Submittals shall include, but not limited to:
a.
Product data for each type of product specified, including roof adhesive where
used.
b.
Scaled drawings detailing lightning protection system including, but not limited to,
air terminal locations, conductor routing, connections and grounding conductor
sizes and termination details.
c.
Submit manufacturer's Installation instructions.
Quality Assurance
a.
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer to install lightning
protection system. Upon request, submit evidence of such qualifications to the
ATC Construction Manager.
b.
Electrical Component Standard:
Provide work complying with applicable
requirements of State Electrical Code.
c.
NFPA and UL Compliance: Comply with requirements of NFPA Standard 78, and
UL Standard 96 as applicable to lightning protection systems for building projects.
d.
LPI Compliance: Comply with requirements of Lightning Protection Institute (LPI)
Standards 175, 176, and 177, pertaining to lightning protection system material,
components, installation and quality assurance procedures.
e.
UL Compliance: Comply with UL Standards 96 and 96A.
f.
ANSI Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI Standard C2.
Sequencing and Scheduling
a.
Coordinate installation of lightning protect system with the installation of other
building systems and components, including electrical wiring, supporting structures
and building materials, and metal components requiring interface with lightning
protection systems.
b.
All vertical downleads shall be in Schedule 40 PVC conduit from the roof to grade.
Coordinate with structural drawings for routing in column areas.
Lightning Protection System Components
a.
Provide lightning protection system materials and components, that comply with
manufacturer's standard design, in accordance with published product information.
Provide air terminals, bonding plates, conductors, connectors, conductor straps,
fasteners, grounding plates, grounding rods, rod clamps, splicers and other
components required for a complete system that meets LPI-175, UL 96A or NFPA
78 standards.
b.
Type of Metal for air terminals and cables: copper with solid air terminals.
c.
Air Terminals for single-ply roof mounting: Provide units with bases especially
designed for single-ply roof materials.
d.
Ground rods: 5/8-inch minimum diameter by 10-feet long, copper clad steel with
minimum 27 percent of the rod weight in the copper cladding.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
BASIC REQUIREMENTS
A.
Adhere to best industry practice and the following.
B.
Equip each raceway intended for the future installation of wire or cable with a nylon pulling cord
3/16 inch in diameter and clearly identify both ends of the raceway.
ELECTRICAL WORK FOR TOWER SITES
260000 - 16
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
C.
Provide all outlet boxes, junction boxes, and pull boxes for proper wire pulling and device
installation. Include those omitted from the drawings due to symbolic methods of notation.
1.
D.
3.2
Bundle wiring passing through pull boxes and panel boards in a neat and orderly manner
with plastic cable ties. Cable ties shall by Ty-Raps as manufactured by Thomas & Betts,
Holub Industries Inc., Quick Wrap, Bundy Unirap or equal.
Turn branch circuits and auxiliary system wiring out of wiring gutters at 90 degrees to circuit
breakers and terminal lugs.
TESTING REQUIREMENTS AND INSTRUCTIONS
A.
The Contractor shall provide supervision, labor, materials, tools, test instruments and all other
equipment or services and expenses required to test, adjust, set, calibrate, and operationally
check work and components of the electrical systems and circuitry throughout the work.
B.
The Contractor shall pay for all tests specified in this Section, including expenses incident to
retests occasioned by defects and failures of equipment to meet specifications, at no additional
cost to ATC. Any defects or deficiencies discovered in any of the electrical work shall be
corrected.
C.
The Contractor shall:
1.
D.
Do not void equipment warranties or guarantees by testing and checkout work. Checks and
tests shall be supplemental to and compatible with the manufacturer's installation instructions.
Where deviations are apparent, obtain the manufacturer's approved review of procedure prior to
testing. Where any repairs, modifications, adjustments, tests or checks are to be made, the
Contractor shall contact the ATC Construction Manager to determine if the work should be
performed by or with the manufacturer's representative.
1.
E.
Replace wiring and equipment found defective (defined as failing to meet specified
requirements) at no additional cost to ATC.
All checks and tests specified for proper operating and safety of equipment and
personnel are to be performed concurrent with progression of the work, prior to Final
Acceptance by ATC.
Test are to:
1.
2.
3.
Provide initial equipment/system acceptance.
Provide recorded data for future routine maintenance and trouble shooting.
Provide assurance that each system component is installed satisfactorily and can be
expected to perform, and continue to perform, its specified function with reasonable
reliability throughout the life of the facility.
F.
At any stage of construction and when observed, any electrical equipment or system
determined to be damaged, or faulty, is to be reported to the ATC Construction Manager.
Corrective action by the Contractor requires prior ATC Construction Manager approval,
retesting, and inspection.
G.
After each electrical system installation is complete, perform the tests to determine that the
entire system is in proper working order and in accordance with applicable codes,
manufacturer's instructions, drawings, and specifications. Tests are in addition to shop tests of
individual items at the manufacturer's plant. Perform insulation and ground resistance tests
before operating tests.
H.
Specific Tests:
1.
Perform the following specific tests. De-energize and isolate equipment and cable prior
to performing the tests.
ELECTRICAL WORK FOR TOWER SITES
260000 - 17
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
2.
3.
3.3
Wire and Cable:
a.
Before energizing any cable or wire, megger the insulation resistance of every
external circuit wire to each other and to ground. Tests shall be conducted at
voltages of 500 volts or lower. Continuity test each wire and cable to verify the
field applied tag per conductor. Minimum insulation resistance valves shall not be
less than two megohms.
b.
Take insulation resistance measurements for motor feeders.
With motors
disconnected, measure insulation resistance from load side of contactors or circuit
breakers.
c.
Check cables and wires for the proper identification numbering and/or color coding.
d.
Inspect cables for physical damage and proper connection in accordance with
single line diagram.
Power Distribution System:
a.
Panelboards
1)
Compare nameplate information with schedules and report any
discrepancies.
2)
Inspect all panelboards for cleanliness, workmanship, etc.
3)
Check for proper anchorage/mounting, required area clearance, physical
damage, and proper alignment.
4)
Check for proper grounding.
5)
Inspect all doors, panels and sections for paint, dents, scratches, fit and
missing hardware.
6)
Verify that all over-current protective device types correspond to drawings.
b.
Circuit Breakers
1)
Circuit breaker shall be checked for proper mounting, conductor size and
feeder designation.
2)
Operate circuit breaker to ensure smooth operation.
3)
Inspect case for cracks or other defects.
4)
Check tightness of connections with calibrated torque wrench. Refer to
manufacturer's instruction for proper torque levels.
5)
Insulation resistance shall not be less than 100 megohms.
c.
Automatic Transfer Switch
1)
Inspect for physical damage.
2)
Verify that the short circuit withstand rating exceeds the available short
circuit duty.
3)
Compare equipment nameplate information and connections with single line
diagram and report any discrepancies.
4)
Check switch to ensure positive interlock between normal and alternate
sources. (Mechanical and electrical).
5)
Check tightness of all control and power connections.
6)
Perform manual and electrical transfer operation.
7)
Ensure manual transfer warnings are attached and visible to operator.
8)
Perform insulation resistance tests phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground
with switch in both source positions.
9)
Measure contact resistance in normal and alternate source position.
10) Insulation resistance test voltages and minimum values to be in accordance
with manufacturer's published data.
11) Determine contact resistance in micro-ohms.
Investigate any value
exceeding 500 micro-ohms or any values which deviate from adjacent poles
by more than fifty percent (50%).
BRANCH CIRCUITRY
A.
For all lighting and appliance branch circuitry, raceway sizes shall conform to industry standard
maximum permissible occupancy requirements except where these are exceeded by other
requirements specified elsewhere.
B.
Circuits shall be balanced on phases at their supply as evenly as possible.
C.
Feeder connections shall be in the phase rotation which establishes proper operation for all
equipment supplied.
ELECTRICAL WORK FOR TOWER SITES
260000 - 18
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
D.
Reduced size conductors indicated for any feeders shall be taken as their grounding
conductors.
E.
Feeders consisting of multiple cables and raceways shall be arranged such that each raceway
of the feeder contains one cable for each leg and one neutral cable, if any.
F.
For circuitry indicated as being protected at 20 Amps or less, abide by the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
G.
Type MC Cable Installation:
1.
3.4
All 20 amp, 120/208 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire combined branch circuit homeruns shall be
provided with a #8 AWG neutral conductor.
Minimum conductor size shall be No. 12 A.W.G. copper.
Conductors operating at 120 volts extending in excess of 100 Ft., or at 277 volts
extending in excess of 200 ft., or the last outlet or fixture tap shall be No. 10 A.W.G.
copper throughout.
Lighting fixtures and receptacles shall not be connected to the same circuit.
Circuits shall be balanced on phases at their supply point as evenly as possible.
Where cable is permitted under the products section, the installation of same shall be
done in accordance with code and the following:
a.
Cable shall be supported in accordance with code. Tie wire is not an acceptable
means of support. Cable supports such as Caddy WMX-6, MX-3, and clamps
such as Caddy 449 shall be used. Where cables are supported by the structure
and only need securing in place, then ty-raps will be acceptable. Ty-raps are not
acceptable as a means of support. All fittings, hangers, and clamps for support
and termination of cables shall be of types specifically designed for use with cable,
i.e., Romex connectors not acceptable.
b.
Armor of cable shall be removed with rotary cutter device equal to roto-split by
Seatek co., not with hacksaw.
c.
Use split "insuliner" sleeves at terminations.
REQUIREMENTS GOVERNING ELECTRICAL WORK IN DAMP OR WET LOCATIONS
A.
Outlets and outlet size boxes shall be of galvanized cast ferrous metal only.
B.
The finish of threaded steel conduit shall be galvanized only.
C.
Wires for pulling into raceways for lighting and appliance branch circuitry shall be limited to
"THWN".
D.
Wires for pulling into raceways for feeders shall be limited to "THWN".
E.
Plates for toggle switches and receptacles shall have gasketed snap shut covers suitable for
wet locations while in use.
F.
Final connections of flexible conduit shall be neoprene sheathed.
G.
Apply one layer of half looped plastic electric insulating tape over wire nuts used for joining the
conductors of wires.
H.
Enclosures, junction boxes, pull boxes, cabinets, cabinet trims, wiring troughs and the like, shall
be fabricated of galvanized sheet metal, shall conform to the following:
1.
2.
3.
They shall be constructed with continuously welded joints and seams.
Their edges and weld spots shall be factory treated with cold galvanizing compound.
Their connection to circuitry shall be by means of watertight hub connectors with sealing
rings.
ELECTRICAL WORK FOR TOWER SITES
260000 - 19
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
I.
Enclosures for individually mounted switching and overcurrent devices shall be NEMA Class IV
weatherproof construction.
J.
The covers, doors and plates and trims used in conjunction with all enclosures, pull boxes,
outlet boxes, junction boxes, cabinets and the like shall be equipped with gaskets.
K.
Panels shall be equipped with doors without exception.
L.
The following shall be interpreted as damp or wet locations within building confines:
1.
2.
3.
3.5
Spaces where any designations indicating weatherproof (WP) or vaporproof appear on
the drawings.
Below waterproofing in slabs applied directly on grade.
Spaces defined as wet or damp locations by article 100 of the National Electric Code.
UNDERGROUND CONDUIT AND CONDUIT BANKS
A.
The electrical work required in conjunction with underground conduit shall include providing all
conduits.
B.
Conduits shall be:
1.
2.
Trade diameter size as indicated but in no case less than one inch.
Polyvinyl chloride Schedule 40, rigid steel conduit for vertical elbows and straight sections
used to penetrate equipment pads, building foundation walls and concrete slabs.
C.
Install conduit in such a manner as to provide a minimum cover of 30 inches after final grading,
or as otherwise shown on the drawings. Increase the minimum cover where required by field
conditions.
D.
Lay conduit to avoid low points during run. Pitch at a minimum of three inches per 100 feet
away from any building.
E.
Offsets to accommodate field conditions shall be accomplished with two bends of not more than
ten degrees each.
F.
Plug both ends of all conduit stubs.
G.
Seal the end of each conduit run terminating inside a building, or conditioned space, or as
otherwise indicated, utilizing a water and gas tight sealant manufactured specifically for the
purpose.
H.
After conduit has been installed, clear each conduit of all obstructions and foreign matter by
pulling a flexible mandrel (12" minimum length and a diameter 1/4" less than that of the conduit)
and brush through it. In the event that obstructions are encountered in any conduit which will
not permit the mandrel to pass, remove and replace the blocked section. Include in the electric
work all excavation, backfilling, repair of concrete encasement and restoration of surface at
grade involved in the conduit replacement.
I.
Provide a nylon cord for the pulling of cable in each conduit in which no cable is to be installed
as part of the electric work. Leave 36” of slack at each end and ensure pull line is secure.
J.
Provide a continuous nylon warning tape above each conduit 12 inches below grade.
3.6
IDENTIFICATION AND TAGGING
A.
Identify individually:
ELECTRICAL WORK FOR TOWER SITES
260000 - 20
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Each transformer.
Each panelboard.
Each switch and circuit breaker.
Each feeder, wire or cable of all systems.
Each switchboard.
Each end of nylon pullwire in empty conduit.
Each utility meter shall be labeled: ‘American Tower Utility Meter’ or with the meter
owners name.
B.
Each wire or cable in a feeder shall be identified at its terminal points of connection and in each
pullbox, junction box and panel gutter through which it passes.
C.
The nomenclature used to identify panelboards or load center shall designate the numbers
assigned to them.
D.
All labels must be type written.
E.
The nomenclature used to identify switches or circuit breakers shall:
1.
2.
3.
Where they disconnect mains or services designate this fact.
Where they control feeders, designate the feeder number and the name of the load
supplied.
Where they control lighting and appliance branch circuitry, designate the name of the
load supplied.
F.
The nomenclature used to identify feeder wires and cables shall designate the feeder number.
G.
Identification for panelboards, utility meter or load centers shall be by means of Contractor
provided engraved lamacoid nameplates showing 1/4" high white lettering on a black
background fastened to the outside face of the front. All labeling outdoors shall be rated for
outdoor use.
H.
Identification for switches or circuit breakers shall be by means of the following:
1.
2.
3.
Where individually enclosed engraved lamacoid nameplates showing 1/8" high white
lettering on a black background fastened on the outside front face of the enclosure.
Where in panelboards or load centers without doors same as for individually enclosed.
Where in panelboards or load centers with doors typewritten directories mounted behind
transparent plastic covers, in metal frames fastened on the inside face of the doors.
I.
Identification for wires and cables shall be by means of wrap around "brady" type labels.
J.
Device plates for local toggle switches, toggle switch type motor starters, pilot lights and the like,
whose function is not readily apparent shall be engraved with 1/8" high letters suitably
describing the equipment controlled or indicated.
K.
Phase identification letters shall be stamped into the metal of the bus bars of each phase of the
main busses of each switchboard and each panelboard. The letters shall be visible from at
least one "normal posture" location without having to demount any current carrying or
supporting elements.
L.
Equip all electric closets and the like with enameled sheet metal "red on white" signs reading
"Electrical Equipment Room No Storage Permitted." Signs shall be mounted at clearly visible
locations within the rooms.
M.
Provide a sign at the service entrance equipment indicating the type and location of all on site
emergency or standby power sources.
N.
Identify each outlet box, junction box, and cabinet used in conjunction with empty raceway for
wires of a future system by means of indelible markings on the inside denoting the system.
ELECTRICAL WORK FOR TOWER SITES
260000 - 21
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
O.
3.7
Prior to installing identifying tags and nameplates, submit their nomenclature for approval.
Conform to all revisions issued by the ATC Construction Manager.
SUPPORTS AND FASTENINGS
A.
Support work in accordance with best industry standards, Electric Code and the following:
B.
Include supporting frames or racks for equipment, intended for vertical surface mounting, which
is required in a free standing position.
C.
Supporting frames or racks shall be of standard angle, standard channel or specialty support
system steel members. They shall be rigidly bolted or welded together and adequately braced to
form a substantial structure. Racks shall be of ample size to assure a workmanlike
arrangement of all equipment mounted on them.
D.
No work intended for exposed installation shall be mounted directly on any building surface. In
such locations, flat bar members or spacers shall be used to create a minimum of 1/4" air space
between the building surfaces and the work. Provide 3/4" thick exterior grade plywood painted
with two coats of fire-retardant grey paint for mounting of panelboards.
E.
Nothing (including outlet, pull and junction boxes and fittings) shall depend on electric conduits,
raceways or cables for support.
F.
Nothing shall rest on, or depend for support on, suspended ceiling media.
G.
Support less than 2" trade size, vertically run, conduits at intervals no greater than 8 Ft. Support
such conduits, 2-1/2" trade size or larger, at intervals no greater than the story height, or 15 Ft,
whichever is smaller.
H.
Where they are not embedded in concrete, support less than 1" trade size, horizontally run,
conduits at intervals no greater than 7 ft.. Support such conduits, 1" trade size or larger, at
intervals no greater than 10 ft.
I.
Support all lighting fixtures directly from structural member.
J.
Where fixtures and ceilings are such as to require fixture support from ceiling openings frames,
include in the electric work the members necessary to tie back the ceiling opening frames to
ceiling suspension members or slabs so as to provide actual support for the fixtures noted
above.
K.
Fasten electric work to building structure in accordance with the best industry practice.
L.
Floor mounted equipment shall not be held in place solely by its own dead weight. Include floor
anchor fastenings in all cases.
M.
For items which are shown as being ceiling mounted at locations where fastenings to the
building construction element above is not possible, provide suitable auxiliary channel or angle
iron bridging tying to building structural elements.
N.
Conduits installed on the tower in support of FAA lighting must be fastened to the tower using
galvanized or stainless steel hardware suitable for the size conduit being installed. The use of
plastic tie wraps or “zip ties” or electrical tape is prohibited.
3.8
SPLICING AND TERMINATING WIRES AND CABLES
A.
Maintain all splices and joints in removable cover boxes or cabinets where they may be easily
inspected.
ELECTRICAL WORK FOR TOWER SITES
260000 - 22
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
B.
Locate each completed conductor splice or joint in the outlet box, junction box, or pull box
containing it, so that it is accessible from the removal cover side of the box.
C.
Join solid conductors No. 8 AWG and smaller by securely twisting them together and soldering,
or by using insulated coiled steel spring "wire nut" type connectors. Exclude "wire nuts"
employing non expandable springs. Terminate conductors No. 8 AWG and smaller by means of
a neat and fast holding application of the conductors directly to the binding screws or terminals
of the equipment or devices to be connected.
D.
Join, tap and terminate stranded conductors No. 6 AWG and larger by means of solder sleeves,
taps; and lugs with applied solder or by means of bolted saddle type or pressure indent type
connectors, taps and lugs. Exclude connectors and lugs of the types which apply set screws
directly to conductors. Where equipment or devices are equipped with set screw type terminals
which are impossible to change, replace the factory supplied set screws with a type having a
ball bearing tip. Apply pressure indent type connectors, taps and lugs utilizing tools
manufactured specifically for the purpose and having features preventing their release until the
full pressure has been exerted on the lug or connector.
E.
Except where wire nuts are used, build up insulation over conductor joints to a value, equal both
in thickness and dielectric strength, to that of the factory applied conductor insulation. Insulation
of conductor taps and joints shall be by means of half lapped layers of rubber tape, with an
outer layer of friction tape; by means of half lapped layers of approved plastic electric insulating
tape; or by means of split insulating casings manufactured specifically to insulate the particular
connector and conductor, and fastened with stainless steel or non metallic snaps or clips.
F.
Exclude splicing procedures for neutral conductors in lighting and appliance branch circuitry
which utilize device terminals as the splicing points.
G.
Exclude joints or terminations utilizing solder in any conductors used for grounding or bonding
purposes.
H.
Exclude all but solder or pressure indent type joints in conductors used for signaling or
communications purposes.
3.9
REQUIREMENTS FOR THE INSTALLATION OF JUNCTION BOXES, OUTLET BOXES AND
PULL BOXES
A.
Flush wall mounted outlet boxes shall not be set back to back but shall be offset at least 12"
horizontally regardless of any indication on the drawings.
B.
Locate all boxes so that their removable covers are accessible without necessitating the
removal of parts of permanent building structure, including piping, ductwork, and other
permanent mechanical elements.
C.
In conjunction with concealed circuitry, abide by one of the following instructions (as may be
applicable to the conditions) in order to assure the aforementioned accessibility. (Not required
for circuitry concealed by removable suspended ceiling tiles.)
1.
2.
3.
For a small (outlet size) box on circuitry concealed in a partition or wall, locate box or
fitting so that its removable cover side (or the face of any applied raised cover) penetrates
through to within 1/8" a of the exposed surface of the building materials concealing the
circuitry and apply a blank or device plate to suit the functional requirements.
For a large box on circuitry concealed in a partition, suspended ceiling, or wall, locate box
totally hidden but with its removable cover directly behind an architectural access door or
panel (included for the purpose, separate from the electric work) in the building
construction which conceals the circuitry.
For a small (outlet size) box on circuitry concealed above and intended as an outlet for a
surface mounted lighting fixture or other such electrical item, locate box so that its
removable cover side penetrates through to the exposed surface of the building materials
concealing the circuitry. Arrange the mounting of the lighting fixture or other item so that
it completely covers the opening in the building construction caused by the box.
ELECTRICAL WORK FOR TOWER SITES
260000 - 23
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
4.
D.
Apply junction and pull boxes in accordance with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
E.
Include pull boxes in long straight runs of raceway to assure that cables are not damaged
when they are pulled in.
Include junction and pull boxes to assure a neat and workmanlike installation of
raceways.
Include junction and pull boxes to fulfill requirements pertaining to the limitations to the
number of bends permitted in raceway between cable access points, the accessibility of
cable joints and splices, and the application of cable supports.
Include all required junction and pull boxes regardless of indications on the drawings
(which, due to symbolic methods of notation, may omit to show some of them).
Apply outlet boxes in accordance with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
F.
For a small (outlet size) box on circuitry concealed in a suspended ceiling, and intended
as an outlet for a non demountable type of recessed lighting fixtures or other such
electrical items, locate box totally hidden but with its removable cover not more than one
foot away from the building construction opening occupied by the demountable items.
Unless noted below or otherwise specifically indicated, include a separate outlet box for
each individual wiring device, lighting fixture and signal or communication system outlet
component. Outlet boxes supplied attached to lighting fixtures shall not be used as
replacements for the boxes specified herein.
A continuous row of fixtures of the end to end channel type, designed for "through wiring,"
and wired in accordance with the specification hereinafter pertaining to circuitry through a
series of lighting fixtures, may be supplied through a single outlet box.
A series of separate fixtures, designed for "through wiring," spaced not more than 4'
apart, and inter connected with conduit or raceway and circuitry which is in accordance
with the specifications hereinafter pertaining to circuitry through a series of lighting
fixtures, may be supplied through a single outlet box.
Connection to recessed ceiling fixtures supplied with pigtails may be arranged so that
more than one, but not more than four, such fixtures are connected into a single outlet
box. When adopting this procedure:
a.
Utilize an outlet box no smaller than 5" square by 2 1/2" deep.
b.
Allow no fixture to be supplied from an outlet box in another room.
Multiple local switches indicated at a single location shall be gang mounted in a single
outlet box.
Include all required outlet boxes regardless of indications on the drawings (which due to
symbolic methods of notation, may omit to show some of them).
Install junction boxes, pull boxes and outlet boxes in accordance with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Exclude surface mounted outlet boxes in conjunction with concealed circuitry.
Exclude unused circuitry openings in junction and pull boxes. In larger boxes each such
opening shall be closed with a galvanized sheet steel plate fastened with a continuous
weld all around. In small outlet type boxes, utilize plugs as specified for such boxes.
Close up all unused circuitry openings in outlet boxes. Unused openings in cast boxes
shall be closed with approved cast metal threaded plugs. Unused openings in sheet
metal boxes shall be closed with sheet metal knock out plugs.
Outlet boxes for switches shall be located at the strike side of doors. Indicated door
swings are subject to field change. Outlet boxes shall be located on the basis of final
door swing arrangements.
Boxes and plaster covers for duplex receptacles shall be arranged for vertical mounting
of the receptacle.
Equip outlet boxes used for devices which are connected to wires of systems supplied by
more than one set of voltage characteristics with barriers to separate the different
systems.
G.
Barriers in junction and pull boxes of outlet size shall be of the same metal as the box.
H.
Barriers in junction and pull boxes which are larger than outlet size shall be of the polyester
resin fiberglass of adequate thickness for mechanical strength, but in no case less than 1/4"
ELECTRICAL WORK FOR TOWER SITES
260000 - 24
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
thick. Each barrier shall be mounted, without fastenings, between angle iron guides so that they
may be readily removed.
3.10
A.
LOCATING AND ROUTING OF CIRCUITRY
In general, all circuitry shall be run concealed except that it shall be run exposed where the
following conditions occur:
1.
2.
3.
Horizontally at the ceiling of permanently unfinished spaces which are not assigned to
mechanical or electrical equipment.
Horizontally and vertically in mechanical equipment spaces.
Horizontally and vertically in electric equipment rooms.
B.
Concealed circuitry shall be so located that building construction materials can be applied over
its thickest elements without being subject to spalling or cracking.
C.
All circuitry and raceways shall not be run within slabs. If for field conditions requires raceways
to be embedded in field poured structural building construction concrete fill or slab shall conform
to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
All proposed embedded raceways shall be indicated on plan and elevation and submitted
to the ATC Construction Manager for review and written approval prior to installation.
Any costs associated with the review and approval shall be borne by the Contractor.
They shall be run "single layer" with their outside surface no closer than 1" to any surface
of the structural concrete.
They shall not be located in any configuration which places the outside surface of one
closer than 3" to the outside surface of another, except at tees, crosses or other single
level wide angle junction points.
Where crossovers or close grouping are unavoidable, circuitry shall be carefully field
coordinated so as not to cause structural weakness.
Where turned up or down into a wall or partition they shall, before entering same, be
routed parallel for a long enough distance to assure that no relocation of the wall or
partition will be necessary to conceal the required bend.
They shall be routed in such a manner as to coordinate with the structural requirements
of the building.
They shall be routed in accordance with field instructions issued by the ATC Construction
Manager where such instructions differ from specifications set forth herein.
D.
Circuitry run exposed shall be routed parallel to building walls and column lines.
E.
Exposed circuitry located overhead shall be run in a completely accessible manner on the
underside of all piping and ductwork.
F.
Circuitry run in suspended ceilings shall be routed parallel to building walls, column lines, etc.
G.
Circuitry shall be routed so as to prevent electric conductors from being subject to high ambient
temperature. Minimum clearances from heated lines or surfaces shall be maintained as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Crossing where uninsulated
Crossing where insulated
Running parallel where uninsulated
Running parallel where insulated
3"
1"
36"
6"
H.
Circuitry shall not be run in elevator shafts, hoistways, and the like. Where outlets for trail
cables, pit lights, run be level lights, and the like, are involved, only the "final connection" outlet
boxes themselves shall be located within or open into, the confines of the shaft.
I.
Circuitry for miscellaneous systems indicated without notation as to location and routing shall be
run as per the requirements and notations governing the adjacent light and power circuitry.
ELECTRICAL WORK FOR TOWER SITES
260000 - 25
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
3.11
INSTALLING CIRCUITRY
A.
The outside surface of circuitry which is to be embedded in cinder concrete shall be coated with
asphaltum paint.
B.
In runs of conduit or raceway, including flexible, limit the number of bends between cable
access points to a total which does not exceed the maximum specified for the particular system.
Where no such maximum is specified, limit the number to four right angle bends or the
equivalent thereof.
C.
In each conduit or raceway assigned for the future pulling in of wires, include a nylon drag cord.
In raceways 2" trade size and larger, the cord shall be pulled in utilizing a suitable brush,
followed by an 85% diameter ball mandrel ahead of the cord in the pulling assembly. In the
event that obstructions are encountered, which will not permit the drag cord to be installed, the
blocked section of raceway shall be replaced and any cutting and patching of the structure
involved in such replacement shall be included as part of the electric work.
D.
Circuitry shall be arranged such that conductors of one feeder or circuitry carrying "going"
current are not separated from conductors of the same feeder or circuitry carrying "return"
current by any ferrous or other metal. Where not within raceways, all "going" and "return"
current conductors of one feeder or circuit shall be laces together so as to minimize induction
heating of adjacent metal components.
E.
Sleeves used where circuitry is to penetrate waterproof slabs, decks and walls, shall be of a
type selected to suit the water condition encountered in the field.
3.12
PHYSICAL SEPARATION OF NORMAL, OPTIONAL STANDBY, AND EMERGENCY
SYSTEMS
A.
ALL emergency system generation and distribution equipment shall be installed outside, or
within dedicated two-hour fire rated rooms, closets or shafts. All equipment, conduit, piping,
ductwork, etc., alien to the emergency system shall not be located within these rooms, closets,
or shafts except the equipment that serves these rooms, closets or shafts.
B.
All emergency equipment such as transfer switches, switchboards, transformers, and
panelboards, shall be installed outside, or in two-hour fire rated rooms. All portions of the
emergency system, such as feeders, located outside of rooms, closets or shafts described
herein, shall also be enclosed within two-hour fire rated enclosures, provided by the Electrical
Contractor. Type, method and material of two-hour rated enclosures shall be approved by the
local Authority Having Jurisdiction.
C.
Emergency system shall be kept entirely independent of all other wiring, devices and
equipment, and shall not enter the same raceways, boxes or cabinets with each other or other
wiring, except in transfer switches.
D.
The Contractor has the option of using UL listed two-hour fire rated MI cable system only if
approved by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction. The Contractor shall be responsible for
sizing, routing, installation, supports, etc., of this cable in accordance with manufacturers
requirements. Submit to ATC Construction Manager conductor sizing calculations, voltage drop
calculations, etc., for review and approval.
END OF SECTION
ELECTRICAL WORK FOR TOWER SITES
260000 - 26
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
SECTION 311000
SITE CLEARING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
1.2
Attention is directed to all Sections within DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which
are hereby made a part of this Section of the Specifications.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and will be performed under
the designated Sections:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Protecting existing trees and vegetation to remain, including temporary fencing for trees
in close proximity to construction operations.
Removing existing trees and vegetation indicated to be removed.
Clearing and grubbing.
Stripping and stockpiling topsoil.
Removing above and below grade site improvements.
Section 024100 - DEMOLITION FOR TOWER SITES for removal of site utilities.
Section 312000 – ACCESS ROADS AND EARTH WORK for soil materials, excavating,
backfilling, and site grading.
Section 312500 – EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS for required erosion
and sedimentation control measures.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface-soil layer containing organic matter and sand, silt, and
clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than
underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2
inches in diameter; and free of subsoil and weeds, roots, toxic materials, or other nonsoil
materials.
B.
Tree Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected
during construction, and defined by the drip line of individual trees or the perimeter drip line of
groups of trees, unless otherwise indicated.
1.4
MATERIAL OWNERSHIP
A.
1.5
Except for stripped topsoil or other materials indicated to remain ATC's property, cleared
materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.
SUBMITTALS
A.
This is not a firm requirement or deliverable into ATC however it is highly recommended that the
contractor take photographs sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of trees and plantings,
adjoining construction, and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused
by site clearing.
SITE CLEARING
311000 - 1
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied
or used facilities during site-clearing operations.
1.
2.
Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities
without permission from ATC Construction Manager and authorities having jurisdiction.
Provide alternate routes for safe passage around closed or obstructed traffic ways if
required by authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on property
owners or ATC's premises where indicated.
C.
Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before site
clearing.
D.
Defined Work Area: Contractor shall notify the ATC Construction Manager immediately if the
proposed facility has not been staked out by a licensed surveyor. All clearing and grubbing
activities shall cease until the project work area has been properly surveyed and staked
by ATC
E.
Do not commence site clearing operations until erosion and sedimentation control measures are
in place. Coordinate, attend and fully support any sediment control inspections required by local,
State or Federal agencies.
F.
Protection of Existing Improvements: Provide protection necessary to prevent damage to
existing improvements indicated to remain in place or outside of the limit of work. Protect
improvements on adjoining properties and on Owner’s property.
1.
Restore improvements damaged by Contractor’s clearing activities to their original
condition, at no additional expense to ATC.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Protect and maintain all benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during the
duration of construction.
B.
Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated.
C.
Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.
1.
3.2
Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to theATC
Construction Manager.
TREE PROTECTION
A.
Erect and maintain temporary fencing around tree protection zones before starting site clearing.
Remove fence when construction is complete.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Do not store construction materials, debris, or excavated material within fenced area.
Do not permit vehicles, equipment, or foot traffic within fenced area.
Maintain fenced area free of weeds and trash.
Except as otherwise directed, cutting and trimming of existing trees within this area will
not be permitted.
SITE CLEARING
311000 - 2
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
B.
Do not excavate within tree protection zones, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Where excavation for new construction is required within tree protection zones, hand clear and
excavate to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow-tine spading forks, comb soil to
expose roots, and cleanly cut roots as close to excavation as possible.
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain that are damaged by construction
operations, in a manner approved by the Designer.
1.
2.
3.3
Cover exposed roots with burlap and water regularly.
Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently redirected
and covered with soil.
Coat cut faces of roots more than 1-1/2 inches in diameter with an emulsified asphalt or
other approved coating formulated for use on damaged plant tissues.
Backfill with soil as soon as possible.
If required within the project specific SOW employ an arborist, licensed in jurisdiction
where Project is located, to submit details of proposed repairs and to repair damage to
trees and shrubs.
Replace trees that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status, as determined
by the ATC Construction Manager.
CLEARING AND GRUBBING
A.
Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation to permit installation of new
construction.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material
unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated.
1.
3.4
Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated.
Do not work outside of the ATC lease area.
Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner
where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction.
Remove stumps, obstructions, and debris extending to a depth f 18 inches below
exposed subgrade.
Use only hand methods for grubbing within tree protection zone.
Chip removed tree branches and dispose of off-site.
Unless specifically noted on the Construction Drawings the access road shall be cleared
of all trees within 10’ on each side from the edge of the proposed travel lane or 30’ wide
whichever is greater.
Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches and
compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.
TOPSOIL STRIPPING
A.
Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.
B.
Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with
underlying subsoil or other waste materials.
1.
C.
Remove subsoil and nonsoil materials from topsoil, including trash, debris, weeds, roots,
and other waste materials.
Stockpile topsoil materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil.
Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust or
contamination by air-borne weed seed.
1.
Do not stockpile topsoil within tree protection zones.
SITE CLEARING
311000 - 3
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
3.5
EXCESS TOPSOIL AND TIMBER
A.
Unless directed otherwise by the ATC Construction Manager all topsoil that has been stripped
or cut and stockpiled, but is not needed after the completion of all final topsoil spreading and
grassing, shall be removed from the property by the contractor.
B.
Unless directed otherwise by the ATC Construction Manager all timber from clearing operations
shall be removed from the property.
3.6
SITE IMPROVEMENTS
A.
Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to
facilitate new construction.
B.
Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated.
1.
2.
3.7
Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw-cut length of
existing pavement to remain before removing existing pavement. Saw-cut faces
vertically.
Paint cut ends of steel reinforcement in concrete to remain to prevent corrosion and
provide orange safety caps on all blunt ends
DISPOSAL
A.
Disposal: Remove surplus soil material, stumps, brush, chips, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions,
demolished materials, and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of
them off ATC's property.
1.
2.
3.
Burning on site is prohibited.
Burying stumps, brush, trees and organic matter is prohibited
Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other nonrecyclable
materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport them
to recycling facilities.
END OF SECTION
SITE CLEARING
311000 - 4
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
SECTION 312000
ACCESS ROADS AND EARTH WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
1.2
Attention is directed to all Sections within DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which
are hereby made a part of this Section of the Specifications.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and will be performed under
the designated Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Preparing subgrades for access roads, compounds, buildings, tower structures,
foundations and landscaping.
Excavating and backfilling for compounds, tower foundations, buildings and structures.
Drainage course for slabs-on-grade.
Base, Subbase and surface course for gravel access roads.
Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches.
Excavating and backfilling for surficial drainage and swales.
Excavating and backfilling for utility trenches.
Section 024100 - DEMOLITION FOR TOWER SITES for removal of site utilities.
Section 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE for granular course if placed over vapor
retarder and beneath the slab-on-grade.
Section 311000 - SITE CLEARING for site stripping, grubbing, stripping and stockpiling
topsoil, and removal of above- and below-grade improvements, including utilities.
Section 312500 – EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS for temporary erosion
and sedimentation control measures.
Division 23, 26, and 33 Sections for installing underground mechanical and electrical
utilities and buried mechanical and electrical structures.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation.
B.
Base Course: Course placed in the amounts indicated by the site specific design between the
subbase course and surface course.
C.
Bedding Course: Course placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.
D.
Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.
E.
Drainage Course: Course supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward capillary
flow of pore water.
F.
Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and
dimensions indicated.
1.
Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond
indicated lines and dimensions as directed by ATC Construction Manager. Authorized
additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract
provisions.
ACCESS ROAD AND EARTH WORK
312000 - 1
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
2.
3.
Bulk Excavation: Excavation more than 10 feet in width and more than 30 feet in length.
Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated
lines and dimensions without direction by ATC Construction Manager. Unauthorized
excavation, as well as remedial work directed by ATC Construction Manager, shall be
without additional compensation.
G.
Fill: Suitable soil materials used to raise existing grades. Fill materials shall be free of frozen
particles, brush, roots, sod, or other foreign or objectionable materials.
H.
Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, conglomerate deposits, and boulders
of rock material that exceed 1 cu. yd. for bulk excavation or 3/4 cu. yd. for footing, trench, and
pit excavation that cannot be removed by rock excavating equipment equivalent to the following
in size and performance ratings, without systematic drilling, ram hammering, ripping, or blasting,
when permitted:
I.
Structures: Buildings, towers, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs,
mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed
above or below the ground surface.
J.
Subbase Course: Course placed between the subgrade and base course.
K.
Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or
backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.
L.
Surface Course: Course placed above the base course.
M.
Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground
services within buildings.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: If deviating from ATC specifications Contractor shall submit specifications for
proposed products to ATC Construction Manager for review and approval. All submittal shall be
in writing and sent in the ATC in advance of the product being purchased.
1.
1.5
If Contractor is complying with ATC specifications than product data submittals are not
required.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by ATC or others unless
permitted in writing by ATC Construction Manager and then only after arranging to provide
temporary utility services according to requirements indicated.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Notify the ATC Construction Manager not less than two days in advance of proposed
utility interruptions.
Do not proceed with utility interruptions without the ATC Construction Manager's written
permission.
As required by law contractor shall contact utility-locator service for area where Project is
located before excavating.
Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be
removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active.
ACCESS ROAD AND EARTH WORK
312000 - 2
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SOIL MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not
available from excavations. All fill shall be clean and free from organics, contaminant or
deleterious material.
B.
Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM or
a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches in any dimension,
debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.
C.
Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT
according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups.
1.
D.
Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of
optimum moisture content at time of compaction.
Surface Course: Fully graded crushed 1” stone and smaller mixed with dirt and fines (crushed
aggregate base course or CABC).
1.
2.
6” Surface Course should be installed if no additional stone in the base or subbase is
required per the design and engineer.
4” Surface Course should be installed if stone base or subbase is required per the design
and engineer.
E.
Base Course: 8” depth of coarse aggregate (AASHTO #5 or Railroad Ballast)
F.
Subbase Course: 12” to 18” depth of very coarse aggregate (surge or Rip-Rap 3”-6” stone size)
G.
Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a #4 sieve
and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
H.
Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of washed crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed
gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch
sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve.
I.
Sand: ASTM C 33; fine aggregate, natural, or manufactured sand.
J.
Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state.
2.2
GEOTEXTILES
A.
Store geosynthetics in manufacturer's original packaging with labels intact. Store and handle
geosynthetics to prevent deterioration or damage due to sunlight, chemicals, flames,
temperatures above 160 deg F (71 deg C) or below 32 deg F (0 deg C), and other conditions
that might damage them. Verify identification of geosynthetics before using and examine them
for defects as material is placed.
B.
Subsurface Drainage Geotextile: Is a permeable nonwoven geotextile that allows water flow
while restricting the migration of soil particles into the drainage system. To be used for retaining
walls and perforated or french drains.
1.
Approved Subsurface Drainage Geotextile products are:
a.
b.
c.
US Fabrics: US 160NW
Tencate: Mirafi 160N.
Contractor may submit design alternatives complying with the following minimum
specifications and measured per test methods referenced:
ACCESS ROAD AND EARTH WORK
312000 - 3
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
2.
Installation:
a.
b.
C.
Place the geosynthetic to be as smooth and wrinkle free as possible. Keep
geosynthetic in place during installation of the aggregate, pin the geosynthetic to
the ground.
Width should be enough to conform to the trench perimeter with at least 6 inches
top overlap.
Separation Stability Geotextile: Woven geotextile that allows water on the surface to flow
through the gravel to the soil beneath, but is strong enough to reduce rutting and restrict
subgrade soil particles from working up into the gravel surface. To be used for roads and other
gravel surfaces.
1.
Approved Separation Stability Geotextile products are:
a.
b.
c.
US Fabrics: US 250
Tencate: Mirafi 550X.
Contractor may submit design alternatives complying with the following minimum
specifications and measured per test methods referenced:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
2.
Grab Tensile Strength: 250 lbf ; ASTM D 4632.
Elongation: 15% ; ASTM D 4632.
Trapezoidal Tear Strength: 90 lbf ; ASTM D 4533.
CBR Puncture Strength: 750 lbf; ASTM D 6241.
Apparent Opening Size:
No. 40 sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751.
Permittivity: 0.05 Sec -1, minimum; ASTM D 4491.
UV Stability: 70 percent after 500 hours' exposure; ASTM D 4355.
Installation:
a.
b.
c.
D.
Grab Tensile Strength: 160 lbf ; ASTM D 4632.
Elongation: 50% ; ASTM D 4632.
Trapezoidal Tear Strength: 60 lbf ; ASTM D 4533.
CBR Puncture Strength: 410 lbf; ASTM D 6241.
Apparent Opening Size: No. 70 sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751.
-1
Permittivity: 1.5 Sec , minimum; ASTM D 4491.
2
Water Flow Rate: 110 gal.min/ft ; ASTM D 4491
UV Stability: 70 percent after 500 hours' exposure; ASTM D 4355.
The geosynthetic reinforcement shall be placed directly on the prepared subgrade.
It should be rolled out flat and tight with no folds or wrinkles. Unroll the
geosynthetic in the direction of travel so that the machine direction (i.e., long axis)
of the roll is parallel with channelized traffic patterns.
Prior to fill placement, the geosynthetic can be held in place using U-shaped sod
staples or simply by strategically placing shovelfuls of the fill to weigh down the
geosynthetic.
A minimum aggregate fill thickness of 6 inches (15 cm) is required prior to
operation of tracked equipment on the geosynthetic.
Weed Barrier Geotextile: Nonwoven landscaping geotextile that designed to act as a weed
barrier, soil separator and light drainage filter on compounds. Fabric shall be inert to biological
degradation and resist naturally encountered chemicals, alkalis, and acids.
1.
Approved Weed Barrier Geotextile products are:
a.
b.
c.
US Fabrics: US 80NW
Tencate: Mirafi MSCAPE
Contractor may submit design alternatives complying with the following minimum
specifications and measured per test methods referenced:
ACCESS ROAD AND EARTH WORK
312000 - 4
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
2.
Installation:
a.
b.
2.3
Polypropylene or polyester fabric, 3 oz./sq. yd.
Grab Tensile Strength: 80 lbf ; ASTM D 4632.
Trapezoidal Tear Strength: 30 lbf ; ASTM D 4533.
Apparent Opening Size: No. 70 sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751.
UV Stability: 70 percent after 500 hours' exposure; ASTM D 4355.
Geotextile should be covered with stone or fill as soon as possible after installation
to prevent displacement by wind. Geotextile is easily rolled over installation area.
Ground surface should be free from sharp objects, large rocks, trash, or other
debris that will compromise or tear geotextile
Edges should be buried and overlapped a minimum of 3”.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Detectable Warning Tape:
Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape
manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and
4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility, with metallic core encased in
a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up
to 30 inches deep; colored as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Red: Electric.
Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials.
Orange: Telephone and other communications.
Blue: Water systems.
Green: Sewer systems.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by
settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork
operations.
B.
Preparation of subgrade for earthwork operations including removal of utilities, vegetation,
topsoil, debris, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface is specified in
Section 311000 - SITE CLEARING.
C.
Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls, which are specified in Section 312500
– EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS during earthwork operations.
D.
Provide protective insulating materials to protect subgrades and foundation soils against
freezing temperatures or frost.
3.2
ACCESS ROAD LAYOUT
A.
Minimum travel lane width – 12’ (not including shoulder)
B.
Shoulder – 1’ minimum each side
C.
Minimum turning radius – 50’ from road centerline.
D.
Increase width of roads in turns to 15’ along inner radius of 12’ roads, 18’ for 15’ width roads.
E.
Flare and level access road at a minimum 30’ radius or to meet local codes at intersection with
other roads and clear site lines.
ACCESS ROAD AND EARTH WORK
312000 - 5
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
F.
The connection of access roads to public thoroughfares shall conform to the standards of the
Department of Transportation having jurisdiction in that area.
G.
Maintain access roads in accordance with US DOT Gravel Roads: Maintenance and Design
Manual.
3.3
GRADING
A.
General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply
with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades.
Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface
tolerances.
Provide slope stabilization for all cut and fill areas beyond the road, ditch or compound.
Slope stabilization shall consist of loam and seed, loam and seed with geotextile fabric
and/or erosion control blanket, very coarse gravel, riprap, retaining wall or other industry
acceptable ATC-approved methods.
Access road Grading:
1.
Roads across level ground – 2% cross slope crown
a.
b.
2.
Roads parallel to slope – 2% cross slope
a.
b.
c.
3.
Ditch: 2’ wide, 1.5’ deep constructed with 2:1 slope on either side of road as
designed and indicated on the plans.
Provide corrugated HDPE or RCP cross drainage culverts as detailed in provided
construction drawings.
Ditch: 2’ wide, 1.5’ deep constructed with 2:1 slope on one side of up-gradient side
of road to prevent runoff from traveling across the road.
Cut slopes shall allow adequate space for a ditch.
Provide corrugated HDPE or RCP cross drainage culverts as detailed in provided
construction drawings.
Roads perpendicular to slope – 1 to 5% cross slope. Road surface to be flush with
existing grade to allow run-off to sheet across road.
a.
b.
Ditch: 2’ wide, 1.5’ deep constructed with 2:1 slope on either side of road as
designed and indicated on the plans.
Provide corrugated HDPE or RCP cross drainage culverts as detailed in provided
construction drawings.
4.
Shoulders – 5% cross slope
5.
Maximum vertical grades and curves
a.
b.
Tangents: 14% strongly preferred. May go up 18% for a length not to exceed 300’
if permission is granted by the ATC Construction manager.Sharp Curves and
Switch backs: 8%
Minimum length of a vertical curve is 50’ or a Design K factor greater than 10.
1)
C.
Prior to the start construction any vertical road grades in excess of the
guidelines noted above shall be immediately directed to the ATC
Construction Manager for design review and approval by ATC Engineering
& Field Operations.
Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from access roads, buildings, compounds, guy
anchors and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following
tolerances:
ACCESS ROAD AND EARTH WORK
312000 - 6
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
1.
2.
3.
Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch.
Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch.
Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.
D.
Compound Grading: The contractor shall surface the entire fenced in tower compound
including a one foot wide (12”) apron outside the fence line. The surface shall be a minimum
compacted thickness of three (3) inches of ¾” crushed stone. A1’ minimum depth swale (or
dimensions as noted in engineered plans) shall surround the up gradient perimeter of the
compound. The swale shale freely gravity drain to an appropriate location with no impact to
down gradient features such as the access road or other structures. Provide for one parking
spot and adequate turnaround area for a full sized pick up truck.
E.
Guy Anchor Grading: The contractor shall surface the entire fenced in area of each guy anchor
compound including a one foot wide (12”) apron outside the fence line. The surface shall be a
minimum compacted thickness of three (3) inches of ¾” crushed stone. A ditch of a 1’ minimum
depth (or dimensions as noted in engineered plans) lined with rip rap surrounding the up
gradient perimeter of the anchor compound(s) and at a distance adequate to ensure swale
erosion does not impact the integrity of the anchor system. The swale shale freely gravity drain
to an appropriate location with no impact to down gradient features such as the access road or
other structures.
F.
Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of ¼ inch when tested with a 10foot straightedge.
3.4
CULVERTS
A.
Corrugated HDPE or RCP cross drainage culverts shall be installed as detailed in the provided
construction drawings.
B.
Shall be rated for H-20 minimum loading, minimum of 12” diameter, minimum of 1 foot cover or
as designed, slope ranging from 2% to 5% or as per design plans.
C.
Outlet shall have rip-rap and be clean, full diameter openings at both inlet and outlet.
D.
Culvert layout shall match existing crossing topographical drainage patterns as feasible.
E.
Culverts from roadside ditches should trend to a 60 degree angle with the road centerline and
avoid 90 degree crossings.
F.
Ditches leading to culverts shall be lined with R-3 rip rap or erosion control blanket as designed
by an engineer for a minimum of 200 feet or as directed by the design engineer of record. A
downstream earthen or stone block shall be installed to prevent bypass flow. Erosion and
Sedimentation Controls are specified in Section 312500.
G.
Roads with grades greater than 10% shall have stone berms added to the ditch every 100 feet
or as directed by the design engineer of record with the first starting within 10 feet of the culvert
inlet.
3.5
GUARDRAIL
A.
Engineer shall evaluate the soils and terrain and give strong consideration to installing guardrail
in switchbacks. The following parameters are recommendations.
1.
In climates where winters are harsh
a.
b.
2.
2:1 Side Slope – Embankment fill height should not exceed 8’ vertical
3:1 Side Slope – Embankment fill height should not exceed 16’ vertical
In climates where winters are mild
ACCESS ROAD AND EARTH WORK
312000 - 7
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
a.
b.
B.
3.6
2:1 Side Slope – Embankment fill height should not exceed 12’ vertical
3:1 Side Slope – Embankment fill height should not exceed 24’ vertical
Top of guardrails should be 2’3” from top of grade and steel posts should be installed 6’-3” on
center.
TURNOUTS, WATERBARS OR CROSS SWALES
A.
Turnouts are channels that drain water away from roads or roadside ditches into well vegetated
areas.
1.
2.
B.
Turnouts should be located to take advantage of natural drainage courses or buffer areas
as much as possible.
An excavated sump, rock outlet or level spreader at the end of the turnout is required to
minimize sediment discharge and velocities.
Waterbars or cross swales may be used to direct runoff across active access roads to well
vegetated areas or sediment removal BMP’s.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Waterbars should discharge to the downslope side of the access road to that runoff will
flow away from the access road.
A 2% maximum grade is recommended to ensure proper drainage of water entering the
waterbar.
Shall be allowed only in areas with minor up gradient runoff, not to exceed 15% and shall
be underlayed with rip rap.
Waterbars should be spaced every:
a.
b.
3.7
5% slope – Spacing every 250’
5% - 15% slope - Spacing every 150’
DEWATERING
A.
The Contractor shall provide and maintain adequate dewatering equiptment to remove and
dispose of all surface and ground water entering excavations and other parts of the work area.
Each excavation shall be kept dry during sub-grade preparation and continually thereafter until
the construction to be provided is completed to the extent that no damage from hydrostatic
pressure, flotation or other cause will result. Ground water level shall be maintained at least 12
inches below the bottom of each excavation. Contractor shall dispose of contaminated water in
accordance with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water
accumulation.
1.
3.8
Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to
accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage
ditches.
EXPLOSIVES
A.
3.9
Explosives: Blasting or other use of explosives for excavation will be allowed if permitted by
state, federal, or local regulations. All blasting must be conducted by a licensed blasting firm,
pre-approved by ATC and will be reviewed on a case-by-case basis. Contractor shall discuss
any proposed blasting with ATC Construction Manager.
EXCAVATION, GENERAL
A.
Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of
surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include
rock, soil materials, and obstructions.
ACCESS ROAD AND EARTH WORK
312000 - 8
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
1.
2.
If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials
and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.
Remove rock to lines and grades indicated to permit installation of permanent
construction without exceeding the following dimensions:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
3.10
A.
EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES
Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch If
applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing
concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.
1.
2.
3.
3.11
A.
3.12
A.
Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations,
and subgrades.
EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES
Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.
Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below
frost line as required by site specific design, local utility provider specifications and local
codes.
Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or
conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of pipe
or conduit, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
C.
Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation.
Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms
to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.
Pile Foundations: Stop excavations 6 to 12 inches above bottom of pile cap before piles
are placed. After piles have been driven, remove loose and displaced material.
Excavate to final grade, leaving solid base to receive concrete pile caps.
Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Utility
Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or
minus 1 inch. Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended as bearing surfaces.
EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS
1.
B.
24 inches outside of concrete forms other than at footings.
12 inches outside of concrete forms at footings.
6 inches outside of minimum required dimensions of concrete cast against grade.
Outside dimensions of concrete walls indicated to be cast against rock without
forms or exterior waterproofing treatments.
6 inches beneath bottom of concrete slabs on grade.
6 inches beneath pipe in trenches, and the greater of 24 inches wider than pipe or
42 inches wide.
Clearance: 12 inches each side of pipe or conduit.
Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of
pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels
of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp
objects along trench subgrade.
1.
2.
3.
For pipes and conduit less than 6 inches in nominal diameter and flat-bottomed, multipleduct conduit units, hand-excavate trench bottoms and support pipe and conduit on an
undisturbed subgrade.
For pipes and conduit 6 inches or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of trench to
support bottom 90 degrees of pipe circumference. Fill depressions with tamped sand
backfill.
Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding
bearing material to allow for bedding course.
ACCESS ROAD AND EARTH WORK
312000 - 9
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
3.13
SUBGRADE INSPECTION
A.
Notify ATC Construction Manager when excavations have reached required subgrade.
B.
If ATC Construction Manager determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation
and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed.
C.
Proof-roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired
equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or
saturated subgrades.
1.
2.
D.
3.14
A.
3.15
A.
Contractor shall reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain,
accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by ATC Construction Manager, without
additional compensation.
UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION
Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of
concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean
concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi may be used when approved by ATC
Construction Manager.
STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS
Contractor shall stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without
intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover if required to
prevent windblown dust.
1.
2.
3.16
A.
Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.17
A.
Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of
remaining trees.
Stockpile soil materials in a location, acceptable to the ATC Construction Manager, that
will preclude having to relocate stockpiled soil materials that would otherwise delay or
impact the Work. Install silt fence at down gradient as directed by ATC Construction
Manager.
BACKFILL
1.
B.
Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction, repeating proof-rolling in direction
perpendicular to first direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph .
Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as
determined by ATC Construction Manager, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as
directed.
Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing,
waterproofing, and perimeter insulation.
Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents.
Testing and inspecting underground utilities.
Removing concrete formwork.
Removing trash and debris.
Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting.
Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.
Place suitable backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL
Place suitable backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
ACCESS ROAD AND EARTH WORK
312000 - 10
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
B.
Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated to provide a smooth
surface for conduit(s). Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and
barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits.
C.
Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches of bottom of footings with
satisfactory soil; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings. Concrete is specified in
Section 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.
D.
If conduit has less than 30 inches of cover (measured from the top of conduit to finish grade), or
is installed below the surface of roadways. Contractor shall place a minimum of 4 inches of
concrete above the top of pipe. Allow adequate time for concrete to set before backfilling.
E.
Place and compact initial backfill of subbase material free of particles larger than 1 inch in any
dimension, to a height of 12 inches over the utility pipe or conduit. Subsequent backfill shall be
placed in lifts between 8” and 12”.
1.
Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both
sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement
of piping or conduit. Contractor shall coordinate backfilling with utilities and municipal
inspection agencies as required.
F.
Backfill voids with satisfactory soil while installing and removing shoring and bracing.
G.
Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation and compact to
95% Standard Proctor.
H.
Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches
below subgrade under pavements and slabs.
3.18
SOIL FILL
A.
Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill
material will bond with existing material.
B.
Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
3.19
A.
Place soil fill on subgrades free of organic matter, mud, frost, snow, or ice.
SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL
Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before
compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.
1.
2.
3.20
A.
Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material.
Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material.
Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill.
Under building slabs, use engineered fill.
Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.
Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain
frost or ice.
Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry otherwise satisfactory soil material that
exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified
dry unit weight.
COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS
Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material
compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for
material compacted by hand-operated tampers.
ACCESS ROAD AND EARTH WORK
312000 - 11
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
B.
Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and
uniformly along the full length of each structure.
C.
Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight
according to ASTM D 1557:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
3.21
Under and around structures, tower foundations, building slabs, and steps, scarify and
recompact top 12 inches of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material
at 95 percent Standard Proctor; and areas within 10 feet of structures, building slabs,
steps, and pavements at 95 percent.
Install and compact structural fill if required under roads or foundations in accordance to
site specific geotechnical reports.
Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each
layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent.
Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade place
and pin geotextile fabric and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95
percent with flat roller.
For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 95
percent.
Compaction and soil material for access roads:
1.
Typical access road compaction shall be with sheepsfoot roller for base/subbase course
and flat roller for surface course.
2.
Under access roads with minimal slopes, good subgrade or structural fill, clear, grub and
scarify road area. Recompact top 12 inches of subgrade. Install one layer of geo-textile
fabric (Section 2.2 B) and pin to subgrade. Install surface layer, per section 2.1 D and
track in with a bulldozer or sheepsfoot roller. Dress road as required after construction
with motor grader and compact with a vibratory road roller.
3.
Under access roads with marginal to excessive slopes and marginal subgrade, clear,
grub and scarify road area. Install one layer of geo-textile fabric (Section 2.2 (B)) and pin
to subgrade. Install base layer, per section 2.1 E and track in with a bulldozer or
sheepsfoot roller, install surface layer per section 2.1 D. Dress road as required after
construction with motor grader and compact with a vibratory road roller.
4.
Under access roads with severe subgrade, clear, grub and scarify road area. Install one
layer of geo-textile fabric (Section 2.2 (B)) and pin to subgrade. Install subbase layer per
section 2.1 F and track in with a bulldozer or sheepsfoot roller, install base layer, per
section 2.1 E and install surface layer per section 2.1 D. Dress road as required after
construction with motor grader and compact with a road roller.
5.
For extreme conditions, consult with geotechnical engineer and ATC AE group.
SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES
A.
Place subbase and base course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
B.
On prepared subgrade, place subbase and base course under pavements and walks as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Install separation geotextile on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written
instructions, overlapping sides and ends.
Place base course material over subbase course.
Place surface course material over base course.
Shape subbase and base course to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades.
Place subbase and base course 6 inches or less in compacted thickness in a single
layer.
Place subbase and base course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers
of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3
inches thick.
ACCESS ROAD AND EARTH WORK
312000 - 12
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
7.
C.
3.22
Compact subbase and base course at optimum moisture content to required grades,
lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit
weight according to ASTM D 1557.
Pavement Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of subbase and base course to prevent
lateral movement. Construct shoulders, at least 12 inches wide, of satisfactory soil materials
and compact simultaneously with each subbase and base layer to not less than 95 percent of
maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Independent Testing Agency: Cooperate with the Independent Testing Agency engaged by
ATC for field quality control activities required in Section 014320, “Quality Control, Testing and
Special Inspection Services.” Provide at least 48 hours notice to testing agency prior to the time
testing and/or inspection is required. Allow inspectors access to work areas, as needed to
perform inspections.
B.
Tests and Inspections: Engage Independent Testing Agency in accordance with Section 014320
“Quality Control, Testing and Special Inspection Services.” for testing of listed properties.
3.23
PROTECTION
A.
Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep
free of trash and debris. Loam and seed non-gravel surface as soon as possible or as weather
permits. Stabilize steep grades prior to loam and seed with geotextile fabric. Greater than 2:1
slopes shall be graded and stabilized with geotextile fabric and covered with large diameter
riprap.
B.
Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed
surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent
construction operations or weather conditions.
1.
C.
Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing,
backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.
1.
3.24
A.
Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by ATC Construction
Manager; reshape and recompact.
Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work,
and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.
DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil,
trash, stumps, brush, trees and debris, and legally dispose of it off the ATC's property.
END OF SECTION
ACCESS ROAD AND EARTH WORK
312000 - 13
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
SECTION 312500
EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
1.2
Attention is directed to all Sections within DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which
are hereby made a part of this Section of the Specifications.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1.
2.
Control measures to prevent all erosion, siltation and sedimentation of wetlands,
waterways, construction areas, adjacent areas and off-site areas.
Control measures shall be accomplished adjacent to or in the following work areas:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Additional means of protection shall be provided by the Contractor as required for
continued or unforeseen erosion problems, at no additional cost to ATC.
Periodic maintenance of all sediment control structures shall be provided to ensure
intended purpose is accomplished. Sediment control measures shall be in working
condition at the end of each day.
After any significant rainfall, sediment control structures shall be inspected by the
Contractor for integrity. Any damaged device shall be corrected immediately.
Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and will be performed under
the designated Sections:
1.
2.
1.3
Soil stockpiles and on-site storage and staging areas.
Cut and fill slopes and other stripped and graded areas.
Constructed and existing swales and ditches.
Retention ponds.
At edge of wetlands areas, if applicable, as indicated.
Section 311000 – SITE CLEARING for protection of existing tress and other vegetation to
remain.
Section 312000 – ACCESS ROADS AND EARTH WORK for soil materials, excavating,
backfilling, and site grading and removal of site utilities.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
When applicable, comply with the requirements of Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan
prepared for the NPDES permit, Conservation Commission Order of Conditions, Special Permit
conditions from local permitting agency, and all other applicable requirements of governing
authorities having jurisdiction. The specifications and drawings are not represented as being
comprehensive, but rather convey the intent to provide complete slope protection and erosion
control for both the project site and adjacent property.
1.
Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures to prevent soil erosion
and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and
EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS
312500 - 1
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
2.
3.
walkways, according to a sediment and erosion control plan specific to the site, that
complies with EPA 832/R-92-005 or requirements of authorities having jurisdiction,
whichever is more stringent.
Regulatory Order of Conditions ((If applicable))
Furnish and install signage required such as Conservation or Department of
Environmental Protection permit numbers.
B.
Erosion control measures shall be established at the beginning of construction and maintained
during the entire period of construction. On-site areas which are subject to erosion, and off-site
areas which are especially vulnerable to damage from erosion and/or sedimentation, are to be
identified and receive special attention.
C.
Install and maintain any and all required signage with environmental or wetlands permit
numbers including but not limited to the Department of Environmental Protection (DEP) permit
number.
D.
All land-disturbing activities are to be planned and conducted to minimize the size of the area to
be exposed at any one time, and the length of time of exposure.
E.
Surface water runoff originating upgrade of exposed areas should be controlled to reduce
erosion and sediment loss during the period of exposure.
F.
When the increase in the peak rates and velocity of storm water runoff resulting from a landdisturbing activity is sufficient to cause accelerated erosion of the receiving stream bed, provide
measures to control both the velocity and rate of release so as to minimize accelerated erosion
and increased sedimentation of the stream.
G.
All land-disturbing activities are to be planned and conducted so as to minimize off-site
sedimentation damage.
H.
Clean out and dispose of all sediment once the storage capacity of the sediment facility is
reduced by one-half.
I.
Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion and sedimentation control measures during construction
until permanent vegetation has been established.
J.
Remove erosion and sedimentation controls after 70% stabilization has been achieved and
restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Straw Bales: Wire or nylon bound bales of straw, oriented around sides, rather than over and
under.
B.
Stakes: Stakes for bales shall be one of the following materials: Wood stakes of sound
hardwood 2 by 2 inches in size or steel reinforcing bars of at least No. 4 size. Lengths shall be
approximately three feet.
C.
Siltation Fence:
properties:
1.
Fabricated or prefabricated unit consisting of the following filter fabric
Grab Tensile Strength
120
ASTM D1682
EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS
312500 - 2
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
D.
Elongation at Failure (%)
Mullen Burst Strength (PSI)
Puncture Strength (lbs)
Slurry Flow Rate (gal/min/sf)
Equivalent Opening Size
Ultraviolet Radiation Stability (%)
20
ASTM D1682
200
ASTM D3786
40
ASTM D751 (modified)
0.3
ASTM 5141
30 US Std Sieve CW-02215
80
ASTM G26
Protective Measures: As temporary coverings on ground areas subject to erosion, provide one
of the following protective measures, and as directed by the ATC Construction ManagerATC:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Hay or straw temporary mulch, 100 pounds per 1,000 square feet.
Wood fiber cellulose temporary mulch, 35 pounds per 1,000 square feet.
Tackafier for anchoring mulch or straw shall be a non-petroleum based liquid bonding
agent specifically made for anchoring hay or straw.
Provide natural (jute, wood excelsior) or man-made (glass fiber) covering with suitable
staples or anchors to secure to ground surface. Note that wire stapes and nonbiodegradable coverings shall not be used for any area that will be mown turf.
Temporary vegetative cover for graded areas shall be undamaged, air dry threshed straw
or hay free of undesirable weed seed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
A.
Strategy shall be for controlling soil erosion and sedimentation during and after construction of
the proposed development.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.2
Prior to grubbing or any earthwork operations, siltation fence shall be installed across the
slope on a contour at the downhill limit of the work.
All siltation fence and straw bale barriers shall be inspected by the contractor on a weekly
basis or following any significant rainfall (1/2 inch or more) or snowmelt. All damaged
erosion control devices shall be repaired and/or replaced immediately. Trapped
sediment shall be removed before it has accumulated to one half of the installed siltation
fence or straw barrier height.
Intercepted sediment shall be returned to the site and incorporated into the project.
For cold weather climates, additional erosion control methods may be implemented for
construction occurring after November 15. For every rainfall event, inspection shall be
daily with particular attention paid to weather predictions to ensure that these measures
are properly in place to handle large amounts of runoff from heavy rains and thaws.
STRAW BALE BARRIERS
A.
Excavation shall be to the width of the bale and the length of the proposed barrier to a minimum
depth of 4 inches.
B.
Bales shall be placed in a single row, lengthwise on proposed line, with ends of adjacent bales
tightly abutting one another. In swales and ditches the barrier shall extend to such a length that
the bottoms of the end bales are higher in elevation than the top of the lowest middle bale.
C.
Staking shall be accomplished to securely anchor bales by driving at least two stakes or rebars
through each bale to a minimum depth of 18 inches.
D.
The gaps between bales shall be filled by wedging straw in the gaps to prevent water from
escaping between the bales.
EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS
312500 - 3
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
The excavated soil shall be backfilled against the barrier. Backfill shall conform to ground level
on the downhill side and shall be built up to 4 inches on the uphill side. Loose straw shall then
be scattered over the area immediately uphill from a straw barrier.
3.3
STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE
A.
Stone size: Use AASHTO size No. 3 (2-1/2”).
B.
Length: As effective, but not less than 30 feet.
C.
Thickness: Not less than eight inches.
D.
Width: Not less than full width of all points on ingress or egress, but not less than 20 feet.
E.
Washing: When necessary, wheels shall be cleaned to remove sediment prior to entrance onto
public right-of-way. When washing is required, it shall be done on an area stabilized with
crushed stone which drains into an approved sediment trap or sediment basin. All sediment
shall be prevented from entering any storm drain, ditch, or watercourse through the use of sand
bags, gravel boards or other approved methods.
F.
Maintenance: The entrance shall be maintained in a condition which will prevent tracking or
flowing of sediment onto public rights-or-way. This may require periodic top dressing with
additional stone as conditions demand and repair and/or cleanout of any measures used to trap
sediment. All sediment spoiled, dropped, washed or tracked onto public rights-of-way must be
removed immediately.
3.4
STONE BERMS
A.
Stone size: Use AASHTO size No. 3 (2-1/2”).
B.
Height: Should be half of the total ditch depth.
C.
Place crushed stone berms in locations required and as directed. Berms shall have side slopes
of 1:3 or less.
D.
Stone check dams shall be installed in the drainage ditches to prevent erosion prior to the
stabilization of the channels. Erosion control blanket shall also be installed in all ditches to be
vegetated.
E.
Inspect stone berms periodically and replace and/or regrade crushed stone as required.
3.5
OUTLET PROTECTION
A.
Stone size: AASHTO R-3 Rip Rap (3”-6” clean stone) or as designed by the engineer and
indicated on the plans.
B.
Depth: 1.5 times the stone size.
C.
Length: As effective, but not less than 8 feet.
D.
Outlet protection shall be installed on a level grade to prevent scour and erosion at pipe or
channel outfalls.
EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS
312500 - 4
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
3.6
EROSION CONTROL BLANKET
A. Erosion control blankets should be used on all slopes greater than 3H:1V or steeper and where
potential exists for sediment pollution to receiving surface waters. Erosion control blankets should
be used for all seeded areas within 50 feet of surface water, regardless of slope. Since rock
slopes pose little, if any, potential for erosion, cut slopes in competent bedrock and rock fill slopes
do not need to be blanketed.
B. Ditches leading to culverts shall be lined with R-3 rip rap or erosion control blanket as designed
by an engineer for a minimum of 200 feet or as directed by the design engineer of record. To prevent bypass flow a downstream earthen or stone block shall be installed.
1. Approved Erosion Control blanket products for slope stability design are:
a. Tensar: North American Green S75(3H:1V), S150(2H:1V), SC150(1.5H:1V)
b. Propex: Landlok S2(3H:1V), CS2(2H:1V), C2(1.5H:1V)
c. Contractor may submit design alternatives complying with the following minimum
specifications:
(3H:1V):
1) Functional Longevity: Short-Term Degradable (1 Year)
2) Max Short Term Shear Stress (Unvegetated): 1.5 lb/ft2
3) Max Short Term Velocity (Unvegetated): 5.0 ft/sec
(2H:1V):
1) Functional Longevity: Extended-Term Degradable (1-2 Years)
2) Max Short Term Shear Stress (Unvegetated): 1.75 lb/ft2
3) Max Short Term Velocity (Unvegetated): 6.0 ft/sec
(1.5H:1V):
1) Functional Longevity: Long-Term Degradable (2-3 Years)
2) Max Short Term Shear Stress (Unvegetated): 2.0 lb/ft2
3) Max Short Term Velocity (Unvegetated): 6.0-8.0 ft/sec
a. Installation: Wherever erosion control blankets are specified, they should be installed or applied according to the manufacture’s recommendations. The following are recommended installation guidelines:
i.
Prior to blanket installation, prepare seed bed including any necessary
application of lime, fertilizer, and seed. Slope surface shall be free of
rocks, clods, sticks, and grass.
ii.
Begin at the top of the slope by anchoring the blanket in a 6” deep by 6”
wide trench with approximately 12” of blanket extended beyond the upslope portion of trench.
iii.
Anchor the blanket with a row of staples/stakes approximately 12” apart
in the bottom of the trench. Backfill and compact after stapling. Apply
seed to compacted soil and fold remaining 12” over the seed and compacted soil. Secure blanket over compacted soil with a row of staples 12”
apart across width of blanket.
iv.
Roll the blankets down or horizontally across the slope in direction of water flow. Refer to manufacturer recommended stapling patterns for
steepness and length of slope being blanketed. Blankets should not be
stretched. It must maintain good soil contact.
EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS
312500 - 5
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
v.
vi.
The edges of parallel blankets must be stapled with approximately 2”-5”
overlap depending on blanket type.
Consecutive blankets spliced down the slope must be placed end over
end (shingle style) with an approximate 3” of overlap. Staple through
overlapped area approximately 12” apart across entire blanket width.
2. Approved Erosion Control blanket products will vary for ditch stability and should be calculated by the design engineer of record using the North American Greeen or Landlok
software on their website or provide R-3 rip rap.
a. Installation: Wherever erosion control blankets are specified, they should be installed or applied according to the manufacture’s recommendations. The following are recommended installation guidelines:
i.
Prior to blanket installation, prepare seed bed including any necessary
application of lime, fertilizer, and seed. Slope surface shall be free of
rocks, clods, sticks, and grass.
ii.
Begin at the top of the slope by anchoring the blanket in a 6” deep by 6”
wide trench with approximately 12” of blanket extended beyond the upslope portion of trench.
iii.
Anchor the blanket with a row of staples/stakes approximately 12” apart
in the bottom of the trench. Backfill and compact after stapling. Apply
seed to compacted soil and fold remaining 12” over the seed and compacted soil. Secure blanket over compacted soil with a row of staples 12”
apart across width of blanket.
iv.
Roll center blanket in direction of water flow in bottom of channel. Blankets will unroll with appropriate side against soil surface. All blankets
must be securely fastened to soil surface by placing staples/stakes at in
appropriate locations as shown in the manufactures staple pattern guide.
v.
Place consecutive blankets end over end (shingle style) with a 4”-6”
overlap. Use a double row of staples staggered 4” apart and 4” on center
to secure blankets.
vi.
Full length edge of blanket at top of side slopes must be anchored with a
row of staples/stakes approximately 12” apart in a 6” deep by 6” wide
trench. Backfill and compact the trench after stapling.
vii.
Adjacent blankets must be overlapped approximately 2”-5” depending on
blanket type and stapled.
viii.
In high flow channel applications, a staple check slot is recommended at
30 to 40 foot intervals. Use a double row of staples staggered 4” apart
and 4” on center over the entire width of the channel.
ix.
The terminal end of the blankets must be anchored with a row of staples/stakes approximately 12” apart in a 6” deep by 6” wide trench. Backfill and compact the trench after stapling.
3.7
SILT FENCE
A.
Excavate a 6 inch trench along the upstream side of the desired fence location.
EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS
312500 - 6
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
B.
Drive fence posts a minimum of 1’-6” into the ground. Install fence, well-staked at maximum
eight foot intervals in locations as shown on Drawings. Secure fabric to fence and bury fabric
end within the six inch deep trench cut.
C.
Lay lower 12 inches of silt fence into the trench, 6 inches deep and 6 inches wide. Backfill
trench and compact.
D.
Overlap joints in fabric at post to prevent leakage of silt at seam.
E.
Sediment shall be removed when accumulations reach half the aboveground height of the
fence.
F.
Silt fence shall be placed at level existing grade. Both ends of the fence shall be extended at
least 8 feet up slope at 45 degrees to the main fence alignment.
3.8
DUST CONTROL
A.
Throughout the construction period the Contractor shall carry on an active program for the
control of fugitive dust within all site construction zones, or areas disturbed as a result of
construction. Control methods shall include the following: Apply calcium chloride at a uniform
rate of one and one-half (1 ½) pounds per square yard in areas subject to blowing. For
emergency control of dust apply water to affected areas. The source of supply and the method
of application for water are the responsibility of the contractor.
B.
Where the ATC access road meets the public right of way, the General Contractor shall ensure
the public right of way is kept free and clear of all dirt, dust, construction debris, mud or silt. This
may require dust control, street sweeping or whatever means necessary to comply with federal,
state and local regulations and ensure safe travel to the public.
C.
The frequency and methods of application for fugitive dust control shall be as directed by the
ATC Construction Manager.
3.9
TEMPORARY PROTECTIVE COVERINGS (AFTER GROWING SEASON)
A.
Place temporary covering for erosion and sedimentation control on all areas that have been
graded and left exposed after October 30. Contractor shall have the choice to use either or
both of the methods described herein.
B.
Hay or straw shall be anchored in-place by one of the following methods and as approved by
the ATC Construction Manager: Mechanical “crimping” with a tractor drawn device specifically
devised to cut mulch into top two inches of soil surface or application of non-petroleum based
liquid tackifier, applied at a rate and in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions for specific
mulch material utilized.
1.
For climates typically receiving snowfall greater than 24” annually, if the seeding of the
undisturbed areas is not completed by October 1 of the year of construction, then within
the next 10 calendar days, these areas shall be graded smooth and seeded to a winter
crop of rye at a rate of 3 lbs. per 1,000 sq. ft. Incorporate ground limestone at a rate of
130 lbs per 1,000 sq. ft. followed by a 10-10 fertilizer at a rate of 14 lbs. per 1,000 sq. ft.
into the soil prior to rye seeding. Hay mulch applied at a rate of 100 lbs per 1,000 sq feet.
If rye seed does not make adequate growth (80% cover greater than 2”) by November
15, then on that date, hay mulch shall be applied at the rate of 2 ton per acre to provide
winter protection.
EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS
312500 - 7
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
C.
Placement of mesh or blanket matting and anchoring in place shall be in accordance with
manufacturer’s printed instructions.
D.
Inspect protective coverings periodically and reset or replace materials as required.
3.10
PERMANENT SOIL CONTROL MEASURES
A.
Seeding for all slopes, channels, ditches or any undisturbed land area shall be completed within
fifteen calendar days after final grading has been completed. When it is not feasible, or
practical, stabilize disturbed land, temporary erosion control measures shall be implemented
within thirty calendar days of the exposure of soil.
B.
Final seeding of the graded undisturbed areas shall be monitored to ensure adequate growth.
Use hay mulch to encourage growth. A suitable binder such as Curasol or RMB Plus shall be
used on hay mulch for wind control. Biodegradable netting and/or rip rap shall be installed on
steep slopes (3:1 and steeper) and on areas of concentrated flow.
END OF SECTION
EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS
312500 - 8
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
SECTION 315000
EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
Attention is directed to all Sections within DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which
are hereby made a part of this Section of the Specifications.
B.
All work within this section shall comply with applicable OSHA standards including, but not
limited to, OSHA 1926 Subpart P, Excavations.
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1.
B.
Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and will be performed under
the designated Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Section 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE for foundation excavations and concrete.
Section 312000 – ACCESS ROADS AND EARTH WORK for excavating and backfilling of
trenches.
Section 316329 - DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS for foundation
excavations.
Section 338110 – STEEL COMMUNICATION STRUCTURES for foundation excavations
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Contractor is responsible to furnish, install, monitor, and maintain excavation support and
protection system capable of supporting excavation sidewalls and of resisting soil and
hydrostatic pressure and superimposed and construction loads.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.4
Prevent surface water from entering excavations by grading, dikes, dewatering or other
means.
Install excavation support and protection systems without damaging existing buildings,
pavements, and other improvements adjacent to excavation.
Fully comply with all local, state and federal codes.
Provide vibration monitoring to prevent impacts on adjacent structures and utilities.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Temporary excavation support and protection systems.
Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of adjoining construction
and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by the absence of, the
installation of, or the performance of excavation support and protection systems.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Geotechnical Information: A geotechnical report has been prepared for this Project and is available for
information only.
Make additional test borings and conduct other exploratory operations
necessary for safe excavation support and protection.
EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION
315000 - 1
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide materials that are either new or in serviceable condition.
B.
Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, ASTM A 690/A 690M, or ASTM A 992/A 992M.
C.
Steel Sheet Piling: ASTM A 328/A 328M, ASTM A 572/A 572M, or ASTM A 690/A 690M; with
continuous interlocks.
D.
Cast-in-Place Concrete: Foundation concrete as defined in Section 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE
CONCRETE.
E.
Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M/A-996, Grade 60 deformed
F.
Timber Piling: ASTM D 25, species listed in AWPA C3, pressure-treated in accordance with
AWPA C3.
G.
Seven Wire Strand: ASTM A 416, Grade 250 or 270., uncoated seven-wire, low-relaxation
strand.
H.
Grout: Suitable for service, minimum 4,000 psi.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by
settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards that could develop
during excavation support and protection system operations.
1.
B.
Shore, support, and protect utilities encountered.
Install excavation support and protection systems to ensure minimum interference with roads,
streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1.
Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities
without obtaining permission from the ATC Construction Manager and permits from
municipal authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate safe routes around closed or
obstructed access/egress ways.
C.
Locate excavation support and protection systems clear of permanent construction so that
forming and finishing of concrete surfaces are not impeded.
D.
Monitor excavation support and protection systems during excavation progress and for as long
as excavation remains open. Promptly correct bulges, breakage, or other evidence of
movement to ensure that excavation support and protection systems remain stable.
E.
Promptly repair damages to any and all adjacent facilities caused by installing excavation
support and protection systems.
3.2
SOLDIER BEAMS AND LAGGING
A.
Install steel soldier beams before starting excavation. Space soldier beams at regular intervals
as determined by the design documents and never exceed allowable flexural strength of wood
lagging. Accurately align exposed faces of flanges to vary not more than 2 inches from a
horizontal line and not more than 1:120 out of vertical alignment.
EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION
315000 - 2
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
B.
3.3
Install wales horizontally at spacings indicated on the approved shop drawings and secure to
soldier beams.
SHEET PILING
A.
3.4
Before starting excavation, install one-piece sheet piling lengths and tightly interlock to form a
continuous barrier. Accurately align exposed faces of sheet piling to vary not more than 2
inches from a horizontal line and not more than 1:120 out of vertical alignment. Cut tops of
sheet piling to uniform elevation at top of excavation.
TIEBACKS
A.
Tiebacks: Drill for, install, grout, and tension tiebacks into position. Test load-carrying capacity
of each tieback and replace and retest deficient tiebacks.
1.
2.
3.
3.5
Test loading shall be observed by a qualified professional engineer responsible for design
of excavation support and protection system.
Maintain tiebacks in place until permanent construction is able to withstand lateral earth
and hydrostatic pressures.
Inspect tiebacks periodically to confirm anchors exhibit no movement.
BRACING
A.
Bracing: Locate bracing to clear columns, floor framing construction, and other permanent
work. If necessary to move brace, install new bracing before removing original brace.
1.
2.
3.
3.6
Do not place bracing where it will be cast into or included in permanent concrete work.
Install internal bracing, if required, to prevent spreading or distortion of braced frames.
Maintain bracing until structural elements are supported by other bracing or until
permanent construction is able to withstand lateral earth and hydrostatic pressures.
REMOVAL AND REPAIRS
A.
Remove excavation support and protection systems when construction has progressed
sufficiently to support excavation and bear soil and hydrostatic pressures. Remove in stages to
avoid disturbing underlying soils or damaging structures, pavements, facilities, and utilities.
1.
2.
3.
Remove excavation support and protection systems to a minimum depth of 48 inches
below overlaying construction and abandon remainder.
Fill voids immediately with approved backfill compacted to density specified in Section
312000 – ACCESS ROADS AND EARTH MOVING.
Repair or replace, as approved by ATC Construction Manager, adjacent work damaged
or displaced by removing excavation support and protection systems.
END OF SECTION
EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION
315000 - 3
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
SECTION 316329
DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
1.2
Attention is directed to all Sections within DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which
are hereby made a part of this Section of the Specifications.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Dry-installed drilled piers and caisson tower foundations
Slurry displacement-installed drilled piers.
Dry-installed or slurry displacement-installed drilled piers at Contractor's choice.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer that has specialized in drilled-pier work.
B.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1.
2.
1.4
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
AWS D1.4/D1.4M, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel."
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Existing Utilities: Call local Dig Safe (811) utility locate agency a minimum of 72 hours prior to
any excavation. Locate existing underground utilities before excavating drilled piers. If utilities
are to remain in place, provide protection from damage during drilled-pier operations. Should
uncharted or incorrectly charted piping or other utilities be encountered during excavation, adapt
drilling procedure if necessary to prevent damage to utilities. Cooperate with ATC and utility
companies in keeping services and facilities in operation without interruption. Repair damaged
utilities to satisfaction of utility owner.
B.
Project-Site Information: A geotechnical report has been prepared for this Project and is
available for information only. Make additional test borings and conduct other exploratory
operations necessary for drilled piers.
C.
Survey Work: Record actual measurements of each drilled pier's location, shaft diameter,
bottom and top elevations, deviations from specified tolerances, and other specified data.
Record and maintain information pertinent to each drilled pier and indicate on Record Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Drilled-Pier Standard: Comply with ACI 336.1 except as modified in this Section.
DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS
316329 - 1
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
2.2
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A.
Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.
B.
Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed.
C.
Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M, galvanized.
D.
Deformed-Steel Wire: ASTM A 496/A 496M.
2.3
CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.
Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of same type, brand, and
source, throughout Project:
1.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type II
a.
B.
Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C
Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33/C 33M, graded, 3/4-inch-nominal maximum coarseaggregate size. Provide aggregate from a single source.
1.
Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
C.
Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.
D.
Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other
admixtures and that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in
hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.
1.
2.
3.
4.
E.
2.4
Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.
Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.
High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G.
Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.
Sand-Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type II; clean natural sand,
ASTM C 404; and water to result in grout with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 1000
psi, of consistency required for application.
STEEL CASINGS
A.
Steel Pipe Casings: ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C, or ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plate,
with joints full-penetration welded according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
B.
Liners: Comply with ACI 336.1.
2.5
SLURRY
A.
Slurry: Pulverized bentonite mixed with water to form stable colloidal suspension; complying
with ACI 336.1 for density, viscosity, sand content, and pH.
DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS
316329 - 2
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
2.6
CONCRETE MIXTURES
A.
Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than
portland cement according to ACI 301 limits as if concrete were exposed to deicing chemicals.
B.
Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.10 percent by weight of
cement.
C.
Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:
1.
2.
Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4000 psi
Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50; Minimum Slump: Capable of
maintaining the following slump until completion of placement:
a.
b.
c.
3.
2.7
4 inches for dry, uncased, or permanent-cased drilling method.
6 inches for temporary-casing drilling method.
7 inches for slurry displacement method.
Air Content: Do not air entrain concrete.
REINFORCEMENT FABRICATION
A.
2.8
Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."
CONCRETE MIXING
A.
Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and
ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information.
1.
deliver
concrete
according
to
When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from
1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and
delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
3.2
Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by
settlement, lateral movement, vibration, and other hazards created by drilled-pier operations.
EXCAVATION
A.
Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to bearing elevations regardless of character of surface and
subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil
materials, and obstructions. Notify the ATC Construction Manager immediately of all
obstructions that may result in a change in scope and fees.
1.
2.
Obstructions: Unclassified excavation may include removal of unanticipated boulders,
concrete, masonry, or other subsurface obstructions.
Obstructions: Unclassified excavated materials may include removal of unanticipated
boulders, concrete, masonry, or other subsurface obstructions. Payment for removing
obstructions that cannot be removed by conventional augers fitted with soil or rock teeth,
drilling buckets, or underreaming tools attached to drilling equipment of size, power,
torque, and downthrust necessary for the Work is according to Contract provisions for
changes in the Work.
DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS
316329 - 3
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
B.
Classified Excavation: Excavation is classified as standard excavation, special excavation, and
obstruction removal and includes excavation to bearing elevations as follows:
1.
2.
Standard excavation includes excavation accomplished with conventional augers fitted
with soil or rock teeth, drilling buckets, or underreaming tools attached to drilling
equipment of size, power, torque, and downthrust necessary for the Work.
Special excavation includes excavation that requires special equipment or procedures
where drilled-pier excavation equipment used in standard excavation, operating at
maximum power, torque, and downthrust, cannot advance the shaft.
a.
Special excavation requires use of special rock augers, core barrels, air tools,
blasting, or other methods of hand excavation.
b.
Blasting shall only be done if approved by ATC Construction and Engineering and
must be done by a licensed blaster.
Earth seams, rock fragments, and voids included in rock excavation area are
considered rock for full volume of shaft from initial contact with rock.
c.
3.
Obstructions: Payment for removing unanticipated boulders, concrete, masonry, or other
subsurface obstructions that cannot be removed by conventional augers fitted with soil or
rock teeth, drilling buckets, or underreaming tools attached to drilling equipment of size,
power, torque, and downthrust necessary for the Work is according to Contract provisions
for changes in the Work.
C.
Prevent surface water from entering excavated shafts. Conduct water to site drainage facilities.
D.
Excavate shafts for drilled piers to indicated elevations. Remove all loose material from bottom
of excavation.
1.
2.
3.
Excavate bottom of drilled piers to level plane within 1:12 tolerance.
Remove water from excavated shafts before concreting.
Excavate rock sockets of dimensions indicated.
4.
Do not excavate shafts deeper than elevations indicated unless approved by ATC
Construction Manager.
Payment for additional authorized excavation is according to Contract provisions for
changes in the Work.
5.
E.
End-Bearing Drilled Piers: Probe with auger to a depth below bearing elevation, equal to
diameter of the bearing area of drilled pier. Determine whether voids, clay seams, or solution
channels exist.
1.
Fill augur-probe holes with grout.
F.
End-Bearing Drilled Piers: Probe with auger to a depth of 96 inches below bottom elevation of
shaft, and visually inspect and classify soil. Verify continuity and thickness of strata.
G.
Excavate shafts for closely spaced drilled piers and for drilled piers occurring in fragile or sand
strata only after adjacent drilled piers are filled with concrete and allowed to set.
H.
Slurry Displacement Method: Stabilize excavation with slurry maintained a minimum of 60
inches above ground-water level and above unstable soil strata to prevent caving or sloughing
of shaft. Maintain slurry properties before concreting.
1.
Excavate and complete concreting of drilled pier on same day, or redrill, clean, and test
slurry in excavation before concreting.
2.
Care shall be taken to ensure the proper removal of slurry to ensure there is no slurry
caking, collapse of shaft walls or soil infiltration into concrete pour.
DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS
316329 - 4
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
I.
J.
Temporary Casings: Install watertight steel casings of sufficient length and thickness to prevent
water seepage into shaft; to withstand compressive, displacement, and withdrawal stresses;
and to maintain stability of shaft walls.
1.
Remove temporary casings, maintained in plumb position, during concrete placement
and before initial set of concrete[, or leave temporary casings in place.
2.
Under no circumstances shall corrugated metal pipe (CMP) be used as a temporary
casing. If CMP is used as a form on a round concrete pour it must be fully removed and
shall never be left above or below grade as this reduces the cohesive values calculated in
the foundation design.
Bells: Excavate bells for drilled piers to shape, base thickness, and slope angle indicated by
design drawings. Excavate bottom of bells to level plane and remove loose material before
placing concrete.
1.
K.
Tolerances: Construct drilled piers to remain within ACI 336.1 tolerances.
1.
3.3
Shore bells in unstable soil conditions to prevent cave-in during excavation, inspection,
and concreting.
If location or out-of-plumb tolerances are exceeded, provide corrective construction.
Submit corrective construction proposals to ATC Construction Manager for review by
ATC Engineering before proceeding.
PERMANENT STEEL CASING INSTALLATION
A.
This method is NOT desired by ATC and shall only be considered if the soil conditions require
this construction methodology. If required, the deployment of a permanent steel casing shall be
included in the sealed foundation design. If due to unique soil conditions not identified in the
geotechnical report the Contractor must install a permanent steel casing that was not included
in the sealed foundation design the ATC Construction Manager must be notified to review and
approve the change with the Engineer of record. Install permanent steel casings of minimum
wall thickness indicated and of diameter not less than diameter of drilled pier.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.4
Install casings as excavation proceeds, to maintain sidewall stability.
Fabricate bottom edge of lowest casing section with cutting shoe capable of penetrating
rock and achieving water seal.
Connect casing sections by continuous penetration welds to form watertight, continuous
casing.
Remove and replace or repair casings that have been damaged during installation and
that could impair strength or efficiency of drilled pier.
Fill annular void between casing and shaft wall with grout.
STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with recommendations in CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing,
and supporting reinforcement.
B.
Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, and other materials that reduce or
destroy bond with concrete.
C.
Fabricate and install reinforcing cages symmetrically about axis of shafts in a single unit.
D.
Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement during concreting.
Maintain minimum cover over reinforcement.
DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS
316329 - 5
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
E.
Use templates to set anchor bolts, leveling plates, and other accessories furnished in work of
other Sections. Provide blocking and holding devices to maintain required position during final
concrete placement.
F.
Protect exposed ends of extended reinforcement, dowels, or anchor bolts from mechanical
damage and exposure to weather.
3.5
CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A.
B.
Place concrete in continuous operation and without segregation immediately after inspection
and approval of shaft by a qualified Special Inspector.
1.
Construct a construction joint if concrete placement is delayed more than one hour. Level
top surface of concrete and insert joint dowel bars. Before placing remainder of concrete,
clean surface laitance, roughen, and slush concrete with commercial bonding agent or
with sand-cement grout mixed at ratio of 1:1.
2.
The size, quantity and type of dowel bars, key way(s) and bonding agent shall be
determined by the Engineer of record. Notify ATC Construction Manager immediately if a
cold joint is required on any concrete pour specified as monolithic.
Dry Method: Place concrete to fall vertically down the center of drilled pier without striking sides
of shaft or steel reinforcement.
1.
Where concrete cannot be directed down shaft without striking reinforcement, place
concrete with chutes, tremies, or pumps.
2.
Vibrate top 60 inches of concrete.
C.
Slurry Displacement Method: Place concrete in slurry-filled shafts by tremie or pumping. Control
placement operations to ensure that pump pipe is embedded no less than 60 inches into
concrete and that flow of concrete is continuous from bottom to top of drilled pier..
D.
In the event of slurry contamination or cave in – immediately discontinue concrete pour and
contact ATC Construction Manager.
E.
Coordinate withdrawal of temporary casings with concrete placement to maintain at least a 60inch head of concrete above bottom of casing.
1.
Vibrate top 60 inches of concrete after withdrawal of temporary casing.
F.
Screed concrete at cutoff elevation level and apply scoured, rough finish. Where cutoff elevation
is above the ground elevation, form top section above grade and extend shaft to required
elevation.
G.
Protect concrete work, according to ACI 301, from frost, freezing, or low temperatures that could
cause physical damage or reduced strength.
1.
2.
H.
Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on
frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other mineral-containing antifreeze agents or
chemical accelerators.
If hot-weather conditions exist that would seriously impair quality and strength of concrete, place
concrete according to ACI 301 to maintain delivered temperature of concrete at no more than 90
deg F.
DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS
316329 - 6
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
1.
3.6
Place concrete immediately on delivery. Keep exposed concrete surfaces and formed
shaft extensions moist by fog sprays, wet burlap, or other effective means for a minimum
of seven days.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Independent Testing Agency: Cooperate with the Independent Testing Agency engaged by
ATC for field quality control activities required in Section 014320, “Quality Control, Testing and
Special Inspection Services.” Provide at least 48 hours notice to testing agency prior to the time
testing and/or inspection is required. Allow inspectors access to work areas, as needed to
perform inspections.
B.
Tests and Inspections: Engage Independent Testing Agency in accordance with Section 014320
“Quality Control, Testing and Special Inspection Services.” for testing of listed properties.
C.
Special Inspections: ATC may engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following
special inspections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.7
Drilled piers.
Excavation.
Steel reinforcement placement
Steel reinforcement welding/splicing
Anchor bolt placement and embedment
DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A.
Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil,
slurry, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off ATC's property.
END OF SECTION
DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS
316329 - 7
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
SECTION 321216
ASPHALT PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
1.2
Attention is directed to all Sections within DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which
are hereby made a part of this Section of the Specifications.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and will be performed under
the designated Sections:
1.
1.3
Hot-mix asphalt paving, including walkways, ramps and curbs.
Hot-mix asphalt patching.
Pavement-marking paint.
Section 312000 – ACCESS ROADS AND EARTH MOVING for aggregate subbase and
base courses and for aggregate pavement shoulders.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A paving-mix manufacturer registered with and approved by the
Highway Department in the state where the project is located..
B.
Regulatory Requirements:
Comply with materials, workmanship, and other applicable
requirements of the Highway Department in the state where the project is located for hot mix
asphalt paving work.
1.
2.
3.
1.4
Comply with requirements of the Highway Department Standard Specifications for
Highways and Bridges, including supplemental specifications and special provisions.
Where applicable comply with requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
If these requirements cannot be met with the grades and slopes indicated on the plans,
notify the ATC Construction Manager immediately.
Comply with requirements of the local authority having jurisdiction concerning the location
and construction of accessible curb cuts.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver pavement-marking materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken and
bearing manufacturer's labels containing brand name and type of material, date of manufacture,
and directions for storage.
B.
Store pavement-marking materials in a clean, dry, protected location within temperature range
required by manufacturer. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.
1.5
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other
construction activities.
ASPHALT PAVING
321216 - 1
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
B.
Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if subgrade is wet or excessively
damp, if rain is imminent or expected before time required for adequate cure, or if the following
conditions are not met:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Tack Coat: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F.
Asphalt Base Course: Minimum surface temperature of 40 deg F and rising at time of
placement.
Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F at time of placement.
Pavement-Marking Paint: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at a
minimum ambient or surface temperature of 55 deg F for water-based materials, and not
exceeding 95 deg F.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
AGGREGATES
A.
Coarse Aggregate: ASTM D 692, sound; angular crushed stone, crushed gravel, or cured,
crushed blast-furnace slag.
B.
Fine Aggregate: ASTM D 1073 or AASHTO M 29, sharp-edged natural sand or sand prepared
from stone, gravel, cured blast-furnace slag, or combinations thereof.
C.
Mineral Filler: ASTM D 242 or AASHTO M 17, rock or slag dust, hydraulic cement, or other
inert material.
D.
Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP): Provide material obtained from the highways or streets by
crushing, milling, or planing existing hot mix asphalt pavements.
1.
2.2
The proportion of RAP to virgin aggregate for base course mixtures and intermediate
course mixtures shall be limited to a maximum of 40% for drum mix plants and 20% for
modified batch plants. The maximum amount of RAP for surface course mixtures shall
be 10%.
ASPHALT MATERIALS
A.
Asphalt Binder, Performance Graded: AASHTO M320 or AASHTO MP 1a, performance grade
as required by local DOT Specifications.
B.
Tack Coat: AASHTO M 140 emulsified asphalt, or AASHTO M 208 cationic emulsified asphalt,
slow setting, diluted in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application.
2.3
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A.
Pavement-Marking Paint: Acrylic/latex type, low VOC, traffic marking paint.
1.
B.
Wheel Stops: Precast, air-entrained concrete, 2500-psi minimum compressive strength, 4-1/2
inches high by 9 inches wide by 72 inches long. Provide chamfered corners, drainage slots on
underside, and holes for anchoring to substrate.
1.
2.4
Color: As indicated.
Dowels: Galvanized steel, 3/4-inch diameter, 10-inch minimum length.
ASPHALT MIXES
A.
Hot-Mix Asphalt: Dense, hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt plant mixes approved by local DOT
Specifications and designed according to procedures in AI MS-2, "Mix Design Methods for
Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot-Mix Types".
ASPHALT PAVING
321216 - 2
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine exposed subgrades and subbase surfaces for compliance with requirements for
dimensional, grading, and elevation tolerances.
B.
Proof-roll subgrade below pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft
pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.
C.
Proceed with paving only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
COLD MILLING
A.
3.3
Clean existing pavement surface of loose and deleterious material immediately before cold
milling. Remove existing asphalt pavement by cold milling to grades and cross sections
indicated. Dispose of cold millings per ATC Construction Manager.
PATCHING
A.
Existing Hot-Mix Asphalt Pavement: Saw cut perimeter of patch and excavate existing
pavement section to sound base. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches, extending 12
inches into adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut excavation faces
vertically. Remove excavated material. Recompact existing unbound-aggregate base course to
form new subgrade.
B.
Existing Portland Cement Concrete Pavement: Break cracked slabs and roll as required to
reseat concrete pieces firmly.
1.
C.
Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to vertical surfaces abutting or projecting into new, hot-mix asphalt
paving at a minimum rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd..
1.
2.
D.
3.4
Remove disintegrated or badly cracked pavement. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal
patches, extending into adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut
excavation faces vertically. Recompact existing unbound-aggregate base course to form
new subgrade.
Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving.
Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings.
Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces.
Patching: Fill excavated pavements with hot-mix asphalt base mix for full thickness of patch
and, while still hot, compact flush with adjacent surface.
SURFACE PREPARATION
A.
General: Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material
from substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive paving.
B.
Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to surfaces of existing pavement at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq.
yd.
1.
2.
3.5
Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving.
Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings.
Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces.
HOT-MIX ASPHALT PLACING
A.
Machine place hot-mix asphalt on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off. Place
asphalt mix by hand to areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation
of mix. Place each course to required grade, cross section, and thickness when compacted.
ASPHALT PAVING
321216 - 3
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
1.
2.
Spread mix at minimum temperature of 250 deg F.
Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls and
tears in asphalt-paving mat.
B.
Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 10 feet wide unless infill edge strips of a lesser
width are required.
C.
Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand tools to
remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix asphalt to prevent
segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface.
3.6
JOINTS
A.
Construct joints to ensure a continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. Construct
joints free of depressions, with same texture and smoothness as other sections of hot-mix
asphalt course.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.7
Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat to joints.
Offset longitudinal joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 6 inches.
Offset transverse joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 24 inches.
Construct transverse joints at each point where paver ends a day's work and resumes
work at a subsequent time. Construct these joints using either "bulkhead" or "papered"
method according to AI MS-22, for both "Ending a Lane" and "Resumption of Paving
Operations."
COMPACTION
A.
General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight without
excessive displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or with vibratory-plate
compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers.
1.
Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F.
B.
Breakdown Rolling: Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and
outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade,
and smoothness. Correct laydown and rolling operations to comply with requirements.
C.
Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling while hotmix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot-mix asphalt
course has been uniformly compacted to the following density:
1.
Average Density: ASTM D 2041, per local DOT Specifications, or site specific design –
minimum 94% based on specific gravity methods.
D.
Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt is still
warm.
E.
Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to
proper alignment. Bevel edges while asphalt is still hot; compact thoroughly.
F.
Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and
hardened.
G.
Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become
marked.
3.8
INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A.
Accessibility: Comply with requirements of ADAAG requirements. Remove and replace paving
that does not meet required tolerances, when measured with a 2 foot straightedge.
ASPHALT PAVING
321216 - 4
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
B.
Pavement Thickness:
following tolerances:
1.
2.
C.
3.9
Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the
Base Course: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.
Surface Course: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus.
Pavement Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within
local DOT Specification tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot straightedge applied
transversely or longitudinally to paved areas.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Test the plane of the finished surfaces of base, binder, and surface courses with a 16-foot
straightedge, except use a 10-foot straightedge on vertical courses and on the top course of
resurfaced streets which contain manhole covers, valve boxes, and the like.
B.
Carefully apply the straightedge immediately after the first compaction by rolling, and from then
on as may be necessary until and after the final compaction of the material in place. Hold the
straightedge in successive positions parallel to the road centerline and in contact with the road
surface; check the entire area from one side of the pavement to the other.
C.
Correct irregularities which vary 3/8 inch from a true finished surface in base and binder
courses, and 1/4 inch in top courses.
D.
Irregularities which may develop before the completion of rolling and while the material is still
workable, may be remedied by loosening the surface mixture and removing or adding material
as necessary. Should any unsatisfactory irregularities or defects remain after final compaction,
correct the defective work by removing and replacing with new material to form a true and even
surface.
3.10
OPENING TO TRAFFIC
A.
No vehicular traffic or loads shall be permitted on the newly completed pavement until adequate
stability has been attained, and the material has cooled sufficiently to prevent distortion or loss
of fines, and the pavement has achieved a maximum temperature of 140 degrees F.
B.
If the climatic or other conditions warrant it, the period of time before opening to traffic may be
extended at the discretion of the Contractor..
3.11
A.
DISPOSAL
Except for material indicated to be recycled, remove excavated materials from Project site and
legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.
END OF SECTION
ASPHALT PAVING
321216 - 5
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
SECTION 321313
CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
1.2
Attention is directed to all Sections within DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which
are hereby made a part of this Section of the Specifications.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1.
2.
B.
Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and will be performed under
the designated Sections:
1.
2.
1.3
Cement concrete paving, including walkways, ramps and accessible curb cuts.
Pavement-marking paint.
Section 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE for general building applications of
concrete.
Section 312000 – ACCESS ROADS AND EARTH WORK for subgrade preparation,
grading, and subbase course.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Regulatory Requirements:
Comply with materials, workmanship, and other applicable
requirements of the local authorities having jurisdiction for concrete asphalt paving work.
1.
2.
B.
Comply with American with Disabilities Act (ADA).
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
1.4
Comply with requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). If these
requirements cannot be met with the grades and slopes indicated on the plans, notify the
Designer immediately.
Comply with requirements of the local authorities having jurisdiction concerning the
location and construction of accessible curb cuts.
Slopes:
Walkways shall be graded to a maximum of 4.5%.
The cross-pitch
(perpendicular to travel) for walkways and paths shall be constructed at 1.5%. The
slopes of ramps and side slopes on handicap curb cuts shall be constructed at 7%
maximum. Ramps shall be constructed to a maximum slope of 7%.
The Contractor is to assume that sidewalk grades will be verified and checked with a 2foot long electronic ‘smart level’.
A 5’-0” minimum level, 1.5% pitch, area shall be provided at entrances to buildings.
Puddling or ponding of water at the entrances will not be accepted.
The requirements specified hereinabove shall supercede the grades indicated on the
Drawings. If these requirements cannot be met with the grades indicated on the
Drawings, the Designer shall be notified immediately for direction.
ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," unless modified
by requirements in the Contract Documents.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete products who complies with
ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.
CONCRETE PAVING
321313 - 1
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
1.5
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other
construction activities.
B.
Environmental Limitations: Do not apply concrete materials if subgrade is wet or excessively
damp, if rain is imminent or expected before time required for adequate cure.
C.
Pavement-Marking Paint: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at a
minimum ambient or surface temperature of 55 deg F for water-based materials, and not
exceeding 95 deg F.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FORMS
A.
Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-type materials
to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces. Use flexible or curved
forms for curves with a radius 100 feet or less.
B.
Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with,
stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of
concrete surfaces and contains no PCBs or other restricted chemicals.
2.2
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A.
Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into
flat sheets.
B.
Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497, flat sheet.
C.
Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60; deformed.
D.
Galvanized Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 767/A 767M, Class II zinc coated, hot-dip galvanized
after fabrication and bending; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 deformed bars.
E.
Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184/A 184M; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed bars;
assembled with clips.
F.
Plain Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn.
G.
Deformed-Steel Wire: ASTM A 496.
H.
Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60. Cut bars true to length
with ends square and free of burrs.
I.
Tie Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.
J.
Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and
fastening reinforcing bars, welded wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar
supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."
K.
Zinc Repair Material: ASTM A 780.
2.3
CONCRETE MATERIALS AND MIXTURES
A.
Provide materials in accordance with Section 033000 – Cast-in-Place Concrete.
B.
Slabs-on-Grade: Normal-weight concrete.
CONCRETE PAVING
321313 - 2
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
Minimum Compressive Strength (28 days): 4000 psi
Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.45
Slump Limit: 5 inches, plus or minus 1 inch.
Air Content: 6 percent plus or minus 1.5 percent for 3/4-inch nominal maximum
aggregate size.
C.
Chemical Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.
D.
Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mix at manufacturer's recommended rate, but
not less than 1.0 lb/cu. yd.
2.4
FIBER REINFORCEMENT
A.
2.5
Synthetic Fiber: Monofilament or fibrillated polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for
use in concrete pavement, complying with ASTM C 1116, Type III.
CURING MATERIALS
A.
Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth.
B.
Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.
C.
Water: Potable.
D.
Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming; manufactured for application
to fresh concrete.
E.
Clear Waterborne Membrane-Forming Curing Compound:
dissipating.
F.
White Waterborne Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 2, Class B.
2.6
ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B,
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A.
Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork.
B.
Slip-Resistive Aggregate Finish: Factory-graded, packaged, rustproof, nonglazing, abrasive
aggregate of fused aluminum-oxide granules or crushed emery with emery aggregate
containing not less than 50 percent aluminum oxide and not less than 20 percent ferric oxide;
unaffected by freezing, moisture, and cleaning materials.
C.
Pavement-Marking Paint: Acrylic/latex type, low VOC, waterborne emulsion, lead and chromate
free, ready mixed, complying with FS TT-P-1952, with drying time of less than 45 minutes.
Color: As indicated.
D.
Wheel Stops: Precast, air-entrained concrete, 2500-psi minimum compressive strength, 4-1/2
inches high by 9 inches wide by 72 inches long. Provide chamfered corners, drainage slots on
underside, and holes for anchoring to substrate. Dowels: Galvanized steel, 3/4-inch diameter,
10-inch minimum length.
E.
Detectable warning panels: Where walkways enter traveled ways, install detectable warning
surfaces in accordance with ADA guildline, R304.
2.7
CONCRETE MIXING
A.
Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to
ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116. When air temperature is between 85 deg F and 90
deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is
above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes
CONCRETE PAVING
321313 - 3
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine exposed subgrades and subbase surfaces for compliance with requirements for
dimensional, grading, and elevation tolerances.
B.
Proof-roll subgrade below pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft
pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.
C.
Proceed with paving only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION
A.
Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for pavement to
required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and
so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.
B.
Clean forms after each use and coat with form-release agent to ensure separation from
concrete without damage.
3.3
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A.
3.4
General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and
supporting reinforcement.
JOINTS
A.
General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edgings true to line with
faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to
centerline, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of pavement and at
locations where pavement operations are stopped for more than one-half hour unless pavement
terminates at isolation joints.
C.
Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs,
catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, and where indicated.
D.
Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as
indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete
thickness, to match jointing of existing adjacent concrete pavement.
E.
Edging: Tool edges of pavement and joints in concrete after initial floating with an edging tool to
a 1/4-inch radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes. Eliminate tool marks
on concrete surfaces.
3.5
CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A.
Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, steel
reinforcement, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of
their work.
B.
Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed.
C.
Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete.
D.
Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push
or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.
CONCRETE PAVING
321313 - 4
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
E.
Screed pavement surfaces with a straightedge and strike off.
F.
Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open textured and uniform
surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further
disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments.
G.
Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from
physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low
temperatures.
1.
2.
3.
3.6
When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F, uniformly heat
water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less
than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement.
Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow.
Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or
chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs.
FLOAT FINISHING
A.
General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations.
B.
Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has disappeared and
concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven
floats, or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true
planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular
texture.
1.
3.7
Medium-to-Coarse-Textured Broom Finish: Provide a coarse finish by striating floatfinished concrete surface 1/16 to 1/8 inch deep with a stiff-bristled broom, perpendicular
to line of traffic.
CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING
A.
General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures.
B.
Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection.
C.
Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy
conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing
operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and
bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
D.
Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete
surface.
E.
Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture-retaining-cover curing or curing compound, as
follows:
1.
3.8
Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover
for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at
least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any
holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.
PAVEMENT TOLERANCES
A.
Accessibility: Comply with requirements of ADAAG requirements. Remove and replace paving
that does not meet required tolerances, when measured with a 2 foot straightedge.
B.
Comply with tolerances of ACI 117 and as follows:
CONCRETE PAVING
321313 - 5
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.9
Elevation: 1/4 inch.
Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch, minus 1/4 inch.
Surface: Gap below 10-foot- long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/4 inch.
Joint Spacing: 3 inches.
Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus.
Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch, no minus.
PAVEMENT MARKING
A.
Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified with
Designer.
B.
Allow concrete pavement to cure for 28 days and be dry before starting pavement marking.
C.
Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust.
D.
Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings of dimensions indicated
with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a
minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils.
3.10
REFER TO SECTION 321216, ASPHALT PAVING FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Independent Testing Agency: Cooperate with the Independent Testing Agency engaged by
ATC for field quality control activities required in Section 014320, “Quality Control, Testing and
Special Inspection Services.” Provide at least 48 hours notice to testing agency prior to the time
testing and/or inspection is required. Allow inspectors access to work areas, as needed to
perform inspections.
B.
Tests and Inspections: Engage Independent Testing Agency in accordance with Section 014320
“Quality Control, Testing and Special Inspection Services.” for testing of listed properties.
3.11
REPAIRS, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION
A.
Remove and replace concrete pavement that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does not
comply with requirements in this Section.
B.
When necessary and directed by the ATC Construction Manager, Drill test cores, to determine
magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas
with portland cement concrete bonded to pavement with epoxy adhesive.
C.
Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after
placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by
removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.
D.
Maintain concrete pavement free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep
concrete pavement not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion
inspections.
END OF SECTION
CONCRETE PAVING
321313 - 6
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
SECTION 323113
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
1.2
Attention is directed to all Sections within DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which
are hereby made a part of this Section of the Specifications.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1.
2.
B.
Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and will be performed under
the designated Sections:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Chain link fences.
Swing gates.
Section 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE for general building applications of
concrete.
Section 260000 - ELECTRICAL WORK FOR TOWER SITES for grounding of fences,
posts and gates.
Section 312000 - ACCESS ROADS AND EARTH MOVING for subgrade preparation,
grading, and subbase course.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Field Measurements: Verify layout information for chain-link fences and gates shown on
Drawings in relation to property survey and existing structures. Verify dimensions by field
measurements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CHAIN-LINK FENCE FABRIC
A.
General: Provide fabric in one-piece to a height of 6 feet with 1 foot of barbed wire unless
indicated otherwise on Construction Drawings measured between top and bottom of outer edge
of selvage knuckle or twist. Comply with CLFMI Product Manual and with requirements
indicated below:
1.
Steel Wire Fabric: 9 gauge fence fabric.
a.
b.
2.
2.2
Mesh Size: 2 inches.
Zinc-Coated Fabric: ASTM A 392, Type II, Class 1, 1.2 oz./sq. ft.
Selvage: Knuckled at bottom selvage.
FENCE TOP BARBED WIRE
A.
General: Provide three strands of 4 point per foot, high security galvanized barbed wire
1.
Barbed wire heavy pressed steel outrigger arms at each post angled to outside at 45
degrees
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
323113 - 1
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
2.3
FENCE FRAMING
A.
Posts and Rails: Comply with ASTM F 1043 for framing, including rails, braces, and line;
terminal; and corner posts. Provide members with minimum dimensions and wall thickness
according to ASTM F 1043 or ASTM F 1083.
1.
Light Industrial Strength:
welded pipe.
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
7.
8.
2.4
Corner and End Posts: 2 1/2” O.D.; Intermediate Posts: 2 ” O.D.; top rail 1 1/4”
O.D.;
All post and rail material to be industrial grade schedule 40 minper ATSM F 1083
Horizontal Framework Members: Top and bottom rails complying with ASTM F 1043.
Mid Height/Brace Rails: Comply with ASTM F 1043.
Metallic Coating for Steel Framing:
a.
5.
6.
Material Group IC-L, round steel pipe, electric-resistance-
Type A, consisting of not less than minimum 2.0-oz./sq. ft. average zinc coating
per ASTM A 123/A 123M or 4.0-oz./sq. ft. zinc coating per ASTM A 653/A 653M.
Corners and Gate posts use 3/16”x3/4” stretcher bar
Encase all buried posts with 2500 psi concrete, corner and gate posts in 12“ diameter
footing intermediate posts in 10” diameter footing.
Minimum embedment for posts is 3’-6” or below frost depth whichever is greater
All post tops to be capped
SWING GATES
A.
General: Comply with ASTM F 900 for gate posts and swing gate types.
B.
Pipe and Tubing:
1.
2.
Zinc-Coated Steel: Comply with ASTM F 1043 and ASTM F 1083; protective coating and
finish to match fence framing.
Gate Posts: Round tubular steel.
a.
3.
C.
Gate Frames and Bracing: Round tubular steel.
Hardware:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.5
Gate Posts: 2 1/2” O.D.
Hinges: 360-degree inward and outward swing.
Latches permitting operation from both sides of gate with provision for padlocking
accessible from both sides of gate.
Gate support: 3/8” diameter truss rod with McMaster-Carr Galvanized Jaw and Jaw
turnbuckles or equivalent at each gate greater than 5’ opening.
Double swing gates, latch Rod: 5/8” diameter latch rod to match 1-1/4” diameter pipe
sleeve 6 “ long in 6 inch diameter by 18” deep concrete footing at center of double swing
gates.
FITTINGS
A.
General: Comply with ASTM F 626.
B.
Post Caps: Provide for each post.
C.
Rail and Brace Ends: For each gate, corner, pull, and end post.
D.
Tie Wires, Clips, and Fasteners: According to ASTM F 626.
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
323113 - 2
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
E.
2.6
Stymie Lock or equal.
GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT
A.
Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout:
Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout, recommended in writing by
manufacturer, for exterior applications.
B.
Erosion-Resistant Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydrauliccontrolled expansion cement formulation for mixing with potable water at Project site to create
pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. Provide formulation that is resistant to
erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and
that is recommended in writing by manufacturer, for exterior applications.
2.7
GROUNDING
A.
Ground fence, posts and gate per Section 260000 - ELECTRICAL WORK FOR TOWER SITES.
B.
Ground leads shall be clean, smooth CAD welds 18 inches above grade with direct down lead
direction to the ground ring.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for a
verified survey of property lines and legal boundaries, site clearing, earthwork, pavement work,
and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1.
B.
3.2
Do not begin installation before final grading is completed unless otherwise permitted by
ATC Construction Manager.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Stake locations of fence lines, gates, and terminal posts. Indicate locations of utilities, lawn
sprinkler system, underground structures, benchmarks, and property monuments.
CHAIN-LINK FENCE INSTALLATION
A.
Install chain-link fencing to comply with ASTM F 567 and more stringent requirements indicated.
1.
Install fencing on established area inside property line.
B.
Post Excavation: Drill or hand-excavate holes for posts to diameters and spacings indicated, in
firm, undisturbed soil.
C.
Post Setting: Set posts in concrete at indicated spacing into firm, undisturbed soil.
1.
2.
D.
Verify that posts are set plumb, aligned, and at correct height and spacing, and hold in
position during setting with concrete or mechanical devices.
Concrete Fill: Place concrete around posts to dimensions indicated and vibrate or tamp
for consolidation. Protect aboveground portion of posts from concrete splatter.
Post Bracing and Intermediate Rails: Install according to ASTM F 567, maintaining plumb
position and alignment of fencing. Diagonally brace terminal posts to adjacent line posts with
truss rods and turnbuckles specified above. Install braces at end and gate posts and at both
sides of corner and pull posts.
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
323113 - 3
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
3.4
GATE INSTALLATION
A.
3.5
Install gates according to manufacturer's written instructions, and at locations as specified by
ATC Construction Manager, level, plumb, and secure with 1 inch clearance to grade for full
opening without interference. Attach fabric as for fencing. Attach hardware using tamperresistant or concealed means. Install ground-set items in concrete for anchorage. Adjust
hardware for smooth operation and lubricate where necessary.
ADJUSTING
A.
Gates: Adjust gates to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free of binding, warp, excessive
deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or malfunction, throughout entire
operational range. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without
forcing or binding.
END OF SECTION
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
323113 - 4
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
SECTION 323223
SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
1.2
Attention is directed to all Sections within DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which
are hereby made a part of this Section of the Specifications.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes single-and multiple- depth segmental retaining walls with and without soil
reinforcement.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
1.3
Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for segmental retaining wall footings.
Section 312000 "Access Roads and Earth Moving" for excavation for segmental retaining
walls.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Basis of Design: Design of segmental retaining walls is based on products indicated. If
comparable products of other manufacturers are proposed, provide engineering design for
proposed products, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional
engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
B.
Delegated Design: Design segmental retaining walls, including comprehensive engineering
analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design
criteria indicated.
C.
Structural Performance: Engineering design shall be based on the following loads and be
according to NCMA's "Design Manual for Segmental Retaining Walls."
1.
2.
D.
Seismic Performance: When required Engineering design shall be based on the following loads
and factors and be according to NCMA's "Segmental Retaining Walls - Seismic Design Manual."
1.
2.
3.
1.4
Gravity loads due to soil pressures resulting from grades and sloped backfill indicated.
Superimposed loads (surcharge) indicated on Drawings.
Gravity loads due to soil pressures resulting from grades and sloped backfill indicated.
Superimposed loads (surcharge) indicated on Drawings.
Horizontal Peak Ground Acceleration as indicated.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For segmental retaining walls indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.
Compliance Review: Qualified professional engineer responsible for segmental retaining
wall design shall review and approve submittals and source and field quality-control
reports for compliance of materials and construction with design.
SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS
323223 - 1
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store and handle concrete units and accessories to prevent deterioration or damage due to
contaminants, breaking, chipping, or other causes.
B.
Store geosynthetics in manufacturer's original packaging with labels intact. Store and handle
geosynthetics to prevent deterioration or damage due to sunlight, chemicals, flames,
temperatures above 160 deg F or below 32 deg F, and other conditions that might damage
them. Verify identification of geosynthetics before using and examine them for defects as
material is placed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALL UNITS
A.
Concrete Units: ASTM C 1372, Normal Weight, except that maximum water absorption shall not
exceed 7 percent by weight and units shall not differ in height more than plus or minus 1/16 inch
from specified dimension.
1.
2.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by licensees
of one of the following:
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product
indicated on Drawings or comparable product by a licensee of one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
3.
4.
Allan Block Corporation.
Anchor Wall Systems, Inc.
GeoWestern, Inc.
ICD Corporation.
Keystone Retaining Wall Systems, Inc.; a Contech company.
Risi Stone Systems; a division of Rothbury International.
Rockwood Retaining Walls, Inc.
Tensar Earth Technologies, Inc.
Versa-Lok Retaining Wall Systems; a division of Kiltie Corporation.
Gabion Walls.
Provide units that comply with requirements for freeze-thaw durability.
Provide units that interlock with courses above and below by means of integral lugs or
lips, pins, clips or hollow cores filled with drainage fill.
B.
Color: As selected by ATC Construction Manager from manufacturer's full range.
C.
Shape and Texture: Provide units of basic shape and dimensions indicated with machine-split
textured smooth exposed faces.
D.
Shape and Texture: Provide units matching basic shape, dimensions, and face texture indicated
by referencing manufacturer's pattern designation.
E.
Batter: Provide units that offset from course below to provide at least1:8 batter.
F.
Cap Units: Provide cap units of shape indicated with smooth, as-cast top surfaces without holes
or lugs.
G.
Special Units: Provide corner units, end units, and other shapes as needed to produce
segmental retaining walls of dimensions and profiles indicated and to provide texture on
exposed surfaces matching face.
2.2
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A.
Pins: Product supplied by segmental retaining wall unit manufacturer for use with units provided,
made from non-degrading polymer reinforced with glass fibers.
SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS
323223 - 2
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
B.
Clips: Product supplied by segmental retaining wall unit manufacturer for use with units
provided, made from non-degrading polymer reinforced with glass fibers.
C.
Cap Adhesive: Product supplied or recommended by segmental retaining wall unit manufacturer
for adhering cap units to units below.
D.
Leveling Base: Comply with requirements in Section 312000 "Access Roads and Earth Moving"
for base material.
1.
Leveling Course: Lean concrete with a compressive strength of not more than 500 psi.
E.
Drainage Fill: Comply with requirements in Section 312000 "Access Roads and Earth Moving.”
F.
Reinforced-Soil Fill: Comply with requirements in Section 312000 "Access Roads and Earth
Moving" for satisfactory soils.
G.
Reinforced-Soil Fill: ASTM D 2487; GW, GP, SW, SP, and SM soil classification groups or a
combination of these groups; free of debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other
deleterious matter; meeting the following gradation according to ASTM C 136: 20 to 100 percent
passing No. 4 sieve, 0 to 60 percent passing No. 40 sieve, 0 to 35 percent passing No. 200
sieve, and with fine fraction having a plasticity index of less than 20.
H.
Non-reinforced-Soil Fill: Comply with requirements in Section 312000 "Access Roads and Earth
Moving" for satisfactory soils.
I.
Subsurface Drainage Geotextile: Comply with requirements in Section 312000 "Access Roads
and Earth Moving" Perforated-Wall Subdrainage Pipes and Fitting: Perforated PE Pipe and
fittings per ASTM F405 or AASHTO M252, Type CP, corrugated, for coupled joints. Couplings
shall be Manufacturer’s standard, band type.
J.
Solid-Wall Subdrainage Pipes and Fitting: PE Drainage tubing and fittings per AASHTO M252,
Type S, corrugated, with smooth waterway, for coupled joints. Couplings shall be AASHTO
M252, corrugated, band type, matching tubing and fittings.
K.
Geogrid for Soil Reinforcement: Product specifically manufactured for use as soil reinforcement
and as follows:
1.
2.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product
indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
Colbond Inc.
Huesker, Inc.
Luckenhaus Technical Textiles, Inc.
Mirafi Construction Products; Ten Cate Nicolon.
Propex Fabrics Inc.; Civil Engineering Fabrics.
Strata Systems, Inc.
Synteen Technical Fabrics, Inc.
Tensar Earth Technologies, Inc.
Versa-Lok Retaining Wall Systems; a division of Kiltie Corporation.
Product Type: Knitted or woven geogrid made from polyester yarns with a protective
coating or Molded geogrid made from high-density polyethylene
2.3
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Direct manufacturer to test and inspect each roll of soil reinforcement at the factory for minimum
average roll values for geosynthetic index property tests, including the following:
1.
2.
Weight.
Roll size.
SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS
323223 - 3
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
3.
4.
5.
Grab or single-rib strength.
Aperture opening.
Rib or yarn size.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
excavation tolerances, condition of subgrades, and other conditions affecting performance of
segmental retaining walls.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
RETAINING WALL INSTALLATION
A.
General: Place units according to NCMA's "Segmental Retaining Wall Installation Guide" and
segmental retaining wall unit manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
B.
Leveling Base: Place and compact base material to thickness indicated and with not less than
95 percent maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.
1.
C.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.3
Tamp units into leveling base as necessary to bring tops of units into a level plane.
Subsequent Courses: Remove excess fill and debris from tops of units in course below. Place
units in firm contact, properly aligned, and directly on course below.
1.
E.
Leveling Course: At Contractor's option, unreinforced lean concrete may be substituted
for upper 1 to 2 inches of base. Compact and screed concrete to a smooth, level surface.
First Course: Place first course of segmental retaining wall units for full length of wall. Place
units in firm contact with each other, properly aligned and level.
1.
D.
Lay units in bond pattern indicated. If no pattern indicated, use running bond.
Form corners and ends by using special units.
For units with lugs designed to fit into holes in adjacent units, lay units so lugs are
accurately aligned with holes, and bedding surfaces are firmly seated on beds of units
below.
For units with lips at front of units, slide units as far forward as possible for firm contact
with lips of units below.
For units with lips at bottom rear of units, slide units as far forward as possible for firm
contact of lips with units below.
For units with pins, install pins and align units.
For units with clips, install clips and align units.
Cap Units: Place cap units and secure with cap adhesive.
FILL PLACEMENT
A.
General: Comply with requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" NCMA's "Segmental
Retaining Wall Installation Guide," and segmental retaining wall unit manufacturer's written
instructions.
B.
Fill voids between and within units with drainage fill. Place fill as each course of units is laid.
C.
Place, spread, and compact drainage fill and soil fill in uniform lifts of no more than 12 inches for
full width and length of embankment as wall is laid. Place and compact fills without disturbing
alignment of units. Where both sides of wall are indicated to be filled, place fills on both sides at
same time. Begin at wall and place and spread fills toward embankment.
SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS
323223 - 4
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
1.
2.
Use only hand-operated compaction equipment within 48 inches of wall, or one-half of
height above bottom of wall, whichever is greater.
Compact reinforced-soil fill to not less than 95 percent maximum dry unit weight
according to ASTM D 698.
a.
b.
c.
3.
In areas where only hand-operated compaction equipment is allowed, compact fills
to not less than 90 percent maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.
In areas where fill height exceeds 15 feet, compact reinforced-soil fill that will be
more than 15 feet below finished grade to not less than 98 percent maximum dry
unit weight according to ASTM D 698.
In areas where fill height exceeds 30 feet, compact reinforced-soil fill that will be
more than 30 feet below finished grade to not less than 100 percent maximum dry
unit weight according to ASTM D 698.
Compact non-reinforced-soil fill to comply with Section 312000 "Access Roads and Earth
Moving."
D.
Place drainage geotextile against back of wall and place layer of drainage fill at least 12 inches
wide behind drainage geotextile to within 12 inches of finished grade. Place another layer of
drainage geotextile between drainage fill and soil fill.
E.
Place a layer of drainage fill at least 12 inches wide behind wall to within 12 inches of finished
grade. Place a layer of drainage geotextile between drainage fill and soil fill.
F.
Wrap subdrainage pipe with filter fabric and place in drainage fill as indicated, sloped not less
than 0.5 percent to drain.
G.
Place impervious fill over top edge of drainage fill layer.
H.
Slope grade at top of wall away from wall unless otherwise indicated. Slope grade at base of
wall away from wall. Provide uniform slopes that will prevent ponding.
I.
Place soil reinforcement geogrid in horizontal joints of retaining wall where indicated and
according to soil-reinforcement manufacturer's written instructions. Embed reinforcement a
minimum of 8 inches into retaining wall and stretch tight over compacted backfill. Anchor soil
reinforcement before placing fill.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.4
Place additional soil reinforcement at corners and curved walls to provide continuous
reinforcement.
Place geosynthetics with seams, if any, oriented perpendicular to segmental retaining
walls.
Do not dump fill material directly from trucks onto geosynthetics.
Place at least 6 inches of fill over reinforcement before compacting with tracked vehicles
or 4 inches before compacting with rubber-tired vehicles.
Do not turn vehicles on fill until first layer of fill is compacted and second layer is placed
over each soil-reinforcement layer.
CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
A.
Variation from Level: For bed-joint lines along walls, do not exceed 1-1/4 inches in 10 feet, 2
inches maximum.
B.
Variation from Indicated Batter: For slope of wall face, do not vary from indicated slope by more
than 1-1/4 inches in 10 feet.
C.
Variation from Indicated Wall Line: For walls indicated as straight, do not vary from straight line
by more than 1-1/4 inches in 10 feet.
SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS
323223 - 5
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
3.5
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Independent Testing Agency: Cooperate with the Independent Testing Agency engaged by
ATC for field quality control activities required in Section 014320, “Quality Control, Testing and
Special Inspection Services.” Provide at least 48 hours notice to testing agency prior to the time
testing and/or inspection is required. Allow inspectors access to work areas, as needed to
perform inspections.
B.
Tests and Inspections: Engage Independent Testing Agency in accordance with Section 014320
“Quality Control, Testing and Special Inspection Services.” for testing of listed properties.
3.6
ADJUSTING
A.
Remove and replace segmental retaining wall construction of the following descriptions:
1.
2.
B.
Broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged units. Units may be repaired if ATC
Construction Manager approves methods and results.
Segmental retaining walls that do not comply with other requirements indicated.
Replace units so segmental retaining wall complies with other requirements, and shows no
evidence of replacement.
END OF SECTION 323223
SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS
323223 - 6
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
SECTION 329300
PLANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
1.2
Attention is directed to all Sections within DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which
are hereby made a part of this Section of the Specifications.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.3
Plants and general landscaping of tower sites
Tree stabilization.
Perform planting work only as authorized. Authorized work includes work required by
Drawings and the Specifications and work authorized in writing by ATC Construction
Manager.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation.
B.
Balled and Burlapped Stock: Plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they were
grown, with a ball size not less than diameter and depth recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for type
and size of plant required; wrapped with burlap, tied, rigidly supported, and drum laced with
twine with the root flare visible at the surface of the ball as recommended by ANSI Z60.1.
C.
Balled and Potted Stock: Plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they are grown and
placed, unbroken, in a container. Ball size is not less than diameter and depth recommended by
ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required.
D.
Bare-Root Stock: Plants with a well-branched, fibrous-root system developed by transplanting or
root pruning, with soil or growing medium removed, and with not less than the minimum root
spread according to ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required.
E.
Container-Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well-rooted plants grown in a container, with a wellestablished root system reaching sides of container and maintaining a firm ball when removed
from container. Container shall be rigid enough to hold ball shape and protect root mass during
shipping and be sized according to ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required.
F.
Fabric Bag-Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well-rooted plants established and grown in-ground
in a porous fabric bag with well-established root system reaching sides of fabric bag. Fabric bag
size is not less than diameter, depth, and volume required by ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of
plant.
G.
Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.
H.
Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired or that cause damage to plants,
animals, or people. Pests include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents
(gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses.
I.
Planting Area: Areas to be planted.
PLANTS
329300 - 1
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
J.
Planting Soil: Existing, on-site soil; imported soil; or manufactured soil that has been modified
with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth.
K.
Plant; Plants; Plant Material: These terms refer to vegetation in general, including trees, shrubs,
vines, ground covers, ornamental grasses, bulbs, corms, tubers, or herbaceous vegetation.
L.
Root Flare: Also called "trunk flare." The area at the base of the plant's stem or trunk where the
stem or trunk broadens to form roots; the area of transition between the root system and the
stem or trunk.
M.
Stem Girdling Roots: Roots that encircle the stems (trunks) of trees below the soil surface.
N.
Subgrade: The surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top
surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.
1.4
COORDINATION
A.
Coordination with Turf Areas (Lawns): Plant trees, shrubs, and other plants after finish grades
are established and before planting turf areas unless otherwise indicated.
1.
1.5
When planting trees, shrubs, and other plants after planting turf areas, protect turf areas,
and promptly repair damage caused by planting operations.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape installer whose work has resulted in successful
establishment of plants.
1.
Professional Membership: Installer shall be a member in good standing of either the
Professional Landcare Network or the American Nursery and Landscape Association.
B.
Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of plants indicated, complying with applicable
requirements in ANSI Z60.1.
C.
Measurements: Measure according to ANSI Z60.1. Do not prune to obtain required sizes.
1.
2.
D.
1.6
Trees and Shrubs: Measure with branches and trunks or canes in their normal position.
Take height measurements from or near the top of the root flare for field-grown stock and
container-grown stock. Measure main body of tree or shrub for height and spread; do not
measure branches or roots tip to tip. Take caliper measurements 6 inches above the root
flare for trees up to 4-inch caliper size, and 12 inches above the root flare for larger sizes.
Other Plants: Measure with stems, petioles, and foliage in their normal position.
Plant Material Observation: ATC Construction Manager may observe plant material either at
place of growth or at site before planting for compliance with requirements for genus, species,
variety, cultivar, size, and quality. ATC Construction Manager may also observe trees and
shrubs further for size and condition of balls and root systems, pests, disease symptoms,
injuries, and latent defects and may reject unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during
progress of work. Remove rejected trees or shrubs immediately from Project site.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing
weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of compliance with
state and Federal laws if applicable.
B.
Bulk Materials:
1.
Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and pavements,
or on existing turf areas or plants.
PLANTS
329300 - 2
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
2.
3.
Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials;
discharge of soil-bearing water runoff; and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties,
water conveyance systems, or walkways.
Accompany each delivery of bulk materials with appropriate certificates.
C.
Deliver bare-root stock plants within 36 hours of digging. Immediately after digging up bare-root
stock, pack root system in wet straw, hay, or other suitable material to keep root system moist
until planting. Transport in covered, temperature-controlled vehicles, and keep plants cool and
protected from sun and wind at all times.
D.
Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from
sun scald, drying, wind burn, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not
bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Provide
protective covering of plants during shipping and delivery. Do not drop plants during delivery
and handling.
E.
Handle planting stock by root ball.
F.
Apply antidesiccant to trees and shrubs using power spray to provide an adequate film over
trunks (before wrapping), branches, stems, twigs, and foliage to protect during digging,
handling, and transportation.
1.
If deciduous trees or shrubs are moved in full leaf, spray with antidesiccant at nursery
before moving and again two weeks after planting.
G.
Wrap trees and shrubs with burlap fabric over trunks, branches, stems, twigs, and foliage to
protect from wind and other damage during digging, handling, and transportation.
H.
Deliver plants after preparations for planting have been completed, and install immediately. If
planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set plants and trees in their appropriate
aspect (sun, filtered sun, or shade), protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep
roots moist.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.7
Heel-in bare-root stock. Soak roots that are in less than moist condition in water for two
hours. Reject plants with dry roots.
Set balled stock on ground and cover ball with soil, peat moss, sawdust, or other
acceptable material.
Do not remove container-grown stock from containers before time of planting.
Water root systems of plants stored on-site deeply and thoroughly with a fine-mist spray.
Water as often as necessary to maintain root systems in a moist, but not overly wet
condition.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Field Measurements: Verify actual grade elevations, service and utility locations, irrigation
system components, and dimensions of plantings and construction contiguous with new
plantings by field measurements before proceeding with planting work.
B.
Planting Restrictions: Plant only during seasons recommended by plant suppler,Weather
Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit
planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be obtained. Apply products
during favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's written instructions and
warranty requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PLANT MATERIAL
A.
General: Furnish nursery-grown plants true to genus, species, variety, cultivar, stem form,
shearing, and other features indicated in Plant List, Plant Schedule, or Plant Legend indicated
PLANTS
329300 - 3
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
on Drawings and complying with ANSI Z60.1; and with healthy root systems developed by
transplanting or root pruning. Provide well-shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock,
densely foliated when in leaf and free of disease, pests, eggs, larvae, and defects such as
knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement.
1.
2.
Trees with damaged, crooked, or multiple leaders; tight vertical branches where bark is
squeezed between two branches or between branch and trunk ("included bark"); crossing
trunks; cut-off limbs more than 3/4 inch in diameter; or with stem girdling roots are
unacceptable.
Collected Stock: Do not use plants harvested from the wild, from native stands, from an
established landscape planting, or not grown in a nursery unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Provide plants of sizes, grades, and ball or container sizes complying with ANSI Z60.1 for types
and form of plants required. Plants of a larger size may be used if acceptable to ATC
Construction Manager, with a proportionate increase in size of roots or balls.
C.
Root-Ball Depth: Furnish trees and shrubs with root balls measured from top of root ball, which
begins at root flare according to ANSI Z60.1. Root flare shall be visible before planting.
2.2
FERTILIZERS
A.
2.3
Planting Tablets: Tightly compressed chip-type, long-lasting, slow-release, commercial-grade
planting fertilizer in tablet form. Tablets shall break down with soil bacteria, converting nutrients
into a form that can be absorbed by plant roots.
MULCHES
A.
Organic Mulch: Free from deleterious materials and suitable as a top dressing of trees and
shrubs, consisting of one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Mineral Mulch: Hard, durable stone, washed free of loam, sand, clay, and other foreign
substances, of the following type, size range, and color:
1.
2.
3.
2.4
Type: Shredded hardwood, unless indicated otherwise.
Size Range: 3 inches maximum, 1/2 inch minimum.
Color: Natural.
Type: Rounded riverbed gravel or smooth-faced stone.
Size Range: 1-1/2 inches maximum, 3/4 inch minimum.
Color: Uniform tan-beige color range acceptable to ATC Construction Manager.
WEED-CONTROL BARRIERS
A.
Nonwoven Geotextile Filter Fabric: Polypropylene or polyester fabric, 3 oz./sq. yd. minimum,
composed of fibers formed into a stable network so that fibers retain their relative position.
Fabric shall be inert to biological degradation and resist naturally encountered chemicals,
alkalis, and acids.
B.
Composite Fabric: Woven, needle-punched polypropylene substrate bonded to a nonwoven
polypropylene fabric, 4.8 oz./sq. yd.
2.5
TREE-STABILIZATION MATERIALS
A.
Trunk-Stabilization Materials:
1.
2.
Upright and Guy Stakes: Rough-sawn, sound, new hardwood, free of knots, holes, cross
grain, and other defects, 2-by-2-inch nominal by length indicated, pointed at one end.
Retain "Flexible Ties" or "Guys and Tie Wires" Subparagraph below.
Flexible Ties: Wide rubber or elastic bands or straps of length required to reach stakes or
turnbuckles.
PLANTS
329300 - 4
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Root-Ball Stabilization Materials:
1.
2.
2.6
Guys and Tie Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1, galvanized-steel wire, two-strand,
twisted, 0.106 inch in diameter.
Tree-Tie Webbing: UV-resistant polypropylene or nylon webbing with brass grommets.
Guy Cables: Five-strand, 3/16-inch- diameter, galvanized-steel cable, with zinc-coated
turnbuckles, a minimum of 3 inches long, with two 3/8-inch galvanized eyebolts.
Flags: Standard surveyor's plastic flagging tape, white, 6 inches long.
Upright Stakes and Horizontal Hold-Down: Rough-sawn, sound, new hardwood or
softwood, free of knots, holes, cross grain, and other defects, 2-by-2-inch nominal by
length indicated; stakes pointed at one end.
Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS
A.
Wood Pressure-Preservative Treatment: AWPA U1, Use Category UC4a; acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, and containing no arsenic or chromium.
B.
Antidesiccant: Water-insoluble emulsion, permeable moisture retarder, film forming, for trees
and shrubs. Deliver in original, sealed, and fully labeled containers and mix according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
C.
Burlap: Non-synthetic, biodegradable.
D.
Planter Drainage Gravel: Washed, sound crushed stone or gravel complying with ASTM D 448
for Size No. 8.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas to receive plants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and
conditions affecting installation and performance of the Work.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout,
concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel,
paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in soil within
a planting area.
Verify that plants and vehicles loaded with plants can travel to planting locations with
adequate overhead clearance.
Suspend planting operations during periods of excessive soil moisture until the moisture
content reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results.
Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable or which is dusty.
B.
If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a planting
area, remove the soil and contamination as directed by ATC Construction Manager and replace
with new planting soil.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities and turf areas and existing
plants from damage caused by planting operations.
B.
Lay out individual tree and shrub locations and areas for multiple plantings. Stake locations,
outline areas, and adjust locations when requested before excavating or planting. Make minor
adjustments as required.
PLANTS
329300 - 5
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
3.3
EXCAVATION FOR TREES AND SHRUBS
A.
Planting Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular planting pits.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Excavate planting pits with sides sloping inward at a 45-degree angle. Excavations with
vertical sides are unacceptable. Trim perimeter of bottom leaving center area of bottom
raised slightly to support root ball and assist in drainage away from center. Do not further
disturb base. Ensure that root ball will sit on undisturbed base soil to prevent settling.
Scarify sides of planting pit smeared or smoothed during excavation.
Excavate approximately three times as wide as ball diameter for balled and burlapped,
balled and potted, container-grown] and fabric bag-grown stock.
Excavate at least 12 inches wider than root spread and deep enough to accommodate
vertical roots for bare-root stock.
Do not excavate deeper than depth of the root ball, measured from the root flare to the
bottom of the root ball.
If area under the plant was initially dug too deep, add soil to raise it to the correct level
and thoroughly tamp the added soil to prevent settling.
Maintain angles of repose of adjacent materials to ensure stability. Do not excavate
subgrades of adjacent paving, structures, hardscapes, or other new or existing
improvements.
B.
Backfill Soil: Subsoil and topsoil removed from excavations may be used as backfill soil unless
otherwise indicated.
C.
Obstructions: Notify ATC Construction Manager if unexpected rock or obstructions detrimental
to trees or shrubs are encountered in excavations.
1.
Hardpan Layer: Drill 6-inch- diameter holes, 24 inches apart, into free-draining strata or to
a depth of 10 feet, whichever is less, and backfill with free-draining material.
D.
Drainage: Notify ATC Construction Manager if subsoil conditions evidence unexpected water
seepage or retention in tree or shrub planting pits.
E.
Fill excavations with water and allow to percolate away before positioning trees and shrubs.
3.4
TREE AND SHRUB PLANTING
A.
Inspection: At time of planting, verify that root flare is visible at top of root ball according to
ANSI Z60.1. If root flare is not visible, remove soil in a level manner from the root ball to where
the top-most root emerges from the trunk. After soil removal to expose the root flare, verify that
root ball still meets size requirements.
B.
Roots: Remove stem girdling roots and kinked roots. Remove injured roots by cutting cleanly;
do not break.
C.
Balled and Burlapped Stock: Set each plant plumb and in center of planting pit or trench with
root flare 1 inch above adjacent finish grades.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Backfill: Planting soil. For trees, use excavated soil for backfill.
After placing some backfill around root ball to stabilize plant, carefully cut and remove
burlap, rope, and wire baskets from tops of root balls and from sides, but do not remove
from under root balls. Remove pallets, if any, before setting. Do not use planting stock if
root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation.
Backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle soil and eliminate voids and air
pockets. When planting pit is approximately one-half filled, water thoroughly before
placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed.
Place planting tablets equally distributed around each planting pit when pit is
approximately one-half filled. Place tablets beside the root ball about 1 inch from root tips;
do not place tablets in bottom of the hole.
a.
Quantity: As indicated on Drawings.
PLANTS
329300 - 6
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
5.
D.
Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil.
Balled and Potted and Container-Grown Stock: Set each plant plumb and in center of planting
pit or trench with root flare 1 inch above adjacent finish grades.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Backfill: Planting soil. For trees, use excavated soil for backfill.
Carefully remove root ball from container without damaging root ball or plant.
Backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle soil and eliminate voids and air
pockets. When planting pit is approximately one-half filled, water thoroughly before
placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed.
Place planting tablets equally distributed around each planting pit when pit is
approximately one-half filled. Place tablets beside the root ball about 1 inch from root tips;
do not place tablets in bottom of the hole.
a.
5.
E.
Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil.
Fabric Bag-Grown Stock: Set each plant plumb and in center of planting pit or trench with root
flare 1 inch above adjacent finish grades.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Backfill: Planting soil. For trees, use excavated soil for backfill.
Carefully remove root ball from fabric bag without damaging root ball or plant. Do not use
planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation.
Backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle soil and eliminate voids and air
pockets. When planting pit is approximately one-half filled, water thoroughly before
placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed.
Place planting tablets equally distributed around each planting pit when pit is
approximately one-half filled. Place tablets beside the root ball about 1 inch from root tips;
do not place tablets in bottom of the hole.
a.
5.
F.
Quantity: As indicated on Drawings.
Quantity: As indicated on Drawings.
Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil.
Bare-Root Stock: Set and support each plant in center of planting pit or trench with root flare 1
inch above adjacent finish grade.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Backfill: Planting soil. For trees, use excavated soil for backfill.
Spread roots without tangling or turning toward surface. Plumb before backfilling, and
maintain plumb while working.
Carefully work backfill in layers around roots by hand. Bring roots into close contact with
the soil.
When planting pit is approximately one-half filled, water thoroughly before placing
remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed.
Place planting tablets equally distributed around each planting pit when pit is
approximately one-half filled. Place tablets beside soil-covered roots about 1 inch from
root tips; do not place tablets in bottom of the hole or touching the roots.
a.
6.
Quantity: As indicated on Drawings.
Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil.
G.
Watering Pipe: During backfilling, install watering pipe 4 feet deep into the planting pit outside
the root ball as indicated on Drawings and with top of pipe 1 inch above the mulched surface.
H.
Slopes: When planting on slopes, set the plant so the root flare on the uphill side is flush with
the surrounding soil on the slope; the edge of the root ball on the downhill side will be above the
surrounding soil. Apply enough soil to cover the downhill side of the root ball.
PLANTS
329300 - 7
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
3.5
TREE STABILIZATION
A.
Trunk Stabilization by Upright Staking and Tying: Install trunk stabilization as follows unless
otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Upright Staking and Tying: Stake trees of 2- through 5-inch caliper. Stake trees of less
than 2-inch caliper only as required to prevent wind tip out. Use a minimum of two stakes
of length required to penetrate at least 18 inches below bottom of backfilled excavation
and to extend one-third of trunk height above grade. Set vertical stakes and space to
avoid penetrating root balls or root masses.
Upright Staking and Tying: Stake trees with two stakes for trees up to 12 feet high and 21/2 inches or less in caliper; three stakes for trees less than 14 feet high and up to 4
inches in caliper. Space stakes equally around trees.
Support trees with bands of flexible ties at contact points with tree trunk. Allow enough
slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree.
Support trees with two strands of tie wire, connected to the brass grommets of tree-tie
webbing at contact points with tree trunk. Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of
tree.
a.
b.
B.
Root-Ball Stabilization: Install at- or below-grade stabilization system to secure each new
planting by the root ball unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Wood Hold-Down Method: Place vertical stakes against side of root ball and drive them
into subsoil; place horizontal wood hold-down stake across top of root ball and screw at
each end to one of the vertical stakes.
a.
b.
c.
3.6
Attach flags to each guy wire, 30 inches above finish grade.
Paint turnbuckles with luminescent white paint.
Install stakes of length required to penetrate at least 18 inches below bottom of
backfilled excavation. Saw stakes off at horizontal stake.
Install screws through horizontal hold-down and penetrating at least 1 inch into
stakes. Predrill holes if necessary to prevent splitting wood.
Install second set of stakes on other side of root trunk for larger trees.
PLANTING AREA MULCHING
A.
Install weed-control barriers before mulching according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Completely cover area to be mulched, overlapping edges a minimum of 6 inches and secure
seams with galvanized pins.
B.
Mulch backfilled surfaces of planting areas and other areas to a depth of 3 to 4 inches.
3.7
PLANT MAINTENANCE
A.
If specified in contract documents for specific site, maintain plantings by pruning, cultivating,
watering, weeding, fertilizing, mulching, restoring planting saucers, adjusting and repairing treestabilization devices, resetting to proper grades or vertical position, and performing other
operations as required to establish healthy, viable plantings.
B.
Fill in, as necessary, soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes.
Replace mulch materials damaged or lost in areas of subsidence.
C.
Apply treatments as required to keep plant materials, planted areas, and soils free of pests and
pathogens or disease. Use integrated pest management practices when possible to minimize
use of pesticides and reduce hazards. Treatments include physical controls such as hosing off
foliage, mechanical controls such as traps, and biological control agents.
PLANTS
329300 - 8
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
3.8
REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT
A.
General: Repair or replace existing or new trees and other plants that are damaged by
construction operations, in a manner approved by ATC Construction Manager.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Remove and replace trees that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy
condition before the end of the corrections period or are damaged during construction
operations that ATC Construction Manager determines are incapable of restoring to normal
growth pattern.
1.
2.
3.9
Submit details of proposed pruning and repairs.
Perform repairs of damaged trunks, branches, and roots within 24 hours, if approved.
Replace trees and other plants that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status,
as determined by ATC Construction Manager.
Provide new trees of same size as those new trees being replaced.
Species of Replacement Trees: Same species being replaced
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
During planting, keep adjacent paving and construction clean and work area in an orderly
condition. Clean wheels of vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks,
or other paved areas.
B.
Protect plants from damage due to landscape operations and operations of other contractors
and trades. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or
replace damaged plantings.
END OF SECTION
PLANTS
329300 - 9
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
SECTION 338110
STEEL COMMUNICATION STRUCTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
Attention is directed to all Sections within DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which
are hereby made a part of this Section of the Specifications.
B.
This specification is not intended to cover the manufacture of the product in detail, but to provide
basic requirements. Those items not mentioned by this specification shall be in accordance with
best industry practice. The quality of materials used and the method of manufacturing, handling
and shipping shall be such as to insure the finished products meet the requirements and
properties specified herein.
C.
Where dimensions are given in this specification without specific tolerances, or where no
dimensions are given, the tolerances and dimensions shown on the manufacturer’s drawings, or
permitted by good shop tolerances, will be considered acceptable.
D.
No deviations from this specification shall be made without prior written approval from the ATC
Construction Manager.
E.
ATC may choose to pre-qualify manufacturers employing various methods to ensure product
conformance.
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this
Section, including but not limited to the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and are specified under the
designated Sections:
1.
1.3
Monopole structures.
Self-supporting towers.
Guyed towers.
Section 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS for miscellaneous metals not included with
tower.
REFERENCES
A.
Comply with the following standards as applicable:
1.
TIA Standard – “Structural Standard for Antenna Supporting Structures and Antennas”
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
ANSI/TIA-222-G, latest edition and addendum.
ANSI/TIA/EIA-222-F, latest edition.
“AISC Specification for the Design, Fabrications and Erection of Structural Steel for
Buildings”. Current Edition, American Institute of Steel Construction
A123/A123M “Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and
Steel Products”
A153/A153M “Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware”
STEEL COMMUNICATIONS STRUCTURES
338110 - 1
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
1.4
AWS D1.1/D1.1M “Structural Welding Code – Steel, or latest edition, American Welding
Society”
A572/572 “High Strength Low Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel”
A36/A36M “Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel”
A514/A514M “Standard Specification for High-Yield Strength, Quenched and Tempered
Allow Steel Plate, Suitable for Welding”
A588/A588/M “Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel with
50 ksi Yield Point to 4 in. thick”
A673/A673m “Standard Specification for Sampling Procedure for Impact Testing of Steel”
ASTM A242/A242M “Standard Specification for High Strength Low-Allow Structural Steel”
ASTM A500 “Hollow Structural Sections”
A501 “Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel
Structural Tubing”
A618/A618M “Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless HighStrength Low-Alloy Structural Tubing”
A194/A194M “Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High
Pressure or High Temperature Service or Both”
A563 “Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts”
A307 “Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile
Strength”
A325 “Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi
Minimum Tensile Strength”
A615/A615M “Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement”
Anchor bolts shall comply with a Charpy “V” notch test in accordance with A370 of 15ftlbs @ -20° F.
ACI 318 “Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary”
A490 “Standard Specification for Heat Treated Steel Structural Bolts, 150 ksi Minimum
Tensile Strength"
ASTM F-1554 07 Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi
Yield Strength
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Delegated Tower Design: Design tower assemblies, including comprehensive engineering
analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design
criteria indicated.
1.
Tower design height is to be height of steel from bottom of base plate to top of tallest
structural tower section (not including lighting rod or other appurtenance).
B.
Delegated Foundation Design: Design tower foundation, including comprehensive engineering
analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design
criteria indicated.
C.
Structural Performance:
conditions indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Provide tower assemblies and foundation within limits and under
Design Loads: As indicated in New Tower Design Form provided by the ATC
Construction Manager and as required by building code
See New Tower Design Form for additional loading and design information
Break point type fall radius may be required at the time of design and if so requirements
will be included on the New Tower Design Form.
Design Structural Use Percentage: Structural use percentage by analysis must be less
than 100%
Geotechnical Report: Design foundation in accordance with the geotechnical report
furnished by ATC.
Minimum buried mat foundation and or spread footing thickness is 1’6”
Foundation design is to support constructability of a monolithic pour whenever possible
STEEL COMMUNICATIONS STRUCTURES
338110 - 2
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
Tower Drawings: Show tower layout, tower taper, all member types, member lengths, member
sizes, and member thicknesses. Tower assemblies; required fabrication details; fastening and
anchorage details, mechanical fastener details, and anchor bolts design and embedment.
Show bracing, splices, accessory connection details, and member connection details, show
number and types of connection hardware, hole sizes, splice and base plate thicknesses, length
of slip joint splices, top and bottom dimensions of slip joint splices.
B.
Foundation Drawings: Show foundation layout, all dimensions, depths below and above grade,
all rebar type and grade, rebar placement and location, all connection details, anchor steel
placement and embedment, concrete compressive strength, and accessory connection details.
C.
Delegated-Tower Design Submittal: Supply sealed tower drawings, fabrication drawings, and
full rigorous structural analysis showing all member use percentages and deflections. Comply
with all performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and
sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. Guy tower
designs shall include tension charts with temperature charts increments of 5°.
D.
Delegated Foundation Submittal: Supply sealed foundation design drawings and sealed
calculations. Comply with all performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis
data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
E.
Welding certificates
F.
Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency, unless otherwise stated, indicating that
each of the following complies with requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests
for current products:
1.
1.6
Steel sheet (Mill Certifications)
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, design calculations, and other
structural data by a qualified professional engineer.
B.
Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice
in the jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering
services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for
installations of tower assemblies that are similar to those indicated for the Project in material,
design, and extent.
C.
Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency, or in-house
testing with calibrated test equipment indicating steel sheet complies with requirements,
including base-metal thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical
requirements, ductility, delamination, and metallic-coating thickness.
D.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding
Code--Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Protect tower assemblies from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery,
storage, and handling.
STEEL COMMUNICATIONS STRUCTURES
338110 - 3
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
tower assemblies that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.2
Valmont Industries
Rohn Products LLC
TransAmerican Power Products
Nello Corporation
Stealth Technologies
As approved by ATC Engineering Department.
STEEL MATERIALS
A.
Material allowed for use in the fabrication of towers has been limited to those normally used by
the communication tower industry. Other steel materials to different specifications are available
and may be proposed. However, complete specifications shall be submitted to ATC
Construction Manager for approval by ATC Engineering Department. Do not proceed until prior
written approval by ATC is obtained.
B.
ASTM specifications cover a wide range of steel materials which have been developed for
various service requirements. Not all steels are suitable for use in all service types or
environments. The strength of the steel is not the only factor to consider in steel selection.
C.
ATC does not allow the use of yield strengths higher than the base specification for a grade of
steel. For instance, A572-Grade 50 steel which tests to 55 KSI (based on mill test certifications)
will not be allowed using the higher yield strength of 55 KSI. It will be limited to the 50 KSI yield.
Exception: Material conforming to ANSI-TIA Section 5.4.2 may be approved with prior
authorization of ATC Engineering.
2.3
MONOPOLE TOWERS
A.
General: Monopole towers shall be offered using flange splices, slip splices or a combination of
both. Poles shall be round, 12-sided, 16 sided or 18-sided. All pole material shall be hot-dipped
galvanized.
B.
Design Criteria:
1.
2.
Monopole towers shall be designed to criteria as shown on the New Tower Design Form.
In no case will the basic wind speed be less than:
a.
b.
Rev G minimums: 85 MPH 3-sec gust
ASCE 7-10 minimums:
1)
2)
3)
3.
C.
100 mph for risk category I structures
110 mph for risk category II structures
115 mph for risk category III and IV structures
Tower shall be designed for loading as shown on the New Tower Design Form.
Seismic Considerations:
1.
When TIA Rev G designs are required - seismic loading shall be considered in the design
of the structures when Ss is larger than 1.0. The tower designer shall provide seismic
calculations and reactions to compare with the total horizontal wind load without ice. In
the event the seismic shear is greater than 50% of the wind load - the tower designer
shall contact ATC Engineering Department for direction.
STEEL COMMUNICATIONS STRUCTURES
338110 - 4
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
D.
Shaft Sections:
1.
E.
Anchor Bolts:
1.
F.
2.
All poles shall include a structural top flange and separate cover plate. The top flange
shall be a minimum of 1-1/2” thick A36 min steel with a welded connection having the
same or higher capacity as the top pole shaft. The flange shall also include (12) 1-1/16”
dia. bolt holes at an appropriate bolt circle which will be dependent on the top pole
diameter.
Beacon Plate
1.
2.4
All poles shall include (1) entrance port per carrier. Entrance ports shall be a minimum
10” x 20” in dimension and fully reinforced. All Entrance ports shall be fully reinforced
with rims that are designed to replace full capacity of the removed section of pole.
Provide cover plates for all ports.
Port covers not required for (1) Entrance port and (1) level of Exit Ports at time of
shipment
Top Flange:
1.
J.
Each Carrier elevation on the pole will require (3) exit ports allowing a minimum of (18) 15/8” coax to exit the pole. (I.E. – a 3–Carrier pole would require (9) exit ports). All exit
ports shall be fully reinforced with rims that are designed to replace full capacity of the
removed section of pole. Hooks or other supports for coax shall be provided at each port
location. The minimum size exit port shall be 6" X 18". Provide cover plates for all ports.
Entrance Ports:
1.
I.
For (2) Carrier poles – 16”
For (3) Carrier poles – 18”
For (4) Carrier poles – 20”
For (5) Carrier poles – 22”
Exit Ports:
1.
H.
Anchor bolt lengths shall be as required by ACI 318 to develop the full tension capacity of
the bolts and will also be supplied with upper and lower templates to ensure verticality
during placement of concrete. Any listed material can be used for anchor bolts – but 21/4” diameter A615 Gr. 75 (18J) material is preferred. Anchor bolts shall be hot-dipped
galvanized. All anchor bolt nuts shall be hot-dipped galvanized. Provide adequate
concrete cover below the anchor bolt head to prevent shear cone failure from
compression. (Not required for design with deformed bars).
Minimum Diameter: In order to ensure that the design quantity of coax will fit inside the pole the
following minimum top diameters shall be maintained:
1.
2.
3.
4.
G.
Steel for pole shafts shall be any of those listed in this specification. Steel other than that
listed can be offered – but complete specifications shall be provided to ATC prior to
bidding. Written acceptance from ATC Engineering Department will be required before
using other steel material.
All towers over 200’ shall include a beacon plate.
GUYED TOWERS
A.
General: Guyed towers shall be offered using angle, or solid rods for legs and bracing. Pipe
shall not be used for legs or bracing. Towers shall be triangular in cross-section (unless
requested otherwise). The minimum size of any structural angle member shall be 1-3/4” X 1-3/4”
X 3/16”. All tower material shall be hot-dipped galvanized.Design Criteria:
STEEL COMMUNICATIONS STRUCTURES
338110 - 5
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
1.
2.
Guyed towers shall be designed to criteria as shown on the New Tower Design Form
In no case will the basic wind speed be less than:
a.
b.
Rev G minimums: 85 MPH 3-sec gust
ASCE 7-10 minimums:
1)
2)
3)
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Tower shall be designed for loading as shown on the New Tower Design Form:
Single rows of coax are not allowed to be treated as clusters or blocks for design
purposes. TX lines to be double stacked from 6’ to carrier RAD per New Tower Design
Form.
Climbing ladder rungs shall be incorporated into one tower face
Guy type towers shall be designed with pin type base connections.
Guy Anchors shall be of AMT proprietary design and shipped directly from AMT
Seismic Considerations:
1.
C.
100 mph for risk category I structures
110 mph for risk category II structures
115 mph for risk category III and IV structures
When TIA Rev G designs are required - seismic loading shall be considered in the design
of the structures when Ss is larger than 1.0. The tower designer shall provide seismic
calculations and reactions to compare with the total horizontal wind load without ice. In
the event the seismic shear is greater than 50% of the wind load - the tower designer
shall contact ATC Engineering Department for direction.
Guy Radius:
1.
2.
Guy Radius shall be 70% for outer anchors.
Number of guy anchor radii designed shall be based on tower height:
Tower&Height&
Anchor&Radii&Required&(No.)&
D.
551'+&
1&
2&
Per&ATC&Engineering&
42” - For towers with total height from 0 ft. to 400 ft.
48” - For towers with total height 401 ft. to 500 ft.
54” - For towers with total height 501 ft. to 600 ft.
60” - For towers taller than 600 ft
Torque Arms: Torque arms shall be required as follows:
Tower&Ht.&
G.
351'-550'&
Face Width: The minimum face width for guyed towers shall be as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
E.
0-350'&
&&100’-300'&
301'-400'&
401'-600'&
&&&&600'+&
Torque&Arms&Required&
(No.)&
1&
2&
3&
Per&ATC&Eng.&
Torque&Arm&Location&
(range&of&elevation)&
200’-300’&
&
&200'-300'&&&
300'-400'&
300'-400'&&&&
400'-500'&&&
500'-600'&
Per&ATC&Eng.&
Beacon Plate
1.
All towers over 200’ shall include a beacon plate.
STEEL COMMUNICATIONS STRUCTURES
338110 - 6
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
2.5
SELF-SUPPORTING TOWERS
A.
General: Self-supporting towers shall be offered using pipe, angle, or solid rods for legs and
solid rods, open end tubular bracing, or angle bracing. Towers shall be triangular in crosssection (unless requested otherwise). The minimum size of any structural angle member shall
be 1-3/4” X 1-3/4” X 3/16”. All tower material shall be hot-dipped galvanized.
B.
Self-supporting towers within 60 miles of coastal waters within the US shall be of solid member
design. No pipe leg or bracing is allowed.
C.
Design Criteria:
1.
2.
Self-supporting towers shall be designed to criteria as shown on the New Tower Design
Form.
In no case will the basic wind speed be less than:
a.
b.
Rev G minimums: 85 MPH 3-sec gust
ASCE 7-10 minimums:
1)
2)
3)
3.
4.
5.
D.
When TIA Rev G designs are required - seismic loading shall be considered in the design
of the structures when Ss is larger than 1.0. The tower designer shall provide seismic
calculations and reactions to compare with the total horizontal wind load without ice. In
the event the seismic shear is greater than 50% of the wind load - the tower designer
shall contact ATC Engineering Department for direction.
Face Width:
1.
2.6
Tower shall be designed for loading as shown on the New Tower Design. Single rows of
coax are not allowed to be treated as clusters or blocks for design purposes. TX lines to
be double stacked from 6’ to carrier RAD per New Tower Design Form.
Structural Bolts: All bolts connecting structural elements shall be A325.
Anchor Bolts: Anchors bolts shall be ASTM F1554 Grade 55 minimum, substitutions are
allowable with approval by ATC Engineering. Bent rods not allowed.
Considerations:
1.
E.
100 mph for risk category I structures
110 mph for risk category II structures
115 mph for risk category III and IV structures
The minimum face width at the top of the tower for self-supporting towers shall be 4 ft.
CLIMBING FACILITIES AND SAFETY CLIMB
A.
Self-Supporting tower structures shall include a:
1.
2.
Single discrete climbing ladder
or
Step pegs on all tower legs until a face width of 11’ and continuing up (1) tower leg the
remaining ht. of tower.
B.
Guy Towers shall have climbing rungs incorporated into one tower face
C.
Monopoles shall have step bolts incorporated into pole
1.
2.
Climbing areas shall be free of obstructions and shall be excluded from consideration for
placement or support of coax.
Safety Climb Systems shall be provided on all towers.
STEEL COMMUNICATIONS STRUCTURES
338110 - 7
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
2.7
FAA TOWER LIGHTING SYSTEMS
A.
When required; install lighting system per requirements listed below:
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine foundation for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance.
1.
3.2
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Install foundation in accordance with appropriate specification section per foundation type.
B.
Install tower assemblies in accordance with referenced standards and to manufacturer's written
instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
C.
Towers with FAA Lighting
1.
Under No Circumstances shall a tower that requires FAA lighting be erected until the
following have been completed;
a.
b.
Commercial power has been delivered to the site and a utility meter in ATC’s
name has been installed by the power company;
The contractor has received the Owner provided tower lighting kit, lighting
controller and monitoring system
STEEL COMMUNICATIONS STRUCTURES
338110 - 8
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
c.
2.
Upon completion of the tower erection and installation of the tower lighting the Contractor
must call the ATC Network Operations Center (NOC) to test and integrate the lighting and
monitoring system
a.
b.
c.
3.
If the erection of the tower takes more than one work day to complete the
Contractor shall provide temporary lighting for air navigation during non-work days
and evenings for the duration of the tower erection process.
ATC NOC: 1-877-518-6937
Obtain NOC Ticket Number and confirm successful commissioning with NOC
Any issues with tower lighting or monitoring must be reported by the Contractor to
the ATC Construction Manager immediately
Regulatory Compliance Checklist (RCC): Within 24 hours of the tower erection being
completed and the structure at its highest point the Contractor shall complete, sign and
date the RCC document and submit said document to the ATC Construction Manager.
4.
D.
Install assemblies and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections
securely fastened.
E.
Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in
intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place,
undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent
connections to framing are secured.
F.
Install safety climb per manufactures guidelines
G.
Coax:
1.
3.3
Coax including but not limited to shielded, hybrid, lighting, and power cables are to be
secured to the tower via clips on standard in place coax ladders. . The use of plastic tie
wraps or “zip ties” or electrical tape is prohibited.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Independent Testing Agency: Cooperate with the Independent Testing Agency engaged by
ATC for field quality control activities required in Section 014320, “Quality Control, Testing and
Special Inspection Services.” Provide at least 48 hours notice to testing agency prior to the time
testing and/or inspection is required. Allow inspectors access to work areas, as needed to
perform inspections.
B.
Tests and Inspections: Engage Independent Testing Agency in accordance with Section 014320
“Quality Control, Testing and Special Inspection Services.” for testing of listed properties.
C.
Additional testing and inspecting required due to Contractors deficiencies will be at Contractor’s
sole expense..
3.4
REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A.
Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and
installed tower assemblies with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and
manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Painting Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged painted coatings on fabricated and installed
tower assemblies with repair paint in accordance with section 099000 of this specification.
C.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
installer that ensure that tower assemblies are without damage or deterioration at time of
Substantial Completion.
STEEL COMMUNICATIONS STRUCTURES
338110 - 9
AMERICAN TOWER MASTER SPECIFICATION
END OF SECTION
STEEL COMMUNICATIONS STRUCTURES
338110 - 10